Home

TNC 128 - User's Manual HEIDENHAIN

1. Example NCA The directory AUFTR1 was created on the TNC drive Then in the i AUFTR1 directory the directory NCPROG was created and the part AUFTR1 program PROG1 H was copied into it The part program now has B the following path NCPROG TNC AUFTR1 NCPROG PROG1 H Da WZTAB The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with different paths 4 N A35K941 ZYLM Tha TESTPROG HUBER i KAR25T 98 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 Overview Functions of the file manager Function Soft key Page Copy a single file COPY 102 me i Display a specific file type SELECT 101 TYPE Create new file 102 FILE b Display the last 10 files that were LAST 105 selected STe Delete a file S 106 Tag a file 107 TAG Rename a file RENAME 108 ABC XYZ Protect a file against editing and PROTECT 109 erasure BECI Cancel file protection uvpRoTECT 109 Importing tool tables 158 TABLE Manage network drives 118 NET Select the editor es 109 EDITOR Sort files by properties 108 SORT Copy a directory COPY DIR 104 J gt Delete directory with all its Oee subdirectories gZ aLL Display all the directo
2. i a plane The TNC offers the following soft keys Function Soft keys Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right or left aml U Shift the vertical sectional plane forward or backward 7 uU S Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards or downwards E t The position of the sectional planes is visible during shifting The default setting of the sectional plane is selected so that it lies in the working plane in the workpiece center and in the tool axis on the top surface Return sectional planes to default setting i gt Select the function for resetting the sectional i as ll planes TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 321 Test run and program run 13 1 Graphics 3 D view Choose 3 D view The high resolution 3 D view enables you to display the surface of the machined workpiece in greater detail With a simulated light source the TNC creates realistic light and shadow conditions gt Press the 3 D view soft key 322 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Graphics Rotating enlarging reducing and shifting the 3 D view PE gt Select the functions for rotating and enlarging reducing The TNC displays the following soft keys
3. Group name ID no Number Index Meaning TS triggering touch probe 50 1 Touch probe type 350 2 Line in the touch probe table 51 Effective length 52 1 Effective ball radius 2 Rounding radius 53 1 Center offset reference axis 2 Center offset minor axis 54 Spindle orientation angle in degrees center offset 55 1 Rapid traverse 2 Measuring feed rate 56 1 Maximum measuring range 2 Safety clearance 57 1 Spindle orientation possible O No 1 Yes 2 Spindle orientation angle TT tool touch probe 70 1 Touch probe type 2 Line in the touch probe table 71 1 Center point in reference axis REF system 2 Center point in minor axis REF system 3 Center point in tool axis REF system 72 Probe contact radius 75 1 Rapid traverse 2 Measuring feed rate for stationary spindle 3 Measuring feed rate for rotating spindle 76 1 Maximum measuring range 2 Safety clearance for linear measurement 3 Safety clearance for radial measurement 77 Spindle speed 78 Probing direction TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 217 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional functions Group name ID no Number Index Meaning Reference point from touch 1 1to9 Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle 360 X Y Z A B C probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle U V W O without probe length compensation but with probe radius compensation workp
4. Data for SQL tables 40 1 Result code for the last SQL command Data from the tool table 50 1 Tool no Tool length 2 Tool no Tool radius 3 Tool no Tool radius R2 4 Tool no Oversize for tool length DL 5 Tool no Tool radius oversize DR 6 Tool no Tool radius oversize DR2 7 Tool no Tool locked 0 or 1 8 Tool no Number of the replacement tool 212 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Group name ID no Number Index Additional functions 8 8 Meaning 9 Tool no Maximum tool age TIME1 10 Tool no Maximum tool age TIME2 11 Tool no Current tool age CUR TIME 12 Tool no PLC status 13 Tool no Maximum tooth length LCUTS 15 Tool no TT Number of tool teeth CUT 16 Tool no TT Wear tolerance for length LTOL 17 Tool no TT Wear tolerance for radius RTOL 18 Tool no TT Rotational direction DIRECT 0 positive 1 negative 19 Tool no TT Offset in plane R OFFS 20 Tool no TT Offset in length LOFFS 21 Tool no TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK 22 Tool no TT Break tolerance for radius RBREAK 23 Tool no PLC value 28 Tool no Maximum rom NMAX 32 Tool no Point angle TANGLE 35 Tool no Wear tolerance for radius R2TOL 37 Tool no Corresponding line in the touch probe table 38 Tool no Timestamp of last use Pocket table data 51 1 Pocket number Tool number Pocket number Special tool O No 1 Yes Poc
5. Enter the text with the screen keyboard gt Press the GOTO key if you want to enter letters for example a program name or directory name using the screen keyboard gt The TNC opens a window in which the numeric entry field of the TNC is displayed with the corresponding letters assigned gt You can move the cursor to the desired character by repeatedly pressing the respective key gt Wait until the selected character is transferred to the input field before you enter the next character gt Use the OK soft key to load the text into the open dialog field Use the abc ABC soft key to select upper or lower case If your machine tool builder has defined additional special characters you can call them with the SPECIAL CHARACTER soft key and insert them To delete individual characters use the Backspace soft key 122 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Adding comments 4 2 4 2 Adding comments Application You can add comments to a part program to explain program steps G iteruan operation E Prooranmina or make general notes See ee ere TNG nc_prog TNG128 2_128 h O BEGIN PGM 2 1 BLK FORM 0 1 If the TNC cannot show the entire comment on the 2 SUK FoR 0 2 X screen the gt gt sign is displayed The last character in a comment block must not have any tilde Add comments v Select the block after which the comment is to b
6. Function Soft keys Rotate in 5 steps about the vertical axis far oS g g Tilt in 5 steps about the horizontal axis iy a a o m v Enlarge the graphic stepwise Reduce the graphic stepwise oe Reset the graphic to its original size 5 E gt Shift the soft key row Function n lt wv Move the graphic upward or downward Move the graphic to the left or right aE Reset the graphic to its original position SHE If there is a mouse attached to your TNC you can also perform the functions described above with the mouse gt In order to rotate the graphic shown in three dimensions Hold the right mouse button down and move the mouse After you release the right mouse button the TNC orients the workpiece to the defined orientation gt In order to shift the graphic shown Hold the center mouse button or the wheel button down and move the mouse The TNC shifts the workpiece in the corresponding direction After you release the center mouse button the TNC shifts the workpiece to the defined position gt In order to zoom in on a certain area with the mouse Mark a zoom area by holding the left mouse button down After you release the left mouse button the TNC zooms in on the defined area of the workpiece gt In order to quickly zoom in and out with the mouse Rotate the wheel button forward or backward TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programm
7. TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 13 5 337 Test run and program run 13 5 Program run Example The power failed while a thread cutting cycle in the tilted working plane was being performed You have to retract the tap gt Switch on the power supply for control and machine The TNC starts the operating system This process may take several minutes Then the TNC will display the message Power interrupted in the screen header gt Activate the Retraction mode Press the RETRACT soft key The TNC displays the message RETRACT gt Acknowledge the power interruption Press the CE key The TNC compiles the PLC program gt Switch on the control voltage The TNC checks the functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit If at least one axis is not referenced you have to compare the displayed position values with the actual axis value and confirm their agreement Follow the dialog if required gt Check the preselected traversing mode if required select THREAD gt Check the preselected thread pitch if required enter the thread pitch gt Check the preselected direction of rotation if required select the direction of thread rotation Right handed thread The spindle turns in clockwise direction when moving into the workpiece and counterclockwise when retracting Left hand thread The spindle turns in counterclockwise direction when moving into the workpiece and clockwise
8. TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 129 Programming Programming aids 4 5 Programming graphics Magnification or reduction of details You can select the graphics display SL e frase Se programin 3 f gt Shift the soft key row second row see figure ae 07 56 The following functions are available Function Soft key Press and hold the desired soft key to move et the frame overlay Me hae l a l Press the soft key to reduce the detail D gt Press the soft key to enlarge the detail The RESET WORKPIECE BLANK soft key is used to restore the original section 130 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Error messages 4 6 4 6 Error messages Display of errors The TNC generates error messages when it detects problems such as m Incorrect data input Logical errors in the program Contour elements that are impossible to machine Incorrect use of touch probes When an error occurs it is displayed in red type in the header Long and multi line error messages are displayed in abbreviated form Complete information on all pending errors is shown in the error window If a rare processor check error should occur the TNC automatically opens the error window You cannot remove such an error Shut down the system and restar
9. in the reference axis minor axis or tool axis This can be necessary if for example you would like to save the measured position in the reference and minor axis 308 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions 11 7 software option 17 Measuring workpieces with a 3 D touch probe You can also use the touch probe in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel operating modes to make simple measurements on the workpiece With a 3 D touch probe you can determine m Position coordinates and from them m Dimensions on the workpiece Finding the coordinates of a position on an aligned workpiece PROBING gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING a POS soft key gt Move the touch probe to a position near the touch point gt Select the probe direction and axis of the coordinate Use the corresponding soft keys for selection gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button The TNC shows the coordinates of the touch point as reference point TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 309 Manual operation and setup 11 7 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Measuring workpiece dimensions PROBING gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING a POS soft key gt Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch p
10. 302 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe Touch Probe Functions 11 6 software option 17 The calibration routine varies depending on how your touch probe can be oriented No orientation possible or orientation possible in only one direction The TNC executes one approximate and one fine measurement and determines the effective ball tip radius column R in tool t Orientation possible in two directions e g HEIDENHAIN touch probes with cable The TNC executes one approximate and one fine measurement rotates the touch probe by 180 and then executes four more probing operations The center offset CAL_OF in tchprobe tp is determined in addition to the radius by probing from opposite orientations m Any orientation possible e g HEIDENHAIN infrared touch probes For probing routine see orientation possible in two directions Proceed as follows for manual calibration using a calibration ring gt In the Manual Operation mode position the ball tip inside the bore of the ring gauge gt Select the calibration function Press the CAL R D soft key gt Enter the diameter of the ring gauge gt Enter the safety clearance gt New cal spindle angle Spindle angle that is used for the calibration The TNC uses CAL_ANG from the touch probe table as a default value If you change the value the TNC saves the value to the touch probe table during ca
11. Optional WHERE selection criteria A selection criterion consists of a column name condition see table and comparative value Link selection criteria with logical AND or OR Program the comparative value directly or with a Q parameter A Q parameter is introduced with a colon and placed in single quotation marks see example Optional ORDER BY column name ASC for ascending sorting or ORDER BY column name DESC for descending sorting If you program neither ASC nor DESC ascending sorting is executed by default The TNC places the selected rows in the indicated column Optional FOR UPDATE keyword The selected rows are locked against write accesses from other processes Condition Programming Equal to Not equal to l lt gt Less than lt Less than or equal to lt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to gt Linking multiple conditions Logical AND AND Logical OR OR 228 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 SQL FETCH Accessing tables with SQL commands 38 9 SQL FETCH reads the row addressed with INDEX from the result set and places the table entries in the bound assigned O parameters The result set is addressed with the HANDLE SQL FETCH takes into account all columns entered in the Select command saL FETCH gt Parameter no for result Q parameter in which the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error oc
12. problems can occur occasionally when you transmit data over a serial interface They can be overcome by repeating the transmission an j gt Call the file manager cae SELECT z M E mi TYPE gt Select the screen layout for data transfer Press L meron 2 the WINDOW soft key Use the arrow keys to highlight the file s that you want to transfer gt Moves the highlight up and down within a window gt Moves the highlight from the right to the left window and vice versa 116 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 If you wish to copy from the TNC to the external data medium move the highlight in the left window to the file to be transferred If you wish to copy from the external data medium to the TNC move the highlight in the right window to the file to be transferred gt Select another drive or directory Press the SHOW TREE TREE soft key gt Use the arrow keys to select the desired directory gt Select the desired file Press the SHOW FILES soft FILES key copy gt Use the arrow keys to select the file pace gt Transfer a single file Press the COPY soft key gt Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key A status window appears on the TNC informing about the copying progress or gt Stop transfer Press the WI
13. 3 Read rows from the result set modify and or add new rows Adopt one row of the result set into the O parameters of your NC program SQL FETCH Prepare changes in the Q parameters and transfer to a row in the result set SQL UPDATE Prepare new table row in the O parameters and transfer as a new row to the result set SQL INSERT 4 Conclude transaction If changes insertions were made the data from the result set is placed in the table file The data is now saved in the file Any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL COMMIT If table entries were not changed or inserted only read access any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL ROLLBACK WITHOUT INDEX Multiple transactions can be edited at the same time You must conclude a transaction even if it consists solely of read accesses Only this guarantees that changes insertions are not lost that locks are canceled and that result sets are released TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 223 Programming Q Parameters 8 9 Accessing tables with SOL commands Result set The selected rows are numbered in ascending order within the result set starting from 0 This numbering is referred to as the index The index is used for read and write accesses enabling a row of the result set to be specifically addressed It can often be advantageous to sort the rows in the resu
14. 390 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Calling a cycle in connection with point tables With CYCL CALL PAT the TNC runs the point table that you last defined even if you defined the point table in a program that was nested with CALL PGM If you want the TNC to call the last defined fixed cycle at the points defined in a point table then program the cycle call with CYCLE CALL PAT gt To program the cycle call press the CYCL CALL key gt Press the CYCL CALL PAT soft key to call a point table gt Enter the feed rate at which the TNC is to move from point to point if you make no entry the TNC will move at the last programmed feed rate FMAX is not valid gt If required enter a miscellaneous function M then confirm with the END key The TNC retracts the tool to the safety clearance between the starting points Depending on which is greater the TNC uses either the spindle axis coordinate from the cycle call or the value from cycle parameter Q204 as the clearance height If you want to move at reduced feed rate when pre positioning in the spindle axis use the miscellaneous function M103 Effect of the point tables with SL cycles and Cycle 12 The TNC interprets the points as an additional datum shift Effect of the point tables with Cycles 200 to 207 The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates of the hole centers If you want to use the coordinate defined
15. Tool axis Q109 The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis Tool axis Parameter value No tool axis defined Q109 1 X axis Q109 0 Y axis Q109 1 Z axis Q109 2 U axis Q109 6 V axis Q109 7 W axis Q109 8 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 247 Programming Q Parameters 8 12 Preassigned Q parameters Spindle status 0110 The value of the parameter Q110 depends on the M function last programmed for the spindle M function Parameter value No spindle status defined Q110 1 M3 Spindle ON clockwise Q110 0 M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise Q110 1 M5 after M3 Q110 2 M5 after M4 Q110 3 Coolant on off Q111 M function Parameter value M8 Coolant ON Q111 1 M9 Coolant OFF Q111 0 Overlap factor Q112 The overlap factor for pocket milling is assigned to Q112 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 During nesting with PGM CALL the value of the parameter 0113 depends on the dimensional data of the program from which the other programs are called Dimensional data of the main program Parameter value Metric system mm Q113 0 Inch system inches 0113 1 Tool length Q114 The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114 gt The TNC remembers the current tool length even if the power is interrupted 248 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014
16. b 30 Ro FMAX 7 ze RO FMAX a z a mo Fsoo s ovs Re so xas Re 1O Yo85 Re i2 XMS Re J x A Ifae E a Gr m o 0 000 _ Je Lis Bs 2000 oN G Ovr 100 usss status TIAA TAAN ARETA STATUS OF _ oveRVIEW pos STATUS O PARAM ED a 69 Introduction 2 4 Status displays Program section repeat Subprograms LBL tab Soft key Meaning EJF toorem run full sequence Gi Program run full sequence ING nc_prog 723 h No direct Active program section repeats with block e selection number label number and number of possible programmed repeats repeats yet to be run 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 2 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 15 Z 2000 4 Z 100 RO FMAX M3 X 30 RO FMAX 5 6 Y 30 RO FMAX 7 Z 2 RO FMAX a 3 Active subprograms with block number in which the subprogram was called and the label number that was called Z 4 RO F500 Hts R 10 X 85 Re 11 Y 85 Re 12 Ke5 Re 2 g E oJ v 0 000 iz 500 000 go F100 W mode Nome Bo tas Bis 2000 __ E o omin Jovr 100 Ju 573 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS OF lt m gt overview Pos STATUS Q PARAM Z L Information on standard cycles CYC tab Soft key Meaning EQeroaram run full sequence a Gl Program
17. 5 Confirm with the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp R R no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation gt Feed rate F Enter the positioning feed rate e g 3000 mm min and confirm with the ENT key gt Miscellaneous function M Switch on the spindle and coolant e g M13 Confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 49 First Steps with the TNC 128 1 3 Programming the first part gt Approach contour point 1 Press the orange X axis key and enter the value 5 for the position to be approached gt Tool radius comp R R no comp Select the R soft key The traverse path is decreased by the tool radius gt Feed rate F Enter the machining feed rate e g 700 mm min and confirm your entry with the END key gt Approach contour point 2 Press the orange Y axis key and enter the value 95 for the position to be approached gt Tool radius comp R R no comp Select the R soft key The traverse path is increased by the tool radius Confirm your entry with the END key gt Approach contour point 3 Press the orange X axis key and enter the value 95 for the position to be approached gt Tool radius comp R R no comp Select the R soft key The traverse path is increased by the tool radius Confirm your entry with the END key gt Approach contour point 4 Press the orange Y axis key
18. ruer a COMMENT E gt Select the menu for defining various FUNCTIONS conversational functions Function Soft key Description Define file functions RTA page 271 FILE Define coordinate page 272 TRANSFORM transformations Define string functions a page 236 FUNCTIONS Add comments page 123 264 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Freely definable tables 10 2 10 2 Freely definable tables Fundamentals In freely definable tables you can read and save any information Dea a from the NC program The O parameter functions FN 26 to FN 28 ge aan E are provided for this purpose er z on You can change the format of freely definable tables i e the er oz columns and their properties by using the structure editor They enable you to make tables that are exactly tailored to your application You can also switch between table view default setting and form view BEGIN END Creating a freely definable table gt To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key gt Enter any file name with the TAB extension and confirm with the ENT key The TNC displays a pop up window with permanently saved table formats gt Use the arrow key to select the table template EXAMPLE TAB and confirm with the ent key The TNC opens a new table in the predefined format gt To adapt the table to your requirements you have to edit the ta
19. 13 Y 20 FMAX M3 M99 14 X 80 FMAX 14 Y 50 FMAX M99 403 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 16 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the entered feed rate F 3 If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool retracts at the retraction feed rate to the set up clearance remains there if programmed for the entered dwell time and advances again at FMAX to the set up clearance above the first PLUNGING DEPTH 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 6 The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to set up clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction I
20. 5 2014 Graphically testing the first part 1 4 Graphically testing the first part Selecting the correct operating mode You can test programs in the Test Run mode gt Press the Test Run operating mode key the TNC switches to that mode Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC see Modes of Operation page 65 m Testing programs see Test Run page 330 Selecting the tool table for the test run You only need to execute this step if you have not activated a tool table in the Test Run mode gt Press the PGM MGT key The TNC opens the file manager SELECT gt Press the select type soft key The TNC shows a TYPE soft key menu for selection of the file type to be displayed Press the Default soft key The TNC shows all saved files in the right window DEFAULT gt Move the highlight to the left onto the directories gt Move the highlight to the TNC table directory gt Move the highlight to the right onto the files gt Move the highlight to the file TOOL T active tool table and load with the ENT key TOOL T receives the status S and is therefore active for the test run END gt Press the END key Exit the file manager Bonn v Further information on this topic Tool management see Enter tool data into the table page 150 m Testing programs see Test Run page 330 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Grana operation GJtest r
21. Overview The following touch probe cycles are available in the Manual Operation mode HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for the use of a 3 D touch probe Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual The touch probe cycles are available only with the Touch Probe Functions software option option number 17 If you are using a HEIDENHAIN touch probe this option is available automatically TABLE Function Soft key Page Calibrating the effective length 301 Uy Setting a datum in any axis PROBING 305 Setting a circle center as datum PROBING 306 a cc Setting the centerline as datum 308 i cL Touch probe system data 474 7 management TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 293 Manual operation and setup 11 5 Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Functions in touch probe cycles Soft keys that are used to select the probing direction or a probing routine are displayed in the manual touch probe cycles The soft keys displayed vary depending on the respective cycle Function Select the probing direction Capture the actual position Probe hole inside circle automatically Probe stud outside circle automatically n JEEN 5 5 Automatic probing routine for ho
22. TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 241 Programming Q Parameters 8 11 String parameters Finding the length of a string parameter The STRLEN function returns the length of the text saved in a selectable string parameter gt Select O parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function gt Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the ascertained string length Confirm with the ENT key gt Shift the soft key row FORMULA gt Select the function for finding the text length of a string parameter gt Enter the number of the OS parameter whose length the TNC is to ascertain and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key STRLEN H p Example Find the length of QS15 37 Q52 STRLEN SRC_QS15 242 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Comparing alphabetic sequence The STRCOMP function compares string parameters for alphabetic priority gt Select O parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function gt Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the result of comparison Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row FORMULA gt Select the function for comparing string parameters gt Enter the number of the first OS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number
23. a OF gt 0 BEGIN PGM LOT31 MM O END PGM e e o o o o o e eeo o o oorl TOT Oe ORF On OOM TO TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 19 3 Cycle parameters gt Program name Enter the name of the program Designate program 50 as a cycle and you want to call and if necessary the directory it is call it with M99 located in or gt Activate the file select dialog with the SELECT soft key and select the program to be called Call the program with m CYCL CALL separate block or M99 blockwise or M89 executed after every positioning block TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 467 Cycles Special Functions 19 4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION Cycle 13 19 4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION Cycle 13 Cycle function Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle The TNC can control the machine tool spindle and rotate it to a given angular position Oriented spindle stops are required for m Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position m Orientation of the transmitter receiver window of HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes with infrared transmission The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to by entering M19 or M20 depending on the machine If you program M19 or M20 without having defined Cycle 13 the TNC positions the machine tool spi
24. hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface 414 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 SINGLE LIP DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 16 9 Cycle parameters 2a gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance ala between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 gt Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinate in th
25. 17 4 FACE MILLING Cycle 233 10 The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed only the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate 11 At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance Strategies O389 2 and 0389 3 The strategies O389 2 and 0389 3 differ in the overtravel during face milling If Q389 2 the end point lies outside of the surface If 0389 3 it lies at the edge of the surface The TNC calculates the end point 2 from the side length and the safety clearance to the side If the strategy O389 2 is used the TNC additionally moves the tool beyond the level surface by the tool radius 4 The tool subsequently advances to the end point 2 at the programmed feed rate for milling 5 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the set up clearance over the current infeed depth and then moves at FMAX paraxially back to the starting point in the next line The TNC calculates the offset from the programmed width the tool radius the maximum path overlap factor and the safety clearance to the side 6 The tool then returns to the current infeed depth and moves in the direction of the next end point 2 7 The multipass process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last path the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX back to the starting point 1 8 If more than one infeed is required the
26. 5 2014 493 Tables and overviews 21 1 Machine specific user parameters Parameter settings DisplaySettings Setting the NC and PLC dialog language NC dialog language ENGLISH GERMAN CZECH FRENCH ITALIAN SPANISH PORTUGUESE SWEDISH DANISH FINNISH DUTCH POLISH HUNGARIAN RUSSIAN CHINESE CHINESE_TRAD SLOVENIAN ESTONIAN KOREAN NORWEGIAN ROMANIAN SLOVAK TURKISH PLC dialog language See NC dialog language PLC error message language See NC dialog language Help language See NC dialog language 494 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Machine specific user parameters 21 1 Parameter settings DisplaySettings Behavior with control start up Acknowledge Power interrupted message TRUE Control start up is not continued until the message has been acknowledged FALSE Power interrupted message not displayed DisplaySettings Settings for 3 D graphic simulation Model type of 3 D graphic simulation 3 D compute intensive Model depiction for complex machining operations with undercuts 2 5 D Model depiction for 3 axis machining operations No Model The model depiction is deactivated Quality of model in 3 D graphic simulation very high High resolution block end points can be displayed high High resolution medium Medium resolution low Low resolution ProbeSettings Configuration of a round stylus Coordinates of stylus center point 0 X coordinate of the stylus
27. 7 Contour departure 8 Retract the tool end program Further information on this topic Contour programming see Tool movements in the program page 168 Recommended program layout for simple cycle programs Call tool define tool axis Retract the tool Define the machining positions Define the fixed cycle Call the cycle switch on the spindle coolant Retract the tool end program Further information on this topic Cycle programming see Cycle fundamentals page 371 Oar WN 48 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Layout of contour machining programs 0 BEGIN PGM BSPCONT MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 ZX Y Z 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X Y Z 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z S5000 4 Z 250 RO FMAX 5 X RO FMAX 6 Z 10 RO F3000 M13 16 X RO FMAX 17 Z 250 RO FMAX M2 18 END PGM BSPCONT MM Cycle program layout O BEGIN PGM BSBCYC MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 ZX Y Z 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X Y Z 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z S5000 4 Z 250 RO FMAX 5 PATTERN DEF POS1 X Y Z 6 CYCL DEF 7 CYCL CALL PAT FMAX M13 8 Z 250 RO FMAX M2 9 END PGM BSBCYC MM Programming the first part 1 3 Programming a simple contour The contour shown to the right is to be milled once to a depth of 5mm You have already defined the workpiece blank After you have initiated a dialog through a function key enter all the data requested by the TNC in the screen header gt Call the tool Enter the tool data Confir
28. For further information about displaying and editing the listed file types see page 110 Data Backup We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at regular intervals The TNCremo data transmission freeware from HEIDENHAIN is a simple and convenient method for backing up data stored on the TNC You additionally need a data medium on which all machine specific data such as the PLC program machine parameters etc are stored Ask your machine manufacturer for assistance if necessary gt Take the time occasionally to delete any unneeded files so that the TNC always has enough memory space for system files such as the tool table TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 97 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager 3 4 Working with the file manager Directories To ensure that you can easily find your files we recommend that you organize your internal memory into directories You can divide a directory into further directories which are called subdirectories With the key or ENT you can show or hide the subdirectories Paths A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectories under which a file is saved The individual names are separated by a backslash V and the file name including the extension must not exceed 255 characters gt The path including all drive characters directory
29. In place of the electronic signal generated automatically by a 3 D touch probe during probing you can manually initiate the trigger signal for capturing the probing position by pressing a key Proceed as follows PROBING gt Select any touch probe function by soft key POS s gt Move the mechanical probe to the first position to be captured by the TNC Confirm the position Press the actual position capture soft key for the TNC to save the current position gt Move the mechanical probe to the next position to be captured by the TNC gt Confirm the position Press the actual position ie capture soft key for the TNC to save the current position gt If required move to additional positions and capture as described previously gt Datum In the menu window enter the coordinates of the new datum confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 298 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 299 gt Terminate the probing function Press the END key l TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 311 Positioning with Manual Data Input 12 1 Programming and executing simple machining operations 12 1 Programming and executing simple machining operations The Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation is particularly conv
30. L_SLOVENIAN Outputs text only for Slovenian conversational language L_ALL Outputs text independently of the conversational language 208 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Additional functions Keyword Function HOUR Number of hours from the real time clock MIN Number of minutes from the real time clock SEC Number of seconds from the real time clock DAY Day from the real time clock MONTH Month as a number from the real time clock STR_MONTH Month as a string abbreviation from the real time clock YEAR2 Two digit year from the real time clock YEAR4 Fourdigit year from the real time clock In the part program program FN 16 F PRINT to activate the output 96 FN 16 F PRINT TNC MASKE MASKE1 A TNC PROT1 TXT The TNC then creates the file PROT1 TXT MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY DATE 27 11 2001 TIME 8 56 34 NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 X1 149 360 Y1 25 509 Z1 37 000 If you output the same file more than once in the program the TNC appends all texts to the end of the texts already output within the target file If you use FN 16 more than once in the program the TNC saves all texts in the file that you defined in the FN 16 function The file is not output until the TNC reads the END PGM block or you press the NC stop button or you close the file with M_CLOSE In the FN 16 block program the format file and the log file with th
31. Move the highlight to the Excel file Press ENT The TNC opens the Excel file in its own application using the Gnumeric additional tool vv return to the TNC user interface while leaving the Excel file open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface If you position the mouse pointer over a button a brief tooltip explaining the function of this button will gt With the key combination ALT TAB you can always be displayed More information on how to use the Gnumeric function is provided under Help To exit Gnumeric proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Close The TNC returns to the file manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the Gnumeric additional tool gt gt Press the key for switching the soft keys The Gnumeric additional tool opens the File pull down menu gt Select the Close menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 111 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Displaying Internet files To open Internet files with the extension htm or html directly on the TNC proceed as follows gt Call the file manager gt Select the directory in which the Internet file is saved gt Move t
32. Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 32ND SET UP CLEARANCE 7 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 Call the cycle in connection with the hole pattern 8 Z 100 RO FMAX Retract the tool change the tool 9 TOOL CALL 2 Z 5000 Call the drilling tool radius 2 4 10 Z 10 RO F5000 Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F 418 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming Examples 16 10 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 419 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 11 TAPPING with a floating tap holder Cycle 206 16 11 TAPPING with a floating tap holder Cycle 206 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set up clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 4 At the set up clearance the direction of spindle rotation reverses once again Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be exe
33. The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the subprogram call CALL LBL Programming notes A main program can contain any number of subprograms You can call subprograms in any sequence and as often as desired A subprogram cannot call itself Write subprograms after the block with M2 or M30 If subprograms are located before the block with M2 or M30 in the part program they will be executed at least once even if they are not called Programming a subprogram gt To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key gt Enter the subprogram number If you want to use a label name press the Ibl name soft key to switch to text entry gt To mark the end press the LBL SET key and enter the label number 0 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Subprograms O BEGIN PGM CALL LBL1 7 2 175 7 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 72 Subprograms Calling a subprogram gt Calla subprogram Press the LBL CALL key gt Enter the subprogram number of the subprogram you wish to call If you want to use a label name press the Ibl name soft key to switch to text entry gt Ignore repeats REP by pressing the NO ENT key Repeat REP is used only for program section repeats CALL LBL 0 is not permitted Label 0 is only used to mark the end of a subprogram 176 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Progra
34. With programming 128 Magnification of details 130 Graphic SettingS cccceee 348 Graphic simulation 326 Tool display 0 ccceeeeeeeees 326 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Handwheel 00ceeeeeeeees 283 Hard CISK sscssiscecatsveniacardseiseeesice 95 Help SYSTEM cccecceeeeeeeeeeee 137 Help with error messages 131 CE Initiated tools 157 Inserting and modifying blocks 91 Interrupt Machining 334 ITNC 580 ccecececccseesteeeeeeeseeees 62 SSS SSS Linear point patterns 387 Load machine configuration 370 SS M91 MIZ niisiis 254 Machine parameters for 3D touch OINO OE EEE 471 Machine settingS 2 006 349 Machining pattern 378 Manual datum setting 305 Circle center as datum 306 MANY AXIS iranan 305 Setting a center line as datum 308 Measurement of machining Measuring workpieces 309 M functions For program run inspection 253 For spindle and coolant 253 See miscellaneous functions 252 Mid program startup 339 After power failure 339 MIONO erresira 456 Miscellaneous functions 252 Cla eI POT 252 For coordinate data 254 For path behavior 5 257 Modes of Operation 65 MOD function s in 346 EXE ea E 346 OverVieW eesin 347 Sel Ciaro 346 M
35. for circle segments More precise results are obtained if you measure circles using four touch points however You should always preposition the touch probe in the center or as close to the center as possible 306 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions 11 7 software option 17 Outside circle gt Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point outside of the circle gt Select the probe direction by soft key gt Probing Press the machine START button If you are not using the automatic probing routine you need to repeat this procedure After the third probing operation you can have the TNC calculate the center four touch points are recommended gt Terminate the probing procedure and switch to the evaluation menu Press the EVALUATE soft key gt Datum Enter the coordinates of the datum and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 298 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 299 gt To terminate the probe function press the END soft key After the probing procedure is completed the TNC displays the current coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius PR Setting the datum using multiple holes cylindrical studs A second soft
36. in all RESET columns 2nd soft key row ii Insert a single line at the end of the table 2nd pe soft key row LINE Delete a single line at the end of the table DELETE 2nd soft key row LINE ae waar TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 291 Manual operation and setup 11 4 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe Activating a datum from the preset table in the Manual Operation mode When activating a datum from the preset table the TNC resets the active datum shift mirroring and scaling factor gt Select the Manual Operation mode PRESET gt Display the preset table TABLE gt Select the datum number you want to activate or soro gt With the GOTO key select the datum number that you want to activate Confirm with the ENT key T ACTIVATE gt Activate the datum PRESET gt Confirm activation of the datum The TNC sets the Cae display and if defined the basic rotation BEB e 3 m Z f y Exit the preset table Activating a datum from the preset table in an NC program To activate datums from the preset table during program run use Cycle 247 In Cycle 247 you only define the number of the datum that you want to activate 292 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software option 17 11 5 11 5 Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software option 17
37. m n the machining plane at the position X 0 Y 0 m n the tool axis 1 mm above the MAX point defined in the BLK FORM If you call the same tool the TNC resumes program simulation from the position last programmed before the tool call In order to ensure unambiguous behavior during program run after a tool change you should always move to a position from which the TNC can position the tool for machining without causing a collision 330 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Test Run Your machine tool builder can also define a tool change macro for the Test Run operating mode This macro will simulate the exact behavior of the machine Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual Execute test run If the central tool file is active a tool table must be active status S to conduct a test run Select a tool table via the file manager in the Test Run mode of operation With the BLANK IN WORK SPACE function you activate a workspace monitor for the test run see Showing the workpiece blank in the working space page 328 gt Select the Test Run operating mode gt Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and select the file you wish to test The TNC then displays the following soft keys Functions Soft key Reset the blank form and test the entire program RESET START Test the entire program START Test each program block individually START
38. set up clearance chip breaking and advanced stop distance 241 SINGLE LIP D H DRLNG 241 414 With automatic pre positioning to de deepened starting point shaft speed and coolant definition 397 N Ss Ni N 399 N F 401 N T 404 2 407 a 410 N iS ua 7 ee Par S 394 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 CENTERING Cycle 240 16 2 16 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool is centered at the programmed feed rate F to the programmed centering diameter or centering depth 3 If defined the tool remains at the centering depth 4 Finally the tool path is retraced to setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance at rapid traverse FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter Q344 diameter or Q201 depth determines the working direction If you program the diameter or depth 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC re
39. shown with respect to an absolute datum with the coordinates X 0 Y 0 Holes 5 to 7 are dimensioned with respect to a relative datum with the absolute coordinates X 450 Y 750 With the DATUM SHIFT cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the position X 450 Y 750 to be able to program holes 5 to 7 without further calculations 325 450 83 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening and entering programs 3 2 Opening and entering programs Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN Conversational format A part program consists of a series of program blocks The figure at right illustrates the elements of a block The TNC numbers the blocks of a part program in ascending Satz sequence The first block of a program is identified by BEGIN PGM the program name and the active unit of measure The subsequent blocks contain information on Worter The workpiece blank Satznummer Tool calls Approaching a safe position Feed rates and spindle speeds as well as Movements cycles and other functions The last block of a program is identified by END PGM the program name and the active unit of measure After each tool call HEIDENHAIN recommends always traversing to a safe position from which the TNC can position the tool for machining without causing a collision 84 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming
40. value outside of value range or incorrect data format gt Database SQL access ID Q parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT gt Database Index to SQL result Line number within the result set The table entries prepared in the Q parameters are written to this row If you do not enter an index the first row is written to n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index SQL INSERT SQL INSERT generates a new row in the result set and transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the new row SQL INSERT takes into account all columns entered in the Select command Table columns not entered in the Select command are filled with default values as gt Parameter no for result O parameter in which INSERT the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle value outside of value range or incorrect data format gt Database SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Row number is transferred in a Q parameter 11 SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MESS_NR 12 SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MESS_X 13 SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MESS_Y 14 SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MESS_Z 20 SQL Q5 SELECT MESS_NR MESS_X MESS_Y MESS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE 30 SQL FETCH Q1 HANDLE Q5 INDEX Q2 Row number is programmed directly 40 S
41. with NO ENT whichever applies gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key STRING FORMULA gt hay l 9 v v Example Read as a string the axis designation of the fourth axis Parameter settings in the configuration editor DisplaySettings CfgDisplayData axisDisplayOrder 0 to 5 Assign string parameter for key Assign string parameter for entity Assign string parameter for parameter name Read out machine parameter TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 245 Programming Q Parameters 8 11 String parameters Reading a numerical value of a machine parameter In order to store the value of a machine parameter as a numerical value in a Q parameter La gt Select O parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function gt Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the machine parameter Confirm with the ENT key gt Select the CFGREAD function gt Enter the numbers of the string parameters for the key entity and attribute then confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number for the index or skip the dialog with NO ENT whichever applies gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Read overlap factor as O parameter Parameter settings in the configuration editor ChannelSettings CH_NC CfgGeoCycle pocketOverlap 14 DECLARE ST
42. 0000 gt Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute NC blocks Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 11 CYCL DEF 240 CENTERING a sei Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Ca RELECTDECTH DIA between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Q201 0 DEPTH Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Q344 9 DIAMETER Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q211 0 1 DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM Q203 20 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 100 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE 12 X 30 RO FMAX 13 Y 20 RO FMAX M3 M99 14 X 80 RO FMAX 15 Y 50 RO FMAX M99 396 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 DRILLING Cycle 200 16 3 16 3 DRILLING Cycle 200 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F The TNC returns the tool at FMAX to the set up clearance dwells there if a dwell time was entered and then moves at FMAX to the set up clearance above the first plunging depth The tool then drills deeper by the plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached Finally the tool path is retraced to setup clearance from the hole bottom or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance at FMAX Please note whi
43. 1000 1199 Internal error messages see table Example NC block The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 1000 180 FN 14 ERROR 1000 Error message predefined by HEIDENHAIN Error number Text 1000 Spindle 1001 Tool axis is missing 1002 Tool radius too small 1003 Tool radius too large 1004 Range exceeded 1005 Start position incorrect 1006 ROTATION not permitted 1007 SCALING FACTOR not permitted 1008 MIRROR IMAGE not permitted 1009 Datum shift not permitted 1010 Feed rate is missing 1011 Input value incorrect 1012 Incorrect sign 1013 Entered angle not permitted 1014 Touch point inaccessible 1015 Too many points 1016 Contradictory input 1017 CYCL incomplete 1018 Plane wrongly defined 1019 Wrong axis programmed 1020 Wrong rpm 1021 Radius comp undefined 1022 Rounding off undefined 1023 Rounding radius too large 1024 Program start undefined TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 203 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional functions Error number Text 1025 Excessive nesting 1026 Angle reference missing 1027 No fixed cycle defined 1028 Slot width too small 1029 Pocket too small 1030 Q202 not defined 1031 Q205 not defined 1032 Q218 must be greater than Q219 1033 CYCL 210 no
44. 14 13 Load machine configuration Application Caution Data loss The TNC overwrites your machine configuration when you load restore a backup The overwritten machine data will be lost in the process You can no longer undo this process Your machine tool builder can provide you a backup with a machine configuration After entering the keyword RESTORE you can load the backup on your machine or programming station Proceed as follows to load the backup gt Inthe MOD dialog enter the keyword RESTORE gt Inthe TNC s file manager select the backup file e g BKUP 2013 12 12_ zip The TNC opens a pop up window for the backup gt Press the emergency stop gt Press the OK soft key to start the backup process 370 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Cycle fundamentals 15 1 Introduction 15 1 Introduction Frequently recurring machining cycles that comprise several working steps are stored in the TNC memory as standard cycles Coordinate transformations and several special functions are also available as cycles Most cycles use O parameters as transfer parameters Parameters with specific functions that are required in several cycles always have the same number For example Q200 is always assigned the set up clearance Q202 the plunging depth etc Danger of collision Cycles sometimes execute extensive operations For safety reasons you should run a graphical program test befor
45. 6 1 Fundamentals 6 1 Fundamentals Tool movements in the program The orange axis keys initiate the plain language dialog for a paraxial positioning block The TNC asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the program block into the part program gt Coordinates of the end point of the movement gt Radius compensation R R RO gt gt Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC block 6 X 45 R F200 M3 You always program the direction of tool movement Depending on the individual machine tool the part program is executed by movement of either the tool or the machine table on which the workpiece Is clamped Danger of collision Before running a part program always pre position the tool to prevent the possibility of damaging it or the workpiece Radius compensation The TNC can compensate the tool radius automatically In paraxial positioning blocks you can select whether the TNC is to extend R or shorten R the traverse path by the value of the tool radius see Tool radius compensation with paraxial positioning blocks page 164 Miscellaneous functions M With the TNC s miscellaneous functions you can affect m the program run e g a program interruption m the machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off 168 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Fundamentals 6 1 Subprograms and program sectio
46. A E A a 424 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 35 Contents MATE EU arm GintallSirrccscceeces cease svvs acceso woe cee teveves tap tonsuacee seers ceca tucwecanne E coring fee easy EA 428 OVER VIC Wag fas detatemntse E E EEEE ST 428 172 RECTANGULAR POCKET Gycles2 51 eee er ee ee ee 429 GY CIS TU Asse etedsaadeet aE chosednes TE a a A E tie i a A E 429 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccccccecceeeeecee cee ceeeeeeeeeeccceaaeaeeeeeeeeeeesecesceceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 429 Ee Aee e E E E phanldannyPuasadedsaidudoassehlabnannstanshann E O Gainsdanarials 431 TRE CTA NO UAR STU ID Oye e 2 O seer Sater eee are 433 CYC TUN erinnere neits na A a a Ea a A E AEO A a 433 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccccccecceeeeeceeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeesecescesedecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaees 433 Cvele PIMIO aiai a a a E a EEEE AERA a a AAEE 435 AA CE MIEEING Cycle 2 a E er ee 437 Cole PUE E E N 437 Please note while ProgramMmMing ccccccccecceeeceeeeceeceeeeeeceeececaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeescetedeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaees 439 Cycle paramo E earann R A E E E E 441 175 Programming ExampleS n rr trienen aaeeea aeee Eae a AEREA Ea Eeee a aaee A EEE E eaa E aAA Een EARE RAEE 444 Example Milling Pockets St dS n oenen a a a a a a 444 36 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 AS eA EU arm Smita 22s coe ccvces cease net aeeccerwce cris
47. Additional functions 8 8 Additional functions Overview Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys Function Soft key Page FN 14 ERROR a 203 Displaying error messages ERROR FN 16 F PRINT TE 207 Output of formatted texts or Q F PRINT parameter values FN 18 SYSREAD FN18 211 Read system data mee FN 19 PLC FN19 220 Transfer values to the PLC PLC FN 20 WAIT FOR FNZ 220 NC and PLC synchronization AR FN 29 PLC A 221 Transfer up to eight values to the PLC PLC LIST FN 37 EXPORT aa 221 Export local Q parameters or OS EXPORT parameters into a calling program FN 26 TABOPEN FNZ6 268 Opening a freely definable table ale FN 27 TABWRITE FNZ 269 Write to a freely definable table ae FN 28 TABREAD FNZ8 270 Read from a freely definable table ee Be 202 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Additional functions 8 8 FN 14 ERROR Displaying error messages With the function FN 14 ERROR you can call messages under program control The messages are predefined by the machine tool builder or by HEIDENHAIN Whenever the TNC comes to a block with FN 14 in the Program Run or Test Run mode it interrupts the program run and displays a message The program must then be restarted The error numbers are listed in the table Range of error numbers Standard dialog text 0 999 Machine dependent dialog
48. Calibrate the wireless TT 449 Cycle 484 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 20 6 Calibrate the wireless TT 449 Cycle 484 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Fundamentals With Cycle 484 you calibrate the wireless infrared TT 449 tool touch probe The calibration process is not completely automated because the tool touch probe s position on the table is not defined Cycle run gt Insert the calibrating tool gt Define and start the calibration cycle gt Position the calibrating tool manually above the center of the touch probe and follow the instructions in the pop up window Ensure that the calibrating tool is located above the measuring surface of the probe contact The calibration process is semi automatic The TNC also measures the center misalignment of the calibrating tool by rotating the spindle by 180 after the first half of the calibration cycle The calibrating tool must be a precisely cylindrical part for example a cylinder pin The resulting calibration values are stored in the TNC memory and are accounted for during subsequent tool measurements The calibration tool should have a diameter of more than 15 mm and protrude approx 50 mm from the chuck This configuration causes a deformation of 0 1 um per 1 N of probing force Please note while programming The functioning of the calibration cycle is dependent on machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement Ref
49. Changing the settings There are three possibilities for changing a setting depending on the function selected gt Enter a numerical value directly e g when determining the traverse range limit gt Change a setting by pressing the ENT key e g when setting program input gt Change a setting via a selection window If more than one possibility is available for a particular setting you can superimpose a window listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO key Select the setting with the ENT key If you don t want to change the setting close the window again with END Exiting MOD functions gt To close the MOD functions Press the END or END key 346 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 MOD function 14 1 Overview of MOD functions The following functions are available independent of the selected operating mode Code number entry Code number Display settings eer ravens Position displays Ho vee Unit of measurement mmi inches for position display Program entry for MDI Show time of day Show the info line a ee ee eo ia Graphic settings Model type Model quality Machine settings Kinematics selection Tool usage file m External access System settings m Set the system time m Define the network connection Network IP configuration Diagnostic functions m HEROS information General information Software version FC
50. Coolant OFF if necessary not effective during Test Run function determined by the machine tool builder M2 STOP program run m Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Return jump to block 1 CLEAR status display depending on machine parameter clearMode M3 Spindle ON clockwise a M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise n M5 Spindle STOP a M6 Tool change a Spindle STOP Program STOP M8 Coolant ON m M9 Coolant OFF o M13 Spindle ON clockwise m Coolant ON M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise m Coolant ON M30 Same as M2 a TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 253 Programming Miscellaneous functions 9 3 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate data 9 3 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate data Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Scale reference point On the scale a reference mark indicates the position of the scale Xg reference point p 4 X Z Y Machine datum The machine datum is required for the following tasks m Define the axis traverse limits software limit switches m Approach machine referenced positions such as tool change positions m Seta workpiece datum The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the machine datum is defined by the machine tool builder in a machine parameter Standard behavior The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum see Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe page 286 Behavior with
51. DEF 4 4 X 30 41 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 42 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS a ox xmm Pa T5 n 54 549 0 iz 10 000 iL J m 332 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Program run 13 5 Running a part program Preparation 1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table 2 Set the datum 3 Select the necessary tables status M 4 Select the part program status M You can adjust the feed rate and spindle speed with the override knobs It is possible to reduce the feed rate when starting the NC program using the FMAX soft key The reduction applies to all rapid traverse and feed rate movements The value you enter is no longer in effect after the machine has been turned off and on again In order to re establish the respectively defined maximum feed rate after switch on you need to re enter the corresponding value The behavior of this function varies depending on the respective machine Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual Program Run Full Sequence gt Start the part program with the machine START button Program Run Single Block gt Start each block of the part program individually with the machine START button TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 333 Test run and program run 13 5 Program run Interrupt machining There are several ways to interrupt a program
52. E x Can neither be read nor edited The type of the configuration object is identified by its folder symbol E Key group name List L Entity or parameter object Displaying help texts The HELP key enables you to call a help text for each parameter object or attribute If the help text does not fit on one page 1 2 is then displayed at the upper right for example press the HELP PAGE soft key to scroll to the second page To exit the help text press the HELP key again Additional information such as the unit of measure the initial value or a selection list is also displayed If the selected machine parameter matches a parameter in the previous control model the corresponding MP number is shown TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 21 1 491 Tables and overviews 21 1 Machine specific user parameters Parameter list Parameter settings DisplaySettings Settings for screen display Sequence of displayed axes 0 to 5 Depends on available axes Type of position display in position window NOMINAL ACTUAL REF ACTL REF NOML LAG DIST Type of position display in status display NOMINAL ACTUAL REF ACTL REF NOML LAG DIST Definition of decimal separation characters for position display Display of feed rate in Manual Operation mode at axis key Only show feed rate when axis direction key is pressed always minimum Always show feed rate Display of spindle position
53. E A AAA 253 9 3 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate Cata ccccccssscccccsssecceeeseneeceeeseeaeeceeneeaeeeeensaaeeeeeseaees 254 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M9Q2 cccccccccesseccceecececcecenessseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeenees 254 Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 MQ4 ccccccccccccccccecccccecetestseaaeeeeeeeeeees 256 9 4 Miscellaneous functions for path DehaviOl cccccsseccccesseeeceeessneeeeeeeseeaeeeeeseneaeeeeessnaeeenensseaeenes 257 Feed rate factor for plunging MOVEMENTS M108 oc cc ceeeeessecceeececeeeecceceeesaesaeeeeeceeeeceeentettaeaas 257 Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M13G c ccccccecceccceeceeeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeentseseeeeeeeeees 258 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 c ccc ccceccsecceceessseeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 259 Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 cece ccccc cee ceeenseeeaeeeececeeecceeceesessueaeeeeeeceeeccteetttttaeaes 260 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 25 Contents 10 1 Overview of special functions so ccccscsscces secs sacs cess nnns cess succes exe nEn NENP ENEE RE EaI NE EEEE PNE NAE ANNEER RANNAS 262 Main menu for SPEC FCT special fUNCtIONS 0 ccc ccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeaeeeeeeessueeeeeeesaeeeeeseetieeeeeneaaas 262 Program defaults MENU c cccccccecccccccssesseececseeeeececcsseeeecccsseeeeeecesseeeeescs
54. E coccceuec se E 60 Selecting the Correct operating MOCE ccccceecscccccseeccececsseeeeeeecseeeececcseseeeeseseeseeeesestssseesensneeeesenseaaees 60 Choosing the program YOU want tO UNL cccccceeessececseesseececeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeesesessaeeseeetsieeeeesessiteeeeeeses 60 SS LIE TAS Ogain E A sAneddehan aie Maks aldies E A 60 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 13 Contents 14 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 E E rere eee er ee errr 62 Programming In HEIDENHAIN conversational c0ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeceeeecesessaeeeeeeeeeeeees 62 Compatibility cccccccccccsseceececsseeeeecscsseeeececeseeeeesceaeeececceeeeecseeaeeeeescsssseesccssseeesessnseeeeccsteaeeseneneaeess 62 Visual display unit and operating pamel cc cccccccsssesssconsoteccceessecrsensanscenscssnareccseessansansccnneteraree 63 DIETAS 63 setting the screen AVOUT sci scseiarsdisdsannnsdbabinwie NEEESE AENA AEAEE AAE AEAEE EAEEREN anche 63 Poe Mae E E A E E 64 Modes of Operation nee srera areenaa eaen nn EEEE AeA AAE EAE EAEE A RE Ae AAAA AA AE EET HEC EERE ET RAe AEREE E a 65 Manual Operation and El Handwheel ccccccccccccccceccsseceeeecssseeeceecseeeeeeecseeeeeecaaeeeeescseeeeeesssaeeseesesaes 65 Positioning with Manual Data INDUt ccc cee cece cece ce eee ee eee ttnet aeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeaeeaeaeeeeeteeeeeeeseetstssiseeeees 65 POOKANIMING sc ccsetaeeatieandce ean snt
55. Ethernet interface for configuration of the machine network Press the corresponding buttons to save load and delete profiles IP address Automatically procure IP address The TNC is to procure the IP address from the DHCP server Manually set IP address Manually define the IP address and subnet mask Input Four numerical values separated by points in each field e g 160 1 180 20 and 255 255 0 0 Domain Name Automatically procure DNS The TNC is Server DNS to automatically procure the IP address of the domain name server Manually configure DNS Manually enter the IP addresses of the servers and the domain name Default Automatically procure default GW gateway The TNC is to automatically procure the default gateway Manually configure default GW Manually enter the IP addresses of the default gateway gt Apply the changes with the OK button or discard them with the Cancel button TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 363 MOD functions 14 11 Ethernet interface gt Internet tab currently has no function Setting Meaning Proxy m Direct connection to Internet NAT The control forwards Internet inquiries to the default gateway and from there they must be forwarded through network address translation e g if a direct connection to a modem is available Use proxy Define the Address and Port of the Internet router in your network ask your network administ
56. FOR PLNGNG FINISHING FEED RATE ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR INFEED FOR FINISHING SET UP CLEARANCE SURFACE COORDINATE 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE CLIMB OR UP CUT TOOL PATH OVERLAP 9 X 50 RO FMAX 10 Y 50 RO FMAX M3 M99 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 FACE MILLING Cycle 233 17 4 17 4 FACE MILLING Cycle 233 Cycle run Cycle 233 is used to face mill a level surface in multiple infeeds while taking the finishing allowance into account You can also define side walls in the cycle which are then taken into account when machining the level surface The cycle offers you various machining strategies Strategy 0389 0 Meander machining stepover outside the surface being machined Strategy 0389 1 Meander machining stepover at the edge of the surface being machined m Strategy 0389 2 The surface is machined line by line with overtravel stepover after retracting at rapid traverse Strategy 0389 3 The surface is machined line by line without overtravel stepover after retracting at rapid traverse Strategy 0389 4 Helical machining from the outside toward the inside 1 From the current position the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting point 1 in the working plane The starting point in the working plane is offset from the edge of the workpiece by the tool radius and the safety clearance to the side 2 The TNC then positions the
57. FORMULA Select the function for converting a numerical value to a string parameter gt Enter the number or the desired Q parameter to be converted and confirm with the ENT key gt If desired enter the number of decimal places that the TNC should convert and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key TOCHAR v Example Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11 use 3 decimal places 37 QS11 TOCHAR DAT Q50 DECIMALS3 238 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 String parameters 8 11 Copying a substring from a string parameter The SUBSTR function copies a definable range from a string parameter SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions ea gt Select the menu for defining various plain FUNCTIONS language functions Sa gt Select string functions FUNCTIONS Ts Select the STRING FORMULA function iene gt Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the copied string Confirm with the ENT key gt Select the function for cutting out a substring gt Enter the number of the OS parameter from which the substring is to be copied Confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number of the place starting from which to copy the substring and confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number of characters to be copied and confirm with the ENT key gt Clos
58. Functions in the pocket calculator Function Soft key Load the value of the respective axis position from the additional status display position display 2 into the calculator AX VALUES Load the numerical value from the active input GET CURRENT field into the calculator VALUE Load the numerical value from the calculator CONFIRM VALUE field into the active input field Copy the numerical value from the calculator copy FIELD Insert the copied numerical value into the PASTE calculator FIELD Open the cutting data calculator CUTTING DATA CALCULATOR Position the calculator in the center gt You can also shift the calculator with the arrow keys on your keyboard If you have connected a mouse you can also position the calculator with this TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 127 Programming Programming aids 4 5 Programming graphics 4 5 Programming graphics Generate do not generate graphics during programming While you are writing the part program you can have the TNC generate a 2 D pencil trace graphic of the programmed contour gt Switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left and graphics to the right Press the screen layout key and the PROGRAM GRAPHICS soft key gt Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON While you are entering the program lines the TNC generates each programmed movement in the graphics window in the ri
59. Further information on this topic m Running programs see Program run page 332 60 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Introduction 2 1 The TNC 128 2 1 The TNC 128 The TNC 128 is a workshop oriented straight cut control that enables you to program conventional machining operations right at the machine in an easy to use conversational programming language It is designed for milling drilling and boring machines with up to 3 axes You can also change the angular position of the spindle under program control Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in such a way that the functions are fast and easy to use Programming In HEIDENHAIN conversational The HEIDENHAIN conversational programming format is an especially easy method of writing programs Interactive graphics illustrate the individual machining steps for programming the contour Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated either during or before actual machining You can also enter and test one program while the control is running another Compatibility Machining programs created on the HEIDENHAIN TNC 124 straight cut control may not always run on the TNC 128 If NC blocks contain invalid elements the TNC will mark them as ERROR blocks when the file is opened 62 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Visual display unit and operating panel 2 2 Di
60. Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Wear tolerance length RTOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Wear tolerance radius R2TOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R2 for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Wear tolerance Radius 2 DIRECT Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation Cutting direction M3 R_OFFS Tool length measurement Tool offset between stylus center and tool center Default setting No value entered offset tool radius Tool offset radius L_OFFS Tool radius measurement tool offset in addition to offsetToolAxis between upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool Default O Tool offset length LBREAK Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Breakage tolerance length RBREAK Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Breakage tolerance radius 479 Touch probe cycles 20 4 Fundamentals Input examp
61. M91 Machine datum If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the machine datum end the block with M91 If you program incremental coordinates in an M91 block enter them with respect to the last programmed M91 position If no M91 position is programmed in the active NC block then enter the coordinates with respect to the current tool position The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the machine datum Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF see Status displays page 67 254 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate data 9 3 Behavior with M92 Additional machine datum In addition to the machine datum the machine tool builder can also define an additional machine based position as a reference point For each axis the machine tool builder defines the distance between the machine datum and this additional machine datum Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the additional machine datum end the block with M92 Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are programmed with M91 or M92 The tool length however is not compensated Effect M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are programmed M91 and M92 take effect at the start of block Workpiece
62. No NO ENT RT Number of a replacement tool if available RT for Replacement tool Replacement Tool see also TIME2 TIME1 Maximum tool life in minutes This function can vary Maximum tool age depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL If the Maximum tool age for TOOL current tool life reaches or exceeds this value the TNC CALL changes the tool during the next TOOL CALL see also CUR_TIME CUR_TIME Current age of the tool in minutes The TNC Current tool age automatically counts the current tool life CUR_TIME for CURrent TIME A starting value can be entered for used tools TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 151 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Abbr Inputs Dialog TYPE Tool type Press the ENT key to edit the field the GOTO Tool type key opens a window in which you can select the tool type You can assign tool types to specify the display filter settings such that only the selected type is visible in the table DOC Comment on tool up to 32 characters Tool comment PLC Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC PLC status LCUTS Tooth length of the tool Tooth length in the tool axis TP_NO Reference to the number of the touch probe in the touch Number of the touch probe probe table T_ANGLE Point angle of the tool Point angle LAST_USE Date and time tha
63. Select the directory in which the graphics file is saved gt Move the highlight to the graphics file gt Press ENT The TNC opens the graphics file in its own application using the ristretto additional tool return to the TNC user interface while leaving the graphics file open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface More information on how to use the ristretto function is provided under Help gt With the key combination ALT TAB you can always To exit ristretto proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Quit The TNC returns to the file manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the ristretto additional tool gt gt Press the key for switching the soft keys The ristretto additional tool opens the File pull down menu gt Select the Quit menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 115 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Data transfer to from an external data medium rogramming Programin a Before you can transfer data to an external data medium you must set up the data interface see z m SE Setting up data interfaces page 355 lt Depending on the data transfer software you use a E
64. TNC moves the tool in the spindle axis to the next plunging depth at the positioning feed rate 9 The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed only the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate 10 At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance 438 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 FACE MILLING Cycle 233 Strategy 0389 4 4 The tool subsequently approaches the starting point of the milling path on a straight line tangential arc at the programmed feed rate for milling 5 The TNC machines the level surface at the feed rate for milling from the outside toward the inside with evershorter milling paths The constant stepover results in the tool being continuously engaged 6 The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last path the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX back to the starting point 1 7 If more than one infeed is required the TNC moves the tool in the spindle axis to the next plunging depth at the positioning feed rate 8 The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed only the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate 9 At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance Limits The limits enable you to set limits to the machining of the
65. TOOL CALL 1 Z S3000 Tool call 4 Z 250 RO FMAX M3 5 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition drilling Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM Q395 0 DEPTH REFERENCE 6 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT Datum shift 7 CYCL DEF 7 1 X 15 8 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 10 9 CALL LBL 1 10 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT Datum shift 11 CYCL DEF 7 1 X 75 12 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 10 13 CALL LBL 1 14 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT Datum shift 15 CYCL DEF 7 1 X 45 16 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 60 17 CALL LBL 1 460 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming Examples 18 8 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 461 Cycles Special Functions 19 1 Fundamentals 19 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC provides the following cycles for the following special purposes Cycle Soft key Page 9 DWELL TIME 465 12 PROGRAM CALL ES 466 13 SPINDLE ORIENTATION ra 468 464 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 19 2 DWELL TIME Cycle 9 Function This causes the execution of the next block within a running program to be delayed by the programmed DWELL TIME A dwell time can be used for such purposes as chip breaking The cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program Modal condit
66. VALUE soft key or end the dialog with the END key The parameters used by the TNC internally or in cycles are provided with comments If you want to check or edit local global or string parameters press the SHOW PARAMETERS q QL QR qs soft key The TNC then displays the specific parameter type The functions previously described also apply 200 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Checking and changing O parameters You can have the O parameters be shown in the additional status display in all operating modes except for the Programming operating mode gt If you are in a program run interrupt it if required for example by pressing the machine STOP button and the INTERNAL STOP soft key If you are in a test run interrupt it gt Call the soft key row for screen layout PROGRAM gt Select the screen layout with additional status sraTus display In the right half of the screen the TNC shows the Overview status form gt Press the STATUS OF Q PARAM soft key gt Press the Q PARAMETER LIST soft key LIST gt The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can enter the desired range for display of the Q parameters or string parameters Multiple Q parameters are entered separated by commas e g 1 2 3 4 To define display ranges enter a hyphen e g Q 10 14 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 8 7 201 Programming Q Parameters 8 8
67. Z 100 RO FMAX 11 PATTERN DEF PITCHCIRC1 X 25 Y 33 D80 START 45 STEP30 NUM8 Z 0 383 Cycle fundamentals 15 5 POLAR PATTERN Cycle 220 15 5 POLAR PATTERN Cycle 220 Cycle run 1 At rapid traverse the TNC moves the tool from its current position to the starting point for the first machining operation Sequence m Move to the 2nd set up clearance spindle axis Approach the starting point in the spindle axis Move to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches on a straight line the starting point for the next machining operation The tool stops at the set up clearance or the 2nd set up clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations have been executed Please note while programming Cycle 220 is DEF active which means that Cycle 220 automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle If you combine Cycle 220 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 209 and 251 to 267 the set up clearance workpiece surface and 2nd set up clearance that you defined in Cycle 220 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle 384 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 POLAR PATTERN Cycle 220 15 5 Cycle parameters 720 gt Center in 1st axis Q216 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the reference axis of the working
68. a positioning block or in a separate block The TNC displays the following dialog question Miscellaneous function M You usually enter only the number of the M function in the programming dialog Some M functions can be programmed with additional parameters In this case the dialog is continued for the parameter input In the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes of operation the M functions are entered with the M soft key Please note that some M functions become effective at the start of a positioning block and others at the end regardless of their position in the NC block M functions come into effect in the block in which they are called Some M functions are effective only in the block in which they are programmed Unless the M function is only effective blockwise either you must cancel it in a subsequent block with a separate M function or it is automatically canceled by the TNC at the end of the program 252 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 M functions for program run inspection spindle and coolant 9 2 9 2 M functions for program run inspection spindle and coolant Overview The machine tool builder can influence the behavior of the miscellaneous functions described below Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual M Effect Effective at block Start End Mo Program STOP a Spindle STOP M1 Optional program STOP a Spindle STOP if necessary
69. active line of the active datum number DOC from Cycle 7 Active datum shift Cycle 7 The TNC displays an active datum shift in up to 3 5 axes Mirrored axes Cycle 8 Active scaling factor factors Cycles 11 26 The TNC displays an active scaling factor in up to 6 axes Status displays EJF toorem run full sequence BPrograming ia Program run full sequence E BLK FORM 01 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 x 100 Y 100 Zeo 3 TOOL CALL 15 Z 2000 L 4 Z 100 RO FMAX Ma 5 X 20 RO FMAX 30 RO FMAX Ga 7 Z 2 RO FMAX a 24 RO Faon Gye fo x008 Re E A ets Re f TNG no_prog 123 n Ovezv an Pau juat Jove ufroe Toot 77 teans jarana 2 4 Scaling datum Coordinate transformation cycles see page 447 Displaying Q parameters QPARA tab Soft key Meaning EEE Display the current values of the defined Q a PARAN parameters Display the character strings of the defined string parameters Press the Q PARAMETER LIST soft key The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can enter the desired range for display of the Q parameters or string parameters Multiple Q parameters are entered separated by commas e g 1 2 3 4 To define display ranges enter a hyphen e g 0 14 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 stoox 0 ay on F100 gt
70. and a Ca oo node depends on the quality grade of the cable the 10BaseT 100BaseTx sheathing and the type of network 100BaseTX or 10BaseT No great effort is required to connect the TNC directly to a PC that has an Ethernet card Simply connect the TNC port X26 and the PC with an Ethernet crossover cable trade names crossed patch cable or STP cable Configuring the TNC Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a network specialist gt Press the MOD key in the Programming operating mode and enter the code number NET123 gt In the file manager press the NETWORK soft key gt Press the CONFIGURE NETWORK soft key The TNC displays the network settings in a pop up window TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 361 MOD functions 14 11 Ethernet interface General network settings gt Press the CONFIGURE NETWORK soft key The TNC displays the network settings in a pop up windows The Computer name tab is active Setting Meaning Primary Name of the Ethernet interface to be interface integrated in your company network Only active if a second optional Ethernet interface is available on the control hardware Computer Name displayed for the TNC in your name company network Host file Only required for special applications Name of a file in which the assignments of IP addres
71. and coolant page 253 Creating a cycle program The holes depth of 20 mm shown in the figure at right are to be drilled with a standard drilling cycle You have already defined the workpiece blank gt Call the tool Enter the tool data Confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Do not forget the tool axis Retract the tool Press the orange Z axis key in order to retract in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp R R no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Confirm the Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block cYcr gt Call the cycle menu v Display the drilling cycles DRILLING THREAD v 200 gt Select the standard drilling cycle 200 The TNC CD starts the dialog for cycle definition Enter all parameters requested by the TNC step by step and conclude each entry with the ENT key In the screen to the right the TNC also displays a graphic showing the respective cycle parameter gt Call the menu for special functions CONTOUR gt Display the functions for point machining POINT MACHINING ney gt Select the pattern definition DEF POINT gt Select point entry Enter the coordinates of the 4 points and confirm each with the ENT key After ent
72. and enter the value 5 for the position to be approached gt Tool radius comp R R no comp Select the R soft key The traverse path is increased by the tool radius Confirm your entry with the END key gt Approach contour point 1 and retract the tool Press the orange X axis key and enter the value 0 for the position to be approached gt Tool radius comp R R no comp Select the R soft key The traverse path is increased by the tool radius Confirm your entry with the END key gt Retract the tool Press the orange Z axis key in order to retract in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp R R no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Miscellaneous function M Enter M2 to end the program and confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Further information on this topic Creating a new program see Opening and entering programs page 84 m Programmable feed rates see Possible feed rate input page 88 50 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming the first part Tool radius compensation see Tool radius compensation with paraxial positioning blocks page 164 Miscellaneous functions M see M functions for program run inspection spindle
73. assignment of secondary axes and rotary axes to the main axes Designation of the axes on milling machines The X Y and Z axes on your milling machine are also referred to as tool axis principal axis 1st axis and secondary axis 2nd axis The assignment of the tool axis is decisive for the assignment of the principal and secondary axes Fundamentals 3 1 Tool axis Principal axis Secondary axis X Y Z Y Z X Z X Y TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 81 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 1 Fundamentals Absolute and incremental workpiece positions Absolute workpiece positions Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to the datum of the coordinate system origin Each position on the workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates Example 1 Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 X 10 mm X 30mm X 50mm Y 10mm Y 20 Mmm Y 30 mm Incremental workpiece positions Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed nominal position of the tool which serves as the relative imaginary datum When you write an NC program in incremental coordinates you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the previous and the subsequent nominal positions This is why they are also referred to as chain dimensions To program a position in incremental coordinates e
74. attention the TNC shows the help directly associated with the error messages To start the TNCguide you x first have to acknowledge all error messages E stall Tea When the help system is called on the programming station the TNC starts the internally defined standard browser For many soft keys there is a context sensitive call through which you can go directly to the description of the soft key s function This functionality requires using a mouse Proceed as follows gt Select the soft key row containing the desired soft key gt Click with the mouse on the help symbol that the TNC displays just above the soft key row The mouse pointer turns into a question mark gt Move the question mark to the soft key for which you want an explanation and click The TNC opens the TNCguide If no specific part of the help is assigned to the selected soft key the TNC opens the book file main chm in which you can use the search function or the navigation to find the desired explanation manually Even if you are editing an NC block context sensitive help is available gt Select any NC block gt Select the desired word gt Press the HELP key The TNC starts the help system and shows a description for the active function does not apply to miscellaneous functions or cycles that were integrated by your machine tool builder 138 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 T
75. base 10 e g Q33 LOG Q22 Exponential function 2 7183n e g Q1 EXP Q12 Negate multiplication by 1 e g Q2 NEG Q1 Ba Truncate digits after the decimal point Form an integer e g Q3 INT Q42 Absolute value e g Q4 ABS Q22 Truncate digits before the decimal point Form a fraction e g Q5 FRAC Q23 Check the algebraic sign of a digit e g Q12 SGN Q50 When return value Q12 1 then Q50 gt 0 When return value Q12 1 then Q50 lt 0 Calculate modulo value division rest e g Q12 400 360 Result Q12 40 FRAC TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 233 Programming O Parameters 8 10 Entering formulas directly Rules for formulas Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following rules Higher level operations are performed first 12Q1 5 3 2 10 35 1 Calculation 5 3 15 2 Calculation 2 10 20 3 Calculation 15 20 35 or 13 Q2 SQ 10 3 3 73 1 Calculation step 10 squared 100 2 Calculation step 3 to the third power 27 3 Calculation 100 27 73 Distributive law Law of distribution with parentheses calculation a b c a bt a c 234 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Entering formulas directly 8 10 Programming example Calculate an angle with the arc tangent from the opposite side Q12 and adjacent side Q13 then store in Q25 a gt Select the f
76. before deleting an NC block FALSE Do not display confirmation request before deleting an NC block Line number up to which NC program is tested 100 to 9999 Program length for which geometry should be tested DIN ISO programming Block number increment 0 to 250 Increment for generating DIN ISO blocks in the program Line number up to which identical syntax elements are searched for 500 to 9999 Search for selected elements with up down arrow keys Path specifications for end users List with drives and or directories Drives and directories entered here are shown by the TNC in the file manager FN 16 output path for execution Path for FN 16 output if no path has been defined in the program FN 16 output path for Programming and Test Run operating modes Path for FN 16 output if no path has been defined in the program 498 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Machine specific user parameters 21 1 Parameter settings Settings for the file manager Display of dependent files MANUAL Dependent files are displayed AUTOMATIC Dependent files are not displayed Serial interface see Setting up data interfaces page 355 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 499 Tables and overviews 21 2 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces 21 2 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN dev
77. caves inptanscaceece E coring tee feaswe EE 448 OVER RA EATA A ETE A T A E N ANT AE A ANTA 448 Effect of coordinate transfOormMations ccccceeccccecsesseeeceeeseeeeceeesseeeeceeseeseseeseeeeeescaeeeeeesseeeeeeeeaas 448 KAYU E a UE AE TA a a a cere eeres terre cnacttcrtreecerae es 449 MCC ERIA E A AA A A E I TEN E A E E 449 Ee Pame ET aiaa a AA E E A E E A EEE 449 18 3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 ccccsccsssscecsssecessneesssseeecseeseseeeecssaeeeeeeeeessaeeeesneeess 450 EMEC EE E E OE E E E E N 450 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccccccecceeeeeceeceeceeeeeeceeeeceeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeececeectesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaees 451 Cvele Pamet eiai tanan a aeaa Doaa E EEOAE 451 Selecting a datum table in the part PrOQraim cccecccccccseecccccsstececescsseeeeeecsseeeeescseeeeeescseeeeessnteeeene es 452 Edit the datum table in the Programming mode Of OPEratiOn cccceccccecseeseeceecsesseeeeessesseeesenteaees 452 Coniiguring the datur table sieran eii E a aE E dia na E Eii 454 Exiting the datum table ccecccccceececccceceeeececeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeecee cee eeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeseecteeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteesnseees 454 S EE E o E E E N E E A E N E E EAS 454 13 49 DATUM STIN G O Vele 2 ce cee cer tec rner sree cas ac endo cote Peneeee reece Tecate ees 455 E MOC E E A E E N E E N EA S 455 Please note before prograMMing sssssiiissstiiitttttttt rttr ttt tttAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
78. comma in the tool name to a period during import The TNC overwrites the selected tool table when running the IMPORT TABLE function To avoid losing data be sure to make a backup copy of your original tool table before importing it When importing a tool table the TNC 128 saves all unavailable tool types TYPE column as milling tools type MILL When tool tables are imported from an iTNC 530 all existing tools are imported along with their corresponding tool type Nonexistent tool types are imported as type 0 MILL Check the tool table after the import 158 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tooldata 5 2 Call tool data A TOOL CALL block in the part program is defined with the following data gt Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key gt Tool number Enter the number or name of the tool The tool must already be defined in a TOOL DEF block or in the tool table With the tool name soft key you can enter a name With the QS soft key you enter a string parameter The TNC automatically places the tool name in quotation marks You have to assign a tool name to a string parameter first Names always refer to an entry in the active tool table TOOL T If you wish to call a tool with other compensation values also enter the index you defined in the tool table after the decimal point There is a SELECT soft key for calling a window from which you can select a tool define
79. configuration Setting Meaning DHCP server IP addresses from Define the IP address as of which the TNC is to derive the pool of dynamic IP addresses The TNC transfers the values that appear dimmed from the static IP address of the defined Ethernet interface these values cannot be edited m IP addresses to Define the IP address up to which the TNC is to derive the pool of dynamic IP addresses Lease Time hours Time within which the dynamic IP address is to remain reserved for a client If a client logs on within this time the TNC reassigns the same dynamic IP address Domain name Here you can define a name for the machine network if required This is necessary if the same names are assigned in the machine network and in the external network for example Forward DNS externally If IP Forwarding is active Interfaces tab and the option is active you can specify that the name resolution for devices in the machine network can also be used by the external network Forward DNS from outside f IP Forwarding is active Interfaces tab and the option is active you can specify that the TNC is to forward DNS inquiries from devices within the machine network to the name server of the external network if the DNS server of the MC cannot answer the inquiry Status button Call an overview of the devices that are provided with a dynamic IP address in the machine network You can also select settings for these device
80. datum If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine datum you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC no longer displays the SET DATUM soft key in the Manual Operation mode The figure shows coordinate systems with the machine datum and workpiece datum M91 M92 in the Test Run mode In order to be able to graphically simulate M91 M92 movements you need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece blank referenced to the set datum see Showing the workpiece blank in the working space page 328 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 255 Programming Miscellaneous functions 9 3 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate data Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the programmed angular value Example Current angular value 538 Programmed angular value 180 Actual distance of traverse 358 Behavior with M94 At the start of block the TNC first reduces the current angular value to a value less than 360 and then moves the tool to the programmed value If several rotary axes are active M94 will reduce the display of all rotary axes As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94 The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis Example NC blocks To reduce display
81. desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input boxes depends on the touch probe cycle being run Enter the datum number in the Number in table input box Press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key The TNC saves the datum in the indicated datum table under the entered number vv 298 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software option 17 11 5 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table Use this function if you want to save measured values in the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates If you want to save measured values in the workpiece coordinate system press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 298 With the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key the TNC can write the values measured during a probe cycle in the preset table The measured values are then stored referenced to the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates The preset table has the name PRESET PR and is saved in the directory TNC table gt Select any probe function gt Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input boxes depends on the touch probe cycle being run Enter the preset number in the Number in table input box Press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key The TNC saves the datum in the preset table under the entered
82. in the position display during closed loop Only show spindle position when spindle is in position control during closed loop and M5 Show spindle position when spindle is in position control and with M5 Show or hide Preset table soft key True Do not display Preset table soft key False Display Preset table soft key 492 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Machine specific user parameters 21 1 Parameter settings DisplaySettings Display step for individual axes List of all available axes Display step for position display in mm or degrees 0 1 0 05 0 01 0 005 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 display step software option 0 00001 display step software option Display step for position display in inches 0 005 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 display step software option 0 00001 display step software option DisplaySettings Definition of unit of measure valid for the display metric Use metric system inch Use inch system DisplaySettings Format of NC programs and display of cycles Program input in HEIDENHAIN conversational or in ISO format HEIDENHAIN Program input in Positioning with MDI mode of operation in conversational format ISO Program input in Positioning with MDI mode of operation in ISO format Display of cycles TNC_STD Display cycles with comment texts TNC_PARAM Display cycles without comment texts TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming
83. include several operations directly into the part program by soft key Press the FORMULA soft key to call the mathematical functions The TNC displays the following soft keys in several soft key rows Mathematical function Soft key Addition e g Q10 Q1 Q5 Subtraction e g Q25 Q7 Q108 Multiplication e g Q12 5 Q5 Division e g Q25 Q1 Q2 Open parentheses e g Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Close parentheses e g Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Square value e g Q15 SQ5 Square root e g Q22 SQRT 25 SORT Sine of an angle e g Q44 SIN 45 Cosine of an angle e g Q45 COS 45 Tangent of an angle e g Q46 TAN 45 2 Arc sine Inverse function of the sine determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite side to the hypotenuse e g Q10 ASIN 0 75 Arc cosine Inverse function of the cosine determine the angle from the ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse e g Q11 ACOS Q40 Arc tangent Inverse function of the tangent determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite side to the adjacent side e g Q12 ATAN Q50 Te TTS ST TE ATAN 232 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Mathematical function Powers e g Q15 3 3 Constant pi 3 14159 e g Q15 Pl Soft key Entering formulas directly 8 10 Natural logarithm LN of a number Base 2 7183 e g Q15 LN Q11 EAN Logarithm of a number
84. incremental Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the first plunging depth Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Lower advanced stop distance 0259 incremental Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the last plunging depth Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Infeed depth for chip breaking 0257 incremental Depth at which the TNC carries out chip breaking No chip breaking if O is entered Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking Input range 0 000 to 99999 999 Input range 0 000 to 99999 999 gt Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 NC blocks 11 CYCL DEF 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 80 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 15 PLUNGING DEPTH Q203 100 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q212 0 5 DECREMENT Q205 3 MIN PLUNGING DEPTH Q258 0 5 UPPER ADV STOP DIST Q259 1 LOWER ADV STOP DIST Q257 5 DEPTH FOR CHIP BRKNG Q256 0 2 DIST FOR CHIP BRKNG Q211 0 25 DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM Q379 7 5 START POINT Q253 750 F PRE POSITIONING Q208 9999 R
85. key row provides a soft key for using multiple holes or cylindrical studs to set the datum You can set the intersection of two or more elements as datum Select the probing function for the intersection of holes cylindrical studs PROBING gt Select the touch probe function Press the V PROBING CC soft key gt Hole is to be probed automatically Define by soft key gt Circular stud is to be probed automatically Ss Define by soft key Preposition the touch probe approximately in the center of the hole or near the first touch point of the circular stud After you have pressed the NC Start key the TNC automatically probes the points on the circle Move the touch probe to the next hole repeat the probing operation and have the TNC repeat the probing procedure until all the holes have been probed to set the datum TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 307 Manual operation and setup 11 7 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Setting the datum in the intersection of multiple holes gt Preposition the touch probe approximately in the 6 center of the hole gt Hole is to be probed automatically Define by soft key gt To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The touch probe probes the circle automatically gt Repeat the probing procedure for the remaining elements gt Terminate the probing procedure an
86. name of the corresponding NC programs The TIME column shows the sum of all TIME entries feed time without rapid traverse movements The TNC sets all other columns to 0 TOOLFILE In the PATH column the TNC saves the path name of the tool table with which you conducted the Test Run This enables the TNC during the actual tool usage test to detect whether you performed the test run with the TOOL T TNR Tool number 1 No tool inserted yet IDX Tool index NAME Tool name from the tool table TIME Tool usage time in seconds feed time without rapid traverse movements WTIME Tool usage time in seconds total usage time between tool changes Tool radius R Oversize of tool radius DR from the tool table in mm BLOCK Block number in which the TOOL CALL block was programmed PATH TOKEN TOOL Path name of the active main program or subprogram TOKEN STOTAL Path name of the subprogram Tool number with tool index OVRMAX Maximum feed rate override that occurred during machining During Test Run the TNC enters the value 100 OVRMIN Minimum feed rate override that occurred during machining During Test Run the TNC enters the value 1 NAMEPROG 162 m 0 The tool number is programmed m 1 The tool name is programmed TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 5 3 Tool compensation Introduction The TNC adjusts
87. number vv TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 299 Manual operation and setup 11 6 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 11 6 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Introduction In order to precisely specify the actual trigger point of a 3 D touch probe you must calibrate the touch probe otherwise the TNC cannot provide precise measuring results Always calibrate a touch probe in the following cases Commissioning Stylus breakage Stylus exchange Change in the probe feed rate Irregularities caused for example when the machine heats up Change of active tool axis When you press the OK soft key after calibration the calibration values are applied to the active touch probe The updated tool data become effective immediately and a new tool call is not necessary During calibration the TNC finds the effective length of the stylus and the effective radius of the ball tip To calibrate the 3 D touch probe clamp a ring gauge or a stud of known height and known radius to the machine table The TNC provides calibration cycles for calibrating the length and the radius gt Press the TOUCH PROBE soft key CALIBRATE gt Display the calibration cycles Press CALIBRATE Ay TS gt Select the calibration cycle Calibration cycles of the TNC Function Page Calibrating the leng
88. of all active rotary axes M94 To reduce display of the C axis only M94C To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in the C axis to the programmed value C 180 FMAX M94 Effect M94 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M94 becomes effective at the start of block 256 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior 9 4 ice 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate regardless of the direction of traverse Behavior with M103 The TNC reduces the feed rate when the tool moves in the negative direction of the tool axis The feed rate for plunging FZMAX is calculated from the last programmed feed rate FPROG and a factor F FZMAX FPROG x F Programming M103 If you enter M103 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog by asking you the factor F Effect M103 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M103 program M103 once again without a factor Example NC blocks The feed rate for plunging is to be 20 of the feed rate in the plane TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 257 Programming Miscellaneous functions 9 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 Standa
89. of the second OS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key STRCOMP E E gt The TNC returns the following results 0 The compared QS parameters are identical m 1 The first OS parameter precedes the second OS parameter alphabetically 1 The first OS parameter follows the second OS parameter alphabetically Example QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority 37 Q52 STRCOMP SRC_QS12 SEA_QS14 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 String parameters 8 11 243 Programming O Parameters 8 11 String parameters Reading machine parameters Use the CFGREAD function to read out TNC machine parameters as numerical values or as strings In order to read out a machine parameter you must use the TNC s configuration editor to determine the parameter name parameter object and if they have been assigned the group name and index Type Meaning Example Icon Key Group name of the CH_NC 7 machine parameter if assigned Entity Parameter object CfgGeoCycle 7 the name starts with Cfg Attribute Name of the displaySpindleErr machine parameter Index List index of a 0 machine parameter if assigned If you are in the configuration editor for the user parameters you can change the display of the existing parameters In the default
90. plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Pitch circle diameter 0244 Diameter of the pitch circle Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Starting angle Q245 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the starting point for the first machining operation on the pitch circle Input range 360 000 to 360 000 gt Stopping angle 0246 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the starting point for the last machining operation on the pitch circle does not apply to full circles Do not enter the same value for the stopping angle and starting angle If you enter the stopping angle greater than the starting angle machining will be carried out counterclockwise otherwise machining will be clockwise Input range 360 000 to 360 000 gt Stepping angle 0247 incremental Angle between two machining operations on a pitch circle If you enter an angle step of 0 the TNC will calculate the angle step from the starting and stopping angles NC blocks and the number of pattern repetitions If you enter 53 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN a value other than 0 the TNC will not take the stopping angle into account The sign for the angle Reel ENER EU ANE step determines the working direction negative Q217 50 CENTER IN 2ND AXIS clo
91. position to the starting point for the first machining operation Sequence Move to the set up clearance spindle axis Approach the starting point in the machining plane Move to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface spindle axis From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle The tool then approaches the starting point for the next machining operation in the positive reference axis direction at set up clearance or 2nd set up clearance This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations on the first line have been executed The tool is located above the last point on the first line The tool subsequently moves to the last point on the second line where it carries out the machining operation From this position the tool approaches the starting point for the next machining operation in the negative reference axis direction This process 6 is repeated until all machining operations in the second line have been executed The tool then moves to the starting point of the next line All subsequent lines are processed in a reciprocating movement Please note while programming Cycle 221 is DEF active which means that Cycle 221 automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle If you combine Cycle 221 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 209 and 251 to 267 the set up clearance workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance and the rotational position that you defined in Cycl
92. position encoders that register the positions of the machine table or tool Linear axes are usually equipped with linear encoders rotary tables and tilting axes with angle encoders When a machine axis moves the corresponding position encoder generates an electrical signal The TNC evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual position of the machine axis If there is a power interruption the calculated position will no longer correspond to the actual position of the machine slide To recover this association incremental position encoders are provided with reference marks The scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are crossed over From that signal the TNC can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine positions For linear encoders with distance coded reference marks the machine axes need to move by no more than 20 mm for angle encoders by no more than 20 With absolute encoders an absolute position value is transmitted to the control immediately upon switch on In this way the assignment of the actual position to the machine slide position is re established directly after switch on Reference system A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in space The position data are always referenced to a predetermined Z point and are described through coordinates The Cartesian coordinate system a recta
93. press the SELECT soft key or ane gt Press the ENT key Step 2 Select a directory gt Move the highlight to the desired directory in the left hand window the right hand window automatically shows all files stored in the highlighted directory Step 3 Select a file SELECT gt Press the SELECT TYPE soft key TYPE Bi SHOW ALL gt To display all files press the SHOW ALL soft key an or gt Press the soft key for the desired file type or SI gt Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window SELECT gt Press the SELECT soft key or E a gt Press the ENT key The TNC opens the selected file in the operating mode from which you called the file manager TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 101 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Creating a new directory Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you want to create a subdirectory gt NEW enter the new directory name i gt Press the ENT key DIRECTORY CREATE NEW ve gt Press the YES soft key to confirm or gt the NO soft key to abort Creating a new file gt Select the directory in which you wish to create the new file gt Enter the NEW file name with the file extension and confirm with ENT or gt Open a dialog to create a new file Enter the NEW FILE ENT file name with the file extension an
94. probing feed rate with variable tolerance ConstantFeed Constant probing feed rate Max permissible rotation speed on the tool tip 1 to 129 m min Permissible rotation speed on mill circumference Maximum permissible speed for tool measurement 0 to 1000 1 min Maximum permissible speed Maximum permissible measuring error during tool measurement 0 001 to 0 999 mm First maximum permissible measuring error Maximum permissible measuring error during tool measurement 0 001 to 0 999 mm Second maximum permissible measuring error 496 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Machine specific user parameters 21 1 Parameter settings ChannelSettings CH_NC Active kinematics Kinematics to be activated List of machine kinematics Defining the behavior of the NC program Resetting the machining time at program start True Machining time is reset False Machining time is not reset Configuration of machining cycles Overlap factor during pocket milling 0 001 to 1 414 Overlap factor for Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and Cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET Display Spindle error message if no M3 M4 is active on Output error message off Do not output error message Display Enter depth as negative error message on Output error message off Do not output error message M function for spindle orientation 1 Spindle orientation directly via NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of M function for spi
95. rectangular pockets Depending on the cycle parameters the following machining alternatives are available Complete machining Roughing floor finishing side finishing Only roughing Only floor finishing and side finishing Only floor finishing Only side finishing Roughing 1 The tool plunges the workpiece at the pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth 2 The TNC roughs out the pocket from the inside out taking the overlap factor parameter Q370 and the finishing allowance parameters Q368 and Q369 into account 3 At the end of the roughing operation the TNC moves the tool away from the pocket wall then moves by the set up clearance above the current plunging depth and returns from there at rapid traverse to the pocket center 4 This process is repeated until the programmed pocket depth is reached Finishing 5 If finishing allowances are defined the tool plunges the workpiece at the pocket center and moves to the plunging depth for finishing The TNC first finishes the pocket walls in multiple infeeds if so specified 6 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the pocket from the inside out Please note while programming Pre position the tool in the machining plane to the starting position with radius compensation RO Note parameter Q367 position The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note the 2nd set up clearance 0204 The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determin
96. run full sequence ING nc_prog PGM STATI H No direct Active fixed cycle selection possible ju ros Toot 77 TRAN amana T vu SEL TABLE TNC table zeroshift d CYCL DEF 32 0 TOLERANCE CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 as s CALL LBL 99 1a LBL PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING eee 10 CYCL DEF 17 3 PITCH 11 0C X 22 5 Y 35 75 X 10 20015 0 000 anaa 95 000 Gl 0 000 oOo Aa 10 000 eim 2 go Ule F100 AM J mode NOL Po tz Bso O Cm o omni Jlovr 100 Ju s79 a status status toon sawus tatus oF lt or ovenvzew pos starus saansr Panaw 5 70 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Status displays 2 4 Active miscellaneous functions M M tab Soft key Meaning EX 2ren tun funn sequence Broom No direct List of the active M functions with fixed ee ae 3 A 7 fo BEGIN PGM 723 WM iB selection meaning EE ee possible Ea Lin List of the active M functions that are adapted Hee igs mai by your machine manufacturer o v 0 000 a F100 a 500 000 a iM Mode NOME Fo tas B s 2000 6 on comin love 1
97. s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 501 Tables and overviews 21 2 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces Non HEIDENHAIN devices The connector layout of a non HEIDENHAIN device may substantially differ from that of a HEIDENHAIN device It depends on the unit and the type of data transfer The table below shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block Adapter block Conn cable 366964 xx 363987 02 Female Male Female Color Female 1 1 1 Red 1 2 2 2 Yellow 3 3 3 3 White 2 4 4 4 Brown 6 5 5 5 Black 5 6 6 6 Violet 4 7 7 7 Gray 8 8 8 8 White 7 Green 9 9 9 Green 9 Hsg Hsg Hsg Ext Hsg shield 502 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces 21 2 Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Maximum cable length Unshielded 100 m m Shielded 400 m Pin Signal Description 1 TX Transmit Data 2 TX Transmit Data 3 REC Receive Data 4 Vacant 5 Vacant 6 REC Receive Data 7 Vacant 8 Vacant TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 503 Tables and overviews 21 3 Technical Information 21 3 Technical Information Explanation of symbols m Standard Axis option 1 Software option 1 User functions Brief description Technical Information Basic vers
98. sal ae E aiaeei TAFET 234 Programming examples irengtas anien iiau iea aani Ea A Eea AEEA ENAA 235 V T E E 236 String processing HUNCH ONS wcisiscatiactansaad Sand ieena eaea EEN ea AK ANE a EEEN AAEE 236 Assigning string PAFAMETETS ce cece cee ceeeceeeeee eect ee eeeeeeeee cee eeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseetsisseeeeees 237 Chain inking string parameter Seeerei rr iner nn i EnEn En Sanidnaatseesaniad Manasaniedeseiabiassenmmadeleaaniaeseeeqes 237 Converting a numerical value to a string paramMeter ssssiiisstikiittttttttttttr rr EEEE EEEEEEE EEEE EE EEEE Ereet 238 Copying a substring from a String ParaMetel ccccccccccccccssececcesesseeeeeecseeeeeesseseeeseesseeeeeeesseeseeseaaes 239 Converting a string parameter to a NUMETICal VAIUC cc cccecccccstececeeesseeeeeecsaeeeeessstseeeeeesteeeeeeees 240 Checking a string PALAMETEL 0 2 cceecccccceeecccecsseeeeececseeeeececcseeeeececeeeeecescsesseeesesseeeescstssseeecetesseeesenensaees 241 Finding the length of a String PAarAMeteEl ccccccccceeecccecsseseececceseceeesesseseeeeecsssseeeeseseeseeesenenssteseestseaeess 242 Comparing alphabetic SCQUENCE ccecccccccceesseececseeseeeecceesseeeeceeeseeeeeceesseeeecesesaeeeeenecsseeeeesesaeeseneeaees 243 Reading machine PAraMEters rresiaren Enae aE E A aE AEDE E 244 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 23 Contents 24 8 12 Preassigned paramete
99. scssisssrrisosininrerssnnrsrnirnnn enana nAi NAN ENAA NEEE ANAE AASR RAAHE KARANAA NEE AANE EAA SANNAA EE EAE ENA SESE 271 10 4 Definition of a datum shift e me seese neenn sente renne creer ce enaena cee eee eee EEE E RE ene ETE eee R ERRA A AAEREN aaae EaR 272 VST T E E A A T E A A E T 272 TRANS DATUM AXIS ws cceszetats detieta lect eane kna i a Eas eaan au latadbtanbndsathsd EE EA AE EEA Eai Ora ES 272 TRANS DATUM TABLE cc ccccccceecseccecssessececeeeseeeeeceeeseeeeecessseeeesceeseeeeseesssaeeeeesssseesesessaeeeeesssseeeeeseaees 273 TRANS DATUM RESE Toeren aestedsaasaiveaadgnaniadangadandendsaanateddsabartaaiayaanestadsaanntonlagarecassiare 274 10 5 Creating Text Files c ccccccereccvsctte cs ccsceeeccececvecersnavaeessceserentes sus vanns nce ccaeesueteveesesasachoeatecetenseranesscasetoecesee 275 Application ial cade acted dda dnayniecdnedetd a a a A ae biel daskuubudancet a 275 Opening and exiting text MlSS i ccccsersccdvesndeesswssdudsceedensndecte eamsusedeeesdeddece ammubectbeswsdeed ENEKEN EENEN EEE EEEa 275 Editing TEXTS iiaeo aeea E niaaa a AAA Taa Aa AENOR EE 276 Deleting and re inserting characters words and liNeS sssssssiisiisssssstetittittriritestetttttttirnrnnnr renret tt 276 Editing text DIOCKS siitcirisia unenian aign aiasanansaedesenandenespananas sassmebddestagnandiaangsdidedensepeettacnos 277 Fimding text SC CHOM S keimssinaa E EAEN EEA EA 278 26 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Progra
100. setting the parameters are displayed with short explanatory texts To display the actual system names of the parameters press the key for the screen layout and then the SHOW SYSTEM NAME soft key Follow the same procedure to return to the standard display Each time you want to interrogate a machine parameter with the CFGREAD function you must first define a QS parameter with attribute entity and key The following parameters are read in the CFGREAD function s dialog m KEY_QS Group name key of the machine parameter m TAG_QS Object name entity of the machine parameter m ATR_QS Name attribute of the machine parameter m IDX Index of the machine parameter 244 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 String parameters 8 11 Reading a string of a machine parameter In order to store the content of a machine parameter as a String in a OS parameter SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions OR gt Select the menu for defining various plain FUNCTIONS language functions Select string functions STRING FUNCTIONS v Select the STRING FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the machine parameter Confirm with the ENT key Select the CFGREAD function gt Enter the numbers of the string parameters for the key entity and attribute then confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number for the index or skip the dialog
101. specific 008 490 Using touch probe functions with mechanical probes or measuring dial Situ en a E 311 Version numbers 354 370 Window Manager 74 Working space monitoring 328 331 Workpiece positionS 25 82 Writing probing values in a datum taleren 298 Writing probing values in a preset PADI C ecnntacocteintancseteedexsigmnreaennests 299 Zero point Shift eee 272 Coordinate input 008 272 ZIP archive 113 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heidenhain Strake 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E mail info heidenhain de Technical support FAX Measuring systems E mail service ms support heidenhain de TNC support 49 8669 32 1000 49 8669 31 3104 49 8669 31 3101 E mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programming 49 8669 31 3103 E mail service nc pgm heidenhain de PLC programming 49 8669 31 3102 E mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls E mai www heidenhain de Touch probes from HEIDENHAIN help you reduce non productive time and improve the dimensional accuracy of the finished workpieces 49 8669 31 3105 service lathe support heidenhain de Workpiece touch probes TS 220 TS 440 TS 444 TS 640 TS 740 Signal transmission by cable Infrared transmissi
102. stepover into account This process is repeated until the defined finished dimension has been reached 5 If further stepovers are required the tool then departs the contour and returns to the starting point of stud machining 6 The TNC then plunges the tool to the next plunging depth and machines the stud at this depth 7 This process is repeated until the programmed stud depth is reached Please note while programming Pre position the tool in the machining plane to the starting position with radius compensation RO Note parameter Q367 position The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note the 2nd set up clearance 0204 The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed The TNC reduces the infeed depth to the LCUTS tool length defined in the tool table if the tool length is shorter than the Q202 infeed depth programmed in the cycle TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 433 P Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud milling 434 17 3 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle 256 Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool mov
103. sum Z L d The TNC automatically saves the datum set with the axis keys in line O of the preset table 286 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe 11 4 Datum management with the preset table F I enua operacion eee ae You should definitely use the preset table if case ee mE D m Up to now you have been working with older TNC miin ce gt PE controls with REFbased datum tables i 7 jan a The preset table can contain any number of lines 7 e 5 e TT datums To optimize the file size and the processing i a T speed you should use only as many lines as you e e a a a need for datum management 0 YINn 09 21 i E P o 0 000 i For safety reasons new lines can be inserted only at Deg To ooa 0 000 a 240 000 Froon the end of the preset table LJ oe i gon ioe at aia aan AA R an ae ee ee eo TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 287 Manual operation and setup 11 4 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe Saving the datums in the preset table The preset table has the name PRESET PR and is saved in the directory TNC table PRESET PR is editable in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes only if the CHANGE PRESET soft key was pressed It is permitted to copy the preset
104. table gt Call the file manager and select a file of a different type such as a part program TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 157 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Importing tool tables TABLE function Refer to your machine manual Refer toyour machine manual P The machine manufacturer can adapt the IMPORT If you export a tool table from an iTNC 530 and import it into a TNC 128 you have to adapt its format and content before you can use the tool table On the TNC 128 you can adapt the tool table conveniently with the IMPORT TABLE function The TNC converts the contents of the imported tool table to a format valid for the TNC 128 and saves the changes to the selected file Follow this procedure Save the tool table of the iTNC 530 to the TNC table directory Select the Programming mode of operation Call the file manager Press the PGM MGT key Move the highlight to the tool table you want to import Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Shift the soft key row Select the IMPORT TABLE soft key The TNC inquires whether you really want to overwrite the selected tool table Do not overwrite the file Press the CANCEL soft key or Overwrite the file Press the OK soft key gt Open the converted table and check its contents vvvvvvyv vv The following characters are permitted in the Name column of the tool table ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ0123456789 amp _ The TNC changes a
105. the CANCEL SELECTION soft key gt Move the highlight to the last block of the program section you no wish to copy or cut The TNC shows the marked blocks in a bo aca different color You can end the marking function at any time by pressing the CANCEL SELECTION soft key gt Copy the selected program section Press the COPY BLOCK soft key Cut the selected program section Press the CUT BLOCK soft key The TNC stores the selected block gt Using the arrow keys select the block after which you wish to insert the copied cut program section INSERT Il LAST arses No BLOCK To insert the section into another program select the corresponding program using the file manager and then mark the block after which you wish to insert the program section gt Insert the saved program section Press the INSERT BLOCK soft key gt To end the marking function press the Cancel selection soft key 92 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Opening and entering programs 3 2 Function Soft key Switch the marking function on aaa BLOCK Switch the marking function off cae SELECTION Cut the marked block cut stock Insert the block that is stored in the buffer ene memory BLock Copy the marked block ase BLOCK The TNC search function The search function of the TNC enables you to search for any text w
106. the cursor to the word or line that you wish to erase and insert at a different place in the text gt Press the DELETE WORD or DELETE LINE soft key The text is placed in the buffer memory gt Move the cursor to the location where you wish to insert the text and press the RESTORE LINE WORD soft key Function Soft key Delete and temporarily store a line BELETE LINE Delete and temporarily store a word e WORD Delete and temporarily store a character EE CHAR Insert a line or word from temporary storage INSERT LINE 7 WORD 276 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Creating Text Files 10 5 Editing text blocks You can copy and erase text blocks of any size and insert them at other locations Before any of these actions you must first select the desired text block gt To select a text block Move the cursor to the first character of the text you wish to select gt Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key Ee gt Move the cursor to the last character of the text you wish to select You can select whole lines by moving the cursor up or down directly with the arrow keys the selected text is shown in a different color After selecting the desired text block you can edit the text with the following soft keys Function Soft key Delete the selected block and store eur temporarily BLOCK Store the selected block temporarily without TOES erasing copy BLOCK If desired y
107. the spindle path in the spindle axis by the compensation value for the tool length In the working plane it compensates the tool radius Tool length compensation Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a tool is called To cancel length compensation call a tool with the length L 0 e g TOOL CALL 0 For tool length compensation the control takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value L DL Toot cart DL tag with L Tool length L from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DL toot caL Oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL block DL tap Oversize for length DL in the tool table TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tool compensation 5 3 163 Programming Tools 5 3 Tool compensation Tool radius compensation with paraxial positioning blocks The TNC can compensate the tool radius in the working plane with the aid of paraxial positioning blocks You can enter the dimensions directly from the drawing without first having to convert the positions The TNC extends or shortens the traverse path by the tool radius m R extends the tool path by the tool radius m R shortens the tool path by the tool radius m RO positions the tool using the tool center The radius compensation is effective as soon as a tool is called and traversed with a paraxial movement in the working plane with R R Radius compensat
108. they are reset e g if you select a new program The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after manual machine axis positioning during an interruption RESTORE POSITION soft key Resuming program run with the START button You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways m Machine STOP button pressed m Programmed interruption Resuming program run after an error With an erasable error message gt Remove the cause of the error gt Clear the error message from the screen Press the CE key gt Restart the program or resume program run where It was interrupted With an non erasable error message gt Press and hold the END key for two seconds This induces a TNC system restart gt Remove the cause of the error gt Restart If you cannot correct the error write down the error message and contact your service agency 336 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Program run Retraction after a power interruption The Retraction mode of operation must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual With the Retraction mode of operation you can disengage the tool from the workpiece after an interruption in power The Retraction mode of operation is selectable in the following conditions Power interruption m Relay external DC volta
109. to an existing log Exporting messages The FN 16 function also enables you to save the log files externally Enter the complete target path in the FN 16 function 96 FN 16 F PRINT TNC MSK MSK1 A PC325 LOG PRO1 TXT The FN 16 function overwrites already existing log files with the same name Use M_APPEND if you want to append new log information to an existing log 210 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Additional functions 8 8 FN 18 SYSREAD Reading system data With the FN 18 SYSREAD function you can read system data and store them in Q parameters You select the system data through a group name ID number and additionally through a number and an index Group name ID no Number Index Meaning Program information 10 3 Number of the active fixed cycle 103 Q parameter Relevant within NC cycles for inquiry as to number whether the Q parameter given under IDX was explicitly stated in the associated CYCLE DEF System jump addresses 13 1 Label jumped to during M2 M30 instead of ending the current program Value 0 M2 M30 has the normal effect 2 Label jumped to if FN14 ERROR after the NC CANCEL reaction instead of aborting the program with an error The error number programmed in the FN14 command can be read under ID992 NR14 Value 0 FN14 has the normal effect 3 Label jumped to in the event of an internal server erro
110. tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance in the spindle axis 3 The tool then moves in the spindle axis at the pre positioning feed rate Q253 to the first plunging depth calculated by the TNC Strategies 0389 0 and Q389 1 The strategies O389 0 and Q389 1 differ in the overtravel during face milling If Q389 0 the end point lies outside of the surface If 0389 1 it lies at the edge of the surface The TNC calculates the end point 2 from the side length and the safety clearance to the side If the strategy O389 0 is used the TNC additionally moves the tool beyond the level surface by the tool radius 4 The TNC moves the tool to the end point 2 at the programmed feed rate for milling 5 Then the TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the pre positioning feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width the tool radius the maximum path overlap factor and the safety clearance to the side 6 The tool then returns at the feed rate for milling in the opposite direction 7 The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed 8 The TNC then positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX back to the starting point 1 9 If more than one infeed is required the TNC moves the tool in the spindle axis to the next plunging depth at the positioning feed rate TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 437 Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud milling
111. until a block with a different feed rate is reached FMAX is only effective in the block in which it is programmed After the block with FMAX is executed the feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered as a numerical value Changing during program run You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the feed rate potentiometer F 146 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Entering tool related data 5 1 Spindle speed S The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute rpm in a TOOL CALL block Instead you can also define the cutting speed Vc in meters per minute m min Programmed change In the part program you can change the spindle speed in a TOOL CALL block by entering the spindle speed only gt Program a tool call Press the TOOL CALL key gt Ignore the dialog question for Tool number with the NO ENT key gt Ignore the dialog question for Working spindle axis X Y Z with the NO ENT key gt Enter the new spindle speed for the dialog question Spindle speed S and confirm with END or switch via the VC soft key to entry of the cutting speed Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed potentiometer S TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 147 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data 5 2 Tool data Requirements for tool compensation You usually program the coordina
112. with the ENT key 86 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Opening and entering programs 3 2 Example Display the BLK form in the NC program 0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM Program begin name unit of measure 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 40 Spindle axis MIN point coordinates 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 MAX point coordinates 3 END PGM NEW MM Program end name unit of measure The TNC automatically generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN and END blocks gt If you do not wish to define a blank form cancel the dialog at Working plane in graphic XY by pressing the DEL key Programming tool movements in conversational To program a block initiate the dialog by pressing a axis key In the screen headline the TNC then asks you for all the information necessary to program the desired function EJProgram run full EJF rooraming a Programming Example of a positioning block COORDINATES gt 10 Enter the target coordinate for the X axis i gt go to the next question with ENT TOOL RADIUS COMP R R NO COMP ma gt Enter No radius compensation and go to the next question with ENT FEED RATE F F MAX ENT gt 100 Enter a feed rate of 100 mm min for this path contour ga gt go to the next question with ENT MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M gt Enter 3 miscellaneous function M3 Spindle ON ES gt With the END key the TNC ends this dialog The p
113. wizard which guides you by dialog through the required definitions Status log Display of status information and error messages Press the Clear button to delete the contents of the Status Log window 366 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Firewall 14 12 Firewall Application You can set up a firewall for the primary network interface of the control It can be configured so that incoming network traffic is blocked and or a message is displayed depending on the sender and the service However the firewall cannot be started for the second network interface of the control if it is active as DHCP server Once the firewall has been activated a symbol appears at the lower right in the taskbar The symbol changes depending on the safety level that the firewall was activated with and informs about the level of the safety settings Icon Meaning aia No firewall protection provided although it g y was activated in the configuration This can happen for example if PC names were used in the configuration for which there are no equivalent IP addresses as yet g Firewall active with medium safety level Firewall active with high safety level All g g services except for the SSH are blocked Have the standard settings checked by your network specialist and change them if necessary The settings in the additional tab SSH settings are in preparation for future enhancements
114. you need the current log file Press the Current FILE File soft key ry Al a i v The oldest entry is at the beginning of the log file and the most recent entry is at the end TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 133 Programming Programming aids 4 6 Error messages Keystroke log The TNC stores keystrokes and important events e g system startup in a keystroke log The capacity of the keystroke log is limited If the keystroke log is full the control switches to a second keystroke log If this second file becomes full the first keystroke log is cleared and written to again and so on To view the keystroke history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE ee gt Press the LOG FILES soft key meena gt Open the keystroke log file Press the KEYSTROKE Log LOG soft key o gt If you need the previous log file Press the PREVIOUS FILE soft key Rincon gt If you need the current log file Press the Current FILE File soft key The TNC saves each key pressed during operation in a keystroke log The oldest entry is at the beginning and the most recent entry is at the end of the file 134 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Error messages 4 6 Overview of the keys and soft keys for viewing the logs Function Go to beginning of keystroke log BEGIN Go to end of keystroke log Current keystroke log CURRENT FILE Previous keystroke log P
115. your time zone in the Time zone area Press the Local NTP soft key in order to synchronize the time entry through the NTP server Enter the host name or the URL of an NTP server Press the ADD soft key gt Press the OK soft key vv vv v yv v v TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 351 MOD functions 14 5 Position Display Types 14 5 Position Display Types Application In the Manual Operation mode and the Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block modes of operation you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed The figure at right shows the different tool positions m Initial position m Target position of the tool Workpiece datum Machine datum The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates Function Display Nominal position the value presently NOML commanded by the TNC Actual position current tool position ACTL Reference position the actual position relative REF ACTL to the machine datum Reference position the nominal position REF NOML relative to the machine datum Servo lag difference between nominal and LAG actual positions following error Distance remaining to the programmed ACTDST position in the input system difference between actual and target positions Distance remaining to the programmed REFDST position with reference to the machine datum difference between reference and target p
116. 00 lu_579 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS OF lt m gt ovERVIEW Pos STATUS a panam Positions and coordinates POS tab Soft key Meaning see ea Broor TNG nc_prog 123 h E Type of position display e g actual position POS ox xirmi ox vimi or 14 E v 0 000 iz 500 000 2 g 2 Be 5 Mode nom Fo tas Bs 2000 oer Taint Ovr 100 Ju 573 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS OF lt mie oveRVTEW pos status PARAM TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 71 Introduction 2 4 Status displays Information on tools TOOL tab Soft key TOOL STATUS Meaning Display of active tool m T Tool number and name m RT Number and name of a replacement tool Tool axis Tool length and radii Oversizes delta values from the tool table TAB and the TOOL CALL PGM Tool life maximum tool life TIME 1 and maximum tool life for TOOL CALL TIME 2 Display of programmed tool and replacement tool Tool measurement TT tab 7 The TNC displays the TT tab only if the function is active on your machine Soft key Meaning No direct Number of the tool to be measured selection possible Display whether the tool radius or the tool length is being measured EJF toorem run ful
117. 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 15 7 WintrOCU trons fia rere antes sessssnece sees E tiey nie c tebe T thane ove 372 Available Cycle Groupsircercsrrcrrccccceccecece tes ec cc cetnetee eee tne EE Rae teen ode eee sae tnpes sae RIAA AA ERRARE SAARTE RRE REE 373 Overview OT TIX Cyes ernn E aE EA EAE EEA EARS 373 Working with nixed cycles ar errenneren eeaeee ea E ARAE rR eR EA Eeee EAn EERE RAe AARAA A ASEE EERE EE AEAEE 374 Machine specilis OyoloS mecaesniainrn nn NEEE AAE A NEA E AA EEA NEERA TANEET RANA 374 Defining a cycle using soft KEYS ccccccccccccccecceteeeeeecsseeeeeeceseeeeeecsaeeeececeeeeeeeecaeeeeeecsseeeesesseeeeesesaas 375 Defining a cycle using the GOTO fUNCTION cccccccccceseceeeceseeeeececsesseeeeecsseeeeecstsseeescstsseeesestnaaeess 375 Calli san Cy Cle sraia ccnai NE 376 PATTERN DEF pattern Aepinniticrnssyeccccccxscecccscssscccccecsuscesccuececcccecessvccectecexs cose coxteonecenedscetcchierseceerenstneee 378 PDDICATON ea E E E E roasted apenas reece cesaeeren sangre 378 Entering PATTERN DER i oscccscsctesntecareosnacinessdsad dteeininan ted snanns en aE aaan EE Ean idani aa aiarad EEA EEan 378 WSing FATTERN DEP itesciissibesonist a AEE E EEEE AA 379 Defining individual machining POSITIONS ccccccccceccesececceceseeeeeesceeeeeeecssaeeeeeecueeeeeescsueeesesssseeseeseaees 379 Deining ASIMGIE TOW careca a ETEEN AT 379 Defining a single PatlOMMisccsccscecanslicdecctass cand chdadeaddasanasudeeanaianeditaad aE AA i
118. 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q11 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 0 32ND SET UP CLEARANCE 10 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M3 11 Z 100 RO FMAX M6 12 TOOL CALL 2 Z S5000 13 Z 10 RO F5000 14 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 25 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE 424 10 20 40 80 90 100 Definition of workpiece blank Call tool centering drill Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F the TNC positions to the clearance height after every cycle Definition of point table Cycle definition CENTERING 0 must be entered here effective as defined in point table O must be entered here effective as defined in point table Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1 PNT feed rate between the points 5000 mm min Retract the tool change the tool Call tool drill Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F Cycle definition drilling O must be entered here effective as defined in point table TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Q204 0 32ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 2 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q395 0 DEPTH REFERENCE 15 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M3 16 Z 100 RO FMAX M6 17 TOOL CALL 3 Z S200 18 Z 50 RO FMAX 19 CYCL DEF 206 TAPPING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 25 DEPTH OF THREAD Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q211 0 DWELL TIM
119. 19 PLC function transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC FN 20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder With the FN 20 WAIT FOR function you can synchronize the NC and PLC during a program run The NC stops machining until the condition that you have programmed in the FN 20 WAIT FOR block is fulfilled WAIT FOR SYNC is used whenever you read for example system data via FN18 SYSREAD that require synchronization with real time The TNC stops the look ahead calculation and executes the subsequent NC block only when the NC program has actually reached that block Example Pause internal look ahead calculation read current position in the X axis 32 FN 20 WAIT FOR SYNC 33 FN 18 SYSREAD Q1 ID270 NR1 IDX1 220 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Additional functions 8 8 FN 29 PLC Transfer values to the PLC This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder e The FN 29 PLC function transfers up to eight numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC FN 37 EXPORT This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder You need the FN 37 EXPORT function if you want to create your own cycles and integrate them in the TNC TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 221 Programming Q P
120. 226 15 STARTNG PNT 2ND gt Traversing to clearance height Q301 Definition of ANE how the touch probe is to move between machining Q237 10 SPACING IN 1ST AXIS operations E Q238 8 SPACING IN 2ND AXIS 0 Move at set up clearance between machining operations Q242 6 sNUMBER OF COLUMNS 1 Move at 2nd set up clearance between machining Q243 4 NUMBER OF LINES operations Q224 15 ANGLE OF ROTATION Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q203 30 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q301 1 MOVE TO CLEARANCE 388 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 15 7 Point tables Application You should create a point table whenever you want to run a cycle or several cycles in sequence on an irregular point pattern If you are using drilling cycles the coordinates of the working plane in the point table represent the hole centers If you are using milling cycles the coordinates of the working plane in the point table represent the starting point coordinates of the respective cycle e g centerpoint coordinates of a circular pocket Coordinates in the spindle axis correspond to the coordinate of the workpiece surface Creating a point table gt Select the Programming mode of operation ay e PGM gt Call the file manager Press the PGM MGT key MGT FILE NAME N gt Enter the name and file type of the point table and confirm your entry with the ENT key Select the unit of measure Press th
121. 30 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 M IV OD fun thorns scree da seen ease caste cares cas orga Pac ts Sete cae ee gare secre cae tae outset oa nee pe fate ene ters oee ees tater coats ee sree rat 346 SElSCHNG MOD TUMCHOMS eeen kakena k akaa let naisteneuotads sedate syuacecenistanenedds Muoulecensancedens 346 Changing the SEttiNgS cccccccceeesseccecseessecescseseececeeeseeeeeeeessseeecesesseeeeceesseeeseesesseeeeeeseseeseesetaeeseeeesas 346 Exiting MOD TUG HONS scarsia a E Sede OOA O E 346 Overview of MOD fUNCTIONS 0 cccccceeeeceeecce cence ee ceeeeceeeeeceaeeeceseeeseaaeeesseeescaesesaaeeseceeesceeseeueeesneeeees 347 914 2 Graplic SQEIING S23 E Gus fu uuccees suv sotedevev ec esses T T T fey sen teys 348 14 3 Machine Steins o c cceccciene secs tencccceeeessvsunhtnccssceneccerecvectesacguetsceneccutesussuvnnylacessseseeceeuseveesenscanesleeceeensenss 349 Pema ACCOSS ai laden d Mlagdaget Miadhaad adansel A dagient Paadedabesdadduebiadeluantpaaeutnetanas 349 TOO USAGE TINS saickec ites tees cosdatocmandadereiesdaannducaaasanntiepasdtiades sdcaaniartednsaenndevarsndadessdssueldceandathduedestadedsanetanadidnies 349 DSlSCE IKIMSM AL OS vc tesces sient dace eatinte ager e enacted een las ie ead ete eal tts indeed eee 350 14 4 System setings orn ce cues a E E E E E A ives E E E 351 Se E a E E A A A E E ET 351 14 5 S E T 352 Application soree ne e E E E E E E 352 14 6 Setting the unit of IMGA
122. 379 Cycle fundamentals 15 4 PATTERN DEF pattern definition 380 Starting point in X absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the row in the X axis Starting point in Y absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the row in the Y axis Spacing of machining positions incremental Distance between the machining positions You can enter a positive or negative value Number of repetitions Total number of machining operations Rot position of entire pattern absolute Angle of rotation around the entered starting point Reference axis Reference axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value Coordinate of workpiece surface absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin anuar operation Ee rograming Programmini 9 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 PATTERN DEF pattern definition 15 4 Defining a single pattern NC blocks If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not 10 Z 100 RO FMAX equal to 0 then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the 11 PATTERN DEF PAT1 X 25 Y 33 5 DX 8 DY 10 NUMX5 NUMY4 ROT 0 ROTX 0 ROTY 0 Z 0 machining cycle The Rotary pos ref ax and Rotary pos minor ax parameters are added to a previously performed rotated position of the entire pattern oats PATTERN gt S
123. 5 2014 Opening and entering programs 3 2 Define the blank BLK FORM Immediately after initiating a new program you define an unmachined workpiece blank If you wish to define the blank at a later stage press the spec fct key the PROGRAM DEFAULTS soft key and then the BLK FORM soft key The TNC needs this definition for graphic simulation gt You only need to define the workpiece blank if you wish to run a graphic test for the program The TNC can depict various types of blank forms Soft key Function e Define a rectangular blank e Define a cylindrical blank Rectangular blank The sides of the cuboid lie parallel to the X Y and Z axes This blank is defined by two of its corner points MIN point the smallest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute values m MAX point the largest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute or incremental values Example Display the BLK FORM in the NC program Program begin name unit of measure Spindle axis MIN point coordinates MAX point coordinates Program end name unit of measure TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 85 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening and entering programs Cylindrical blank The cylindrical blank form is defined by the dimensions of the cylinder m R Radius of the cylinder m L Length of the cylinder DIST Shifting along the rotati
124. 500 Non HEIDENHAIN Ce VICES ccc ccc cccccc ee cececue ees eeeeceseeeesuueeeesaueeseeaeeessuaesesaaeeseeaaeeesuaasesaueeeetaneesunaneeea 502 Ethernet interface RJ45 Socket cece cece eececceceseeeeceecese eee etet Ar EEEE EELE EEEE EEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EE EEEE 503 Technical informatio Teese er A I AE ren EE E A Ded es ERE tea ee EN 504 Techical M O M A ON e a a a a O a a a E TAa 504 REECE EE A E E E E E ethane 508 Miscellaneous fuUnCtionS e essiueesesiiineetiniie rett cece eee ceeeeeseeaeeeeeeceeauaaeeeeesuuauaaeeeeesavaaeevessesanaaeesesseaaaeaess 509 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 41 First Steps with the TNC 128 1 1 Overview 1 1 Overview This chapter is intended to help TNC beginners quickly learn to handle the most important procedures For more information on a respective topic see the section referred to in the text The following topics are included in this chapter m Machine switch on m Programming the first part Graphically testing the first part m Setting up tools Workpiece setup Running the first program 1 2 Machine switch on Acknowledging the power interruption and moving to the reference points Switch on and crossing over the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual gt Switch on the power supply for control and machine The TNC starts the operating system
125. 51 Cycles Coordinate Transformations 18 3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 Selecting a datum table in the part program With the SEL TABLE function you select the table from which the TNC takes the datums gt Select the functions for program call Press the PGM CALL key gt Press the DATUM TABLE soft key jail gt Select the complete path name of the datum table or the file with the SELECT soft key and confirm your entry with the END key Program a SEL TABLE block before Cycle 7 Datum Shift A datum table selected with SEL TABLE remains active until you select another datum table with SEL TABLE or through PGM MGT Edit the datum table in the Programming mode of operation After you have changed a value in a datum table you must save the change with the ENT key Otherwise the change might not be included during program run Select the datum table in the Programming mode of operation gt Call the file manager Press the PGM MGT key gt Display the datum tables Press the SELECT TYPE and SHOW D soft keys gt Select the desired table or enter a new file name gt Edit the file The functions displayed in the soft key row for editing include Function Soft key o m Q H a Select beginning of table Select end of table m o Go to the previous page Go to next page Insert line INSERT LINE Delete line DELETE LINE Find FIND SoSe 452 TN
126. 8 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 FN 16 F PRINT Output of formatted texts and Q parameter values With FN 16 you can also output to the screen any messages from the NC program Such messages are displayed by the TNC in a pop up window The function FN 16 F PRINT transfers Q parameter values and texts in a selectable format If you send the values the TNC saves the data in the file that you defined in the FN 16 block To output the formatted texts and Q parameter values create a text file with the TNC s text editor In this file you then define the output format and Q parameters you want to output Example of a text file to define the output format MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY DATE 2d 2d 4d DAY MONTH YEAR4 TIME 2d 2d 2d HOUR MIN SEC NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 X1 9 3LF Q31 Y1 9 3LF Q32 Z1 9 3LF Q33 When you create a text file use the following formatting functions Special Function characters sisteacenns Define output format for texts and variables between the quotation marks 9 3LF Define the format for O parameters 9 total characters incl decimal point of which 3 are after the decimal Long Floating decimal number S Format for text variable d Format for integer j Separation character between output format and parameter End of block character n Line break TNC 128 User s Manu
127. 9 Maximum nesting depth for main program calls 19 where a CYCL CALL acts like a main program call m You can nest program section repeats as often as desired TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 7 5 181 7 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 75 Nesting mg x c 3 5 a sS gt Z O 9 ion z 3 2 Q 5 D o c o Y Q 9 3 Program execution Main program UPGMS is executed up to block 17 Subprogram SP1 is called and executed up to block 39 Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to block 62 End of subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it was called Subprogram 1 is called and executed from block 40 up to block 45 End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program UPGMS Main program UPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35 Return jump to block 1 and end of program WN iN o1 82 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Nesting 7 5 Repeating program section repeats Example NC blocks P e Q 9 3 O c i 5 Main program REPS is executed up to block 27 Program section between block 27 and block 20 is repeated twice Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35 Program section between block 35 and block 15 is repeated once including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27 Main program REPS is executed fro
128. 9999 to 99999 9999 Input range Bere CORE BG NEW 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Q201 20 DEPTH Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q239 1 THREAD PITCH between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Input range O to Q203 25 SURFACE COORDINATE 99999 9999 Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine stop button the TNC will display the MANUAL OPERATION soft key If you press MANUAL OPERATION you can retract the tool under program control Simply press the positive axis direction button of the active spindle axis TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 423 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 13 Programming Examples 16 13 Programming Examples Example Thread milling The drill hole coordinates are stored in the point table TAB1 PNT and are called by the TNC with CYCL CALL PAT The tool radii are selected so that all work steps can be seen in the test graphics Program sequence Centering m Drilling m Tapping O BEGIN PGM 1 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Y 0 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S5000 4 Z 10 RO F5000 5 SEL PATTERN TAB1 6 CYCL DEF 240 CENTERING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q343 1 SELECT DIA DEPTH Q201 3 5 DEPTH Q344 7 DIAMETER Q206
129. AARAA NA AA EEREN ANAA 356 Seting data bits JMAaBIlS herena An nE E AE AEEA ETEA EAEE EA TEA EAE 356 Check party DANITY rennuni ia EAr aa EEEE A EE indan 356 Seng the stop Dits StOpBIlS eir inisniseer n EE EEEE EEATT 356 Setting handshaking flowCOonirol eeii esii ienn EAE EESE AE EEE EEE 357 Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC softWare sssssssssiiiisiissesrseruiiriirrsnreereerrrrrrrrrnna 357 Setting the operating mode of the external device fileSystem sssssssssssirisseririrrtrrrererrrrrrrrrrrent 358 Data transfer SOPtWALE cccccccccccceccccsneeeeeeecneeeeeeeceeeeeeeecseeeeeeecsaeeeeeecaeeeeeescsaeeeeescsaaeeeeescaeeeeessnaeeeeee ss 359 M4 VIE tH eMmet WMte rica Ce cs oe 5 co cees sav ecca de causes cs sus tv sucks sy fsveceu E sr Ss scccueeveveccuestevstusceny oe vaecees saveociisrereoacees 361 MVC OGU CLOMce Yeo es E ncaa vorecnsnaisiears alan tehsnsandeebseeandeevanes dues tei nesn EE T 361 Connection OPTOMS oeiia eA A EERE AAE AE EAE e EAEE AEEA ERASED RAEE 361 COMMING ne TNC rasiassa aAA EEE AAE AEE E E EEA 361 T T 367 AP PICATION va lt caccecicatsacndater eiea neinka aa ke o nai A EREEREER AEEA RAEAN ARENAER EE saa eaanpuspbaddets ananpene ethan FANER 367 T4 Bl oad ma Ne confi graon 370 APDIICAUONM rerien ireschen niake net exhouagenade lea sedeenasananlguscgapaasahes EAN PETERE a DERA RARE EEDEN EERENS 370 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 15 1 15 2
130. ABREAD Read from a freely definable table After you have opened a table with FN 26 TABOPEN you can use the function FN 28 TABREAD to read from it You can define and read several column names in a TABREAD block The column names must be written between quotation marks and separated by a comma In the FN 28 block you can define the Q parameter number in which the TNC is to write the value that is first read You can read only numerical table fields If you wish to read from more than one column in a block the TNC will save the values under successive Q parameter numbers Example You wish to read the values of the columns Radius Depth and D from line 6 of the presently opened table Save the first value in Q parameter Q10 second value in Q11 third value in Q12 56 FN 28 TABREAD Q10 6 RADIUS DEPTH D 270 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 File functions 10 3 10 3 File functions Application The FILE FUNCTION features are used to copy move and delete files from within the part program You must not use FILE functions on programs or files to which you have previously made reference with functions such as CALL PGM or CYCL DEF 12 PGM CALL Defining file functions gt Press the special functions key Seren gt Select the program functions FUNCTIONS aes gt Select the file functions The TNC displays the FILE available functions Function Meaning Soft
131. AE ia EEA iA 381 Defining individual fraMeS ccccccccccccccceccsseeeceecssneeececceeeeeeecsaeeeseecseeeeeescsueeeseessaeesesecseeesesssseeeeeneaas 382 Beining aral er Oie a EE AEEA 383 Deiining a PITCH Circle cs ccaccdededeesseiccsswnsdeessanascdddnceassencsacnsaedichensagated senna dauds sasnanishensasedsl coennnsditensaandcnes 383 POLAR PATMERN Gycle 220 ierrcrscccceceeccecesececses ccceesrecerccceestcce es satrraecer rece cenes rere cees rocereecre cree ceeerey 384 KV GIS Uta c E E AE E E E cheney E E A R des ETT 384 Please note while programming va xssincsenesuerechangdancesyecduanseeeaiiiedadanaasased aaa AE OAE Aaaeeeaa 384 Cycle Ua ey 1f 001 1 fs ec 385 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 22 1i isecsiooe csvccse sce secs cas cone snseeses cover E 387 CY CIO HUN acaealcesccattheadedaiescasesateasacaddsendsenadveslsatadeatbsbasnduteadbarseiualddudta vasabadedaGaaldscadechlbdannsiiediadedaasdeabenteabaeges 387 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccccccecceescecneceeeeeeeeeeeteeceececneceeeeeeeeeeeseesenssecueeeeeeeeeeeeeteesenseenaees 387 Cycle DAlAIMNGTE S wiscceedsassseceeaiaunvews e AE EEA EE EE AAA E ee maedguiibetd A EEEa 388 A skys sso sucenes ovesck sup stetes sunusauex Saves cieenasunsssaeansuece ves sexeeenrsieeee 389 APPICCIU ne ai aE aa E p aeir mates ante E O E a O 389 Creating a pomt Tal E sn a EE E EEE E E A a Miiadaanesirtee 389 Hiding single points from the machining PLOCESS ccceccccccsseceececcsseeeececseeeeeee
132. AUTO FU FZ Finishing allowance for side Q368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane is left over after machining Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor Q369 incremental value Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Infeed for finishing Q338 incremental Infeed per cut Q338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range O to 99999 9999 Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb 1 up cut Path overlap factor Q370 Q370 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 1 to 1 9999 NC blocks 8 CYCL DEF 256 RECTANGULAR STUD Q215 0 Q218 60 Q424 74 Q219 40 Q425 60 Q201 20 Q367 0 Q202 5 Q207 500 Q206 150 Q385 500 Q368 0 2 Q369 0 1 Q338 5 Q200 2 Q203 0 Q204 50 Q351 1 Q370 1 MACHINING OPERATION FIRST SIDE LENGTH WORKPC BLANK SIDE 1 2ND SIDE LENGTH WORKPC BLANK SIDE 2 DEPTH STUD POSITION PLUNGING DEPTH FEED RATE FOR MILLING FEED RATE
133. B devices appear as separate drives in the directory tree so you can use the file management functions described in the earlier chapters correspondingly Your machine tool builder can assign permanent names for USB devices Refer to your machine B manual TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 119 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager To remove a USB device proceed as follows PGM gt Call the file manager Press the PGM MGT key MGT gt Select the left window with the arrow key gt Use the arrow keys to select the USB device to be removed gt Scroll through the soft key row Select additional functions FUNCTIONS gt Scroll through the soft key row gt Select the function for removing USB devices The TNC removes the USB device from the directory tree gt Exit the file manager a E E a In order to re establish a connection with a USB device that has been removed press the following soft key gt Select the function for reconnection of USB devices X 120 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming Programming aids 4 1 Screen keyboard 4 1 Screen keyboard You can enter letters and special characters with the screen keypad SL ea or if available with a PC keyboard connected over the USB port a Tere aa 15 file s 146 96 GB vacant ok CANCEL
134. C 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 18 3 Function Go to beginning of line Go to end of line Copy the current value Insert the copied value Add the entered number of lines datums to the end of the table n e x 2 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 453 Cycles Coordinate Transformations 18 3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 Configuring the datum table If you do not wish to define a datum for an active axis press the CE key Then the TNC clears the numerical value from the corresponding input field O u e nuar operation E Taoie editing Programming gb Table editin g You can change the properties of tables Enter the code number 555343 in the MOD menu The TNC then offers the EDIT FORMAT soft key if a table is selected When you press this soft key the TNC opens a pop up window where the properties are shown for each column of the selected table Any changes made only affect the open table Exiting the datum table Select a different type of file in file management and choose the desired file After you have changed a value in a datum table you must save the change with the ENT key Otherwise e the change may not be included during program run Status displays In the additional status display the TNC shows the values of the active da
135. CE ans Q214 1 DISENGAGING DIRECTN 4 Retract the tool in plus direction of the minor axis gt Angle for spindle orientation 0336 absolute Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before it is plunged into or retracted from the bore hole Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Q336 0 sANGLE OF SPINDLE TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 409 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 16 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 If you enter a deepened starting point the TNC move at the defined positioning feed rate to the set up clearance above the deepened starting point 3 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the entered feed rate F 4 Ifyou have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the set up clearance and then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first plunging depth 5 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement 6 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 7 The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the e
136. Calculations in parentheses Arc cosine ARC Sine SIN Cosine COS Tangent TAN Powers of values XAY Square root SORT Inversion 1 x pi 3 14159265359 PI Add value to buffer memory M Save the value to buffer memory MS Recall from buffer memory MR Delete buffer memory contents MC Natural logarithm LN Logarithm LOG Exponential function e x Check the algebraic sign SGN Form the absolute value ABS TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Calculator 4 4 Oron a H Prooraming lonc 14 09 ING nc_prog PGM TNG 128 5_128 h END 125 Programming Programming aids 4 4 Calculator Mathematical function Command Truncate decimal places INT Truncate integers FRAC Modulus operator MOD Select view View Delete value CE Unit of measure MM or INCH Show angle values in radians RAD standard angle in degrees Select the display mode of the DEC decimal or HEX numerical value hexadecimal Transferring the calculated value into the program gt Use the arrow keys to select the word into which the calculated value is to be transferred gt Superimpose the on line calculator by pressing the CALC key and perform the desired calculation gt Press the LOAD CURRENT VALUE soft key for the TNC to transfer the value into the active input box and to close the calculator 126 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Calculator 4 4
137. DENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 REAMING Cycle 201 16 4 16 4 REAMING Cycle 201 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool reams to the entered depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time 4 The tool then retracts to set up clearance at the feed rate F and from there if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance in FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 399 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 4 REAMING Cycle 201 Cycle parameters 201 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiec
138. Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 9 SINGLE LIP DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 16 9 SINGLE LIP DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 Then the TNC moves the tool at the defined positioning feed rate to the set up clearance above the deepened starting point and activates the drilling speed M3 and the coolant The TNC executes the approach motion with the direction of rotation defined in the cycle with clockwise counterclockwise or stationary spindle 3 The tool drills to the hole depth at the feed rate F or to the plunging depth if a smaller infeed value has been entered The plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement If you have entered a dwell depth the TNC reduces the feed rate by the feed rate factor after the dwell depth has been reached 4 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for chip breaking 5 The TNC repeats this process 3 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 6 After the TNC has reached the hole depth the TNC switches off the coolant and resets the drilling soeed to the value defined for retraction 7 The tool is retracted at the retraction feed rate to the set up clearance If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point
139. E AT DEPTH Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 0 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE 20 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M3 21 Z 100 RO FMAX M2 22 END PGM 1 MM Point table TAB1 PNT TAB1 PNT MM NRXYZ 0 10 10 0 1 40 30 0 2 90 10 0 3 80 30 0 4 80 65 0 5 90 90 0 6 10 90 0 7 20 55 0 END Programming Examples 16 13 O must be entered here effective as defined in point table Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1 PNT Retract the tool change the tool Call tool tap Move tool to clearance height Cycle definition for tapping O must be entered here effective as defined in point table O must be entered here effective as defined in point table Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1 PNT Retract the tool end program TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 425 Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud milling 17 1 Fundamentals 17 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC offers the following cycles for machining pockets and studs Cycle Soft key Page 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET 251 429 Roughing finishing cycle with a selection of machining operation 256 RECTANGULAR STUD 256 433 Roughing finishing cycle with AO stepover if multiple passes are required 428 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 17 2 17 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 Cycle run Use Cycle 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET to completely machine
140. EEEEEEEEEEE REEERE EEEE EEE 455 Cvele PIMEIN eaea a EE EAEE E EO EA EEEE AE 455 13 55 MIRRORING Oee E 456 E o a A E E T A 456 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccecccecceeeeeceeceeceeeeteceeeceeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeesecesceteeuseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeees 456 e pame lE IS aara anr AEA E A AE E alddbaeanbbbadaanctndianen gainsdanaranth 456 18 63 SCGALINGA Cyclezii AT T E T E E AA E 457 E E E E A E E E E E E E E 457 Cycle DALAIMGtOlS ccnidesscscderevassspedadsnenstnadaesssadersvansseedddasssatnadsaasscnddshanhsandeicsssannaddesgannsieiassabedes sasganendeunes 457 18 7 AXIS SPEGIEIG SGAEING Gy cle 26 ieterrcsscccecsceseeccnevstecseseesteceeeorc cess cuersiteveccetcnsrere ss ctenvretesiereeseiayy 458 FMCG N A E E Sean EE A E T E TE ET A E T E AT 458 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccccccecceesceceeceeeeeeeceeeteeceeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeceessesueseeeseeeeeeeteeseeneenaees 458 Cycle plamena aaoi anniina 459 18 8 Programming Examples e ee E e AE a 460 Example Groups Of NOl S cccccccccccseesseeceeseseeeeccseeeececeeeseeeeseessaeeeeeseseeeseessseeeeeseseeesesseseeeeesensaes 460 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 37 Contents 19 1 Fundamentals Overview 19 2 DWELL TIME Cycle 9 Function Cycle parameters 19 3 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 19 4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION Cycle 13 38 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 20 1 General info
141. ETRACTION FEED RATE Q395 0 DEPTH REFERENCE 412 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 16 8 gt Deepened starting point 0379 incremental with respect to the workpiece surface Starting position of drilling if a shorter tool has already pilot drilled to a certain depth The TNC moves at the feed rate for pre positioning from the set up clearance to the deepened starting point Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing velocity of the tool during positioning from the set up clearance to a deepened starting point in mm min Effective only if Q379 is entered not equal to 0 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO gt Feed rate for retraction Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting after the machining operation If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate Q207 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAAX FAUTO gt Depth reference 0395 Select whether the entered depth is referenced to the tool tip or the cylindrical part of the tool If the TNC is to reference the depth to the cylindrical part of the tool the point angle of the tool must be defined in the T ANGLE column of the tool table TOOL T 0 Depth referenced to the tool tip 1 Depth referenced to the cylindrical part of the tool TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 413
142. FINISHING FEED RATE Q368 0 2 ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q369 0 1 ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR Q338 5 INFEED FOR FINISHING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q351 1 CLIMB OR UP CUT Q370 1 TOOL PATH OVERLAP 9 X 50 RO FMAX 10 Y 50 RO FMAX M3 M99 432 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle 256 17 3 17 3 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle 256 Cycle run Use Cycle 256 to machine a rectangular stud If a dimension of the workpiece blank is greater than the maximum possible stepover then the TNC performs multiple stepovers until the finished dimension has been machined 1 The tool moves from the cycle starting position stud center in the negative X direction to the starting position for stud machining The starting position is to the left of the unmachined stud and is offset by the set up clearance tool radius 2 Ifthe tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 3 The tool then moves on a straight line tangentially to the stud contour and machines one revolution 4 lf the finished dimension cannot be machined with one revolution the TNC performs a stepover with the current factor and machines another revolution The TNC takes the dimensions of the workpiece blank the finished dimension and the permitted
143. HAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Overview of special functions 10 1 Program defaults menu ROEN gt Select the program defaults menu ESI pE DEFAULTS a Gl Programming x Function Soft key Description E e Define workpiece blank E page 85 p eo mna FORM a aye l Select datum table EA page 450 5 TABLE JE i ERE CARRERE RRR TR a Ex T Functions for contour and point machining menu CONTOUR gt Select the menu for functions for contour and gt Ler POINT E ate Progiemang 13 28 MACHINING point machining rrr 2 r 1 BLK FORM Z K 0 Z J Function Softkey Description ao i F Define regular machining RUTEN 378 fay ea pattern DEF ae f Select the point file with 390 ates machining positions PATTERN aH a k Ted Tod nee os Soe TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 263 Programming Special functions 10 1 Overview of special functions Menu of various conversational functions 3 Too 4 e 8 9 10 12 13 END TERET 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 L CALL 2 Z 2000 Z 250 RO FMAX M3 X 20 RO FMAX V 20 RO FMAX 2 5 RO FMAX ma X 5 R F700 95 Re 95 Re 5 0 G PGM 2 128 MM FUNCTION FILE E Program run i Programing Programming 13 42 Ted TRANSFORM STRING
144. HEIDENHAIN HEIDENHAIN vanua operation Be xogranming Jeg TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 a J J gt a o ES roon 3 NC Software Ze ajla gt cer om SS Se we Lah k Q wB B Bws w Ba we ext 771841 02 C margoa L A BErvpTTng gt naonmeana English en 5 2014 Controls of the TNC Controls of the TNC Keys on visual display unit Key Function O Select split screen layout O Toggle the display between machining and programming modes Soft keys for selecting functions on screen JE E Shifting between soft key rows Machine operating modes Key Function a Manual operation a Electronic handwheel EY Positioning with manual data input EY Program run single block 3 Program run full sequence Programming modes Key Function Programming Test run Program file management TNC functions Key Function Select or delete programs and files external data transfer Define program call select datum CALL and point tables Key Function con Select MOD functions Fae Display help text for NC error messages call TNCguide aa Display all current error messages eae Show calculator Navigation keys Key Function Move highlight Go directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed Feed r
145. HPRMAN TXT Unless you define a specific path in the machine parameter fn16DefaultPath the TNC will store the TCHPRMAN TXT file in the main directory TNC When you press the WRITE LOG TO FILE soft key the TCHPRMAN TXT file must not be active in the Programming mode of operation The TNC will otherwise display an error message The TNC stores the measured data in the TCHPRMAN TXT file only If you execute several touch probe cycles in succession and want to store the resulting measured data you must make a backup of the contents stored in TCHPRMAN TXT between the individual cycles by copying or renaming the file Format and content of the TCHPRMAN TXT file are preset by the machine tool builder TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 297 Manual operation and setup 11 5 Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table Use this function if you want to save measured values in the workpiece coordinate system If you want to save measured values in the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 299 With the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key the TNC can write the values measured during a touch probe cycle in a datum table gt Select any probe function gt Enter the
146. INFO soft key The TNC opens a window with internal information about the error gt To exit Details press the INTERNAL INFO soft key again 132 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Error messages 4 6 Clearing errors Clearing errors outside of the error window gt Clear the errors messages in the header Press the CE key gt In some situations such as during editing the CE key cannot be used to clear the errors since the key is reserved for other functions Deleting errors gt Open the error window gt Clear individual errors Position the highlight on the error message and press the DELETE soft key nau gt Delete all error messages Press the DELETE ALL ALL soft key If the cause of the error has not been removed the error message cannot be deleted In this case the error message remains in the window Error log The TNC stores errors and important events e g system startup in an error log The capacity of the error log is limited If the log is full the TNC uses a second file If this is also full the first error log is deleted and written to again and so on To view the error history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE gt Open the error window Te gt Press the LOG FILES soft key a gt Open the error log file Press the ERROR LOG soft key eer If you need the previous log file Press the FILE PREVIOUS FILE soft key GEE gt If
147. ION If then conditions jumps 198 JUMP Other functions Pre 202 FUNCTION Entering formulas in the part 232 FORMULA program The TNC shows the soft keys Q QL and QR when you are defining or assigning a Q parameter First press one of these soft keys to select the desired type of parameter and then enter the parameter number If you have a USB keyboard connected you can press the O key to open the dialog for entering a formula 192 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Part families Q parameters in place of numerical values 8 2 8 2 Part families Q parameters in place of numerical values Application The Q parameter function FN 0 ASSIGN assigns numerical values to Q parameters This enables you to use variables in the program instead of fixed numerical values Example NC blocks You need write only one program for a whole family of parts entering the characteristic dimensions as Q parameters To program a particular part you then assign the appropriate values to the individual O parameters Example Cylinder with Q parameters Cylinder radius R Q1 Cylinder height H Q2 Cylinder Z1 Q1 30 Q2 10 Cylinder Z2 Q1 10 Q2 50 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 193 Programming O Parameters 8 3 Describing contours with mathematical functions 8 3 Describing contours with mathematical functions Appl
148. L TABLE or the datum table with status M selected in the Program Run Single Block or Program Run Full Sequence operating mode TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 273 Programming Special functions 10 4 Definition of a datum shift TRANS DATUM RESET Use the TRANS DATUM RESET function to cancel a datum shift How NC block you previously defined the datum is irrelevant Proceed as follows for 13 TRANS DATUM RESET the definition SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions aaa gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions Select transformations TRANSFORM ae gt Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM DATUM RESET gt Press the RESET DATUM SHIFT soft key DATUM SHIFT v 274 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Creating Text Files 10 5 10 5 Creating Text Files Application You can use the TNC s text editor to write and edit texts Typical applications Recording test results Documenting working procedures Creating formula collections Text files are type A files ASCII files If you want to edit other types of files you must first convert them into type A files Opening and exiting text files gt Select the Programming mode of operation gt Call the file manager Press the PGM MGT key gt Display type A files Press the SELECT TYPE and then the SHOW A soft keys gt Se
149. L information License information Machine times ierogranming TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 347 MOD functions 14 2 Graphic settings 14 2 Graphic settings With the MOD function Graphic settings you can select the model type and model quality for the Test Run mode of operation Select the graphic settings In the MOD menu select the Graphic settings group Select the model type Select the model quality Press the Apply soft key Press the OK soft key You have the following simulation parameters for the graphic settings vvv vV V Model type Choice Properties Application Displayed symbol 3 D Very true to detail Milling with undercuts heavy time and processor E consumption 2 5D Fast Milling without undercuts my No model Very fast Line graphics x Model quality Choice Properties Displayed symbol Very high High data transfer rate exact depiction of tool geometry DDE depiction of block end points and block numbers possible High High data transfer rate exact depiction of tool geometry D000 Medium Medium data transfer rate approximation of tool geometry 2800 Low Low data transfer rate coarse approximation of tool geometry B000 348 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 14 3 Machine settings External access The machine tool builder can configure the external access options Refer to your machine manu
150. Length is converted in inch programs FEED Feed rate mm min or 0 1 inch min IFEED Feed rate mm min or inch min FLOAT Floating point number BOOL Logical value INDEX Index TSTAMP Fixed format for date and time Default value Default value for the fields in this column Width Width of the column number of characters Primary key First table column Language Language sensitive dialogs sensitive column name 266 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Freely definable tables 10 2 You can use a connected mouse or the TNC keyboard to navigate in the form Navigation using the TNC keyboard gt Press the navigation keys to go to the input fields Use the arrow keys to navigate within an input field To open pop down menus press the GOTO key In a table that already has lines you cannot change the table properties Name and Column type Once you have deleted all lines you can change these properties If required create a backup copy of the table beforehand In a field of the TSTAMP column type you can reset an invalid value if you press the CE key and then the ENT key Exiting the structure editor gt Press the OK soft key The TNC closes the editor form and applies the changes All changes are discarded by pressing the CANCEL soft key Switching between table and form view All tables with the file extension TAB can be opened in either list view
151. N PGM C210 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 40 Definition of workpiece blank 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z 3500 Call the tool for roughing finishing 4 Z 250 RO FMAX Retract the tool 5 CYCL DEF 256 RECTANGULAR STUD Define cycle for machining the contour outside Q218 90 FIRST SIDE LENGTH Q424 100 WORKPC BLANK SIDE 1 Q219 80 2ND SIDE LENGTH Q425 100 WORKPC BLANK SIDE 2 Q201 30 DEPTH Q367 0 STUD POSITION Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q207 250 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q385 750 FINISHING FEED RATE Q368 0 ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q369 0 1 ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR Q338 5 INFEED FOR FINISHING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 20 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q351 1 CLIMB OR UP CUT Q370 1 TOOL PATH OVERLAP 6 X 50 RO Outside machining 7 Y 50 RO M3 M99 Call cycle for machining the contour outside 8 CYCL DEF 252 RECTANGULAR POCKET Define RECTANGULAR POCKET cycle Q215 0 MACHINING OPERATION Q218 50 FIRST SIDE LENGTH Q219 50 32ND SIDE LENGTH 444 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming Examples 17 5 Cycle call TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 445 Cycles Coordinate Transformations 18 1 Fundamentals 18 1 Fundamentals Overview Once a contour has been programmed you can position it on the workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the use of coordinate transformations T
152. NCguide context sensitive help system 4 7 Navigating in the TNCguide It s easiest to use the mouse to navigate in the TNCguide A table of contents appears on the left side of the screen By clicking the rightward pointing triangle you open subordinate sections and by clicking the respective entry you open the individual pages It is operated in the same manner as the Windows Explorer Linked text positions cross references are shown underlined and in blue Clicking the link opens the associated page Of course you can also operate the TNCguide through keys and soft keys The following table contains an overview of the corresponding key functions Function Soft key If the table of contents at left is active Select the entry above it or below it m If the text window at right is active Move the page downward or upward if texts or graphics are not shown completely E m f the table of contents at left is active Open up the table of contents m f the text window at right is active No function E m f the table of contents at left is active Close the table of contents m f the text window at right is active No function o m f the table of contents at left is active Use the cursor key to show the selected page m f the text window at right is active If the cursor is on a link jump to the linked page m f the table of contents at left is active Switch the tab between the display of the ta
153. NDOW soft key The standard file manager window is displayed again TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 117 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager The TNC in a network anuar operation Programing To connect the Ethernet card to your network see Ethernet interface page 361 The TNC logs error messages during network operation see Ethernet interface page 361 If the TNC is connected to a network the directory window wi oa z displays additional drives see figure All the functions described above selecting a drive copying files etc also apply to network drives provided that you have been granted the corresponding rights Connecting and disconnecting a network drive gt To select the program management Press the PGM MGT key If necessary press the WINDOW soft key to set up the screen as it is shown at the upper right gt To select the network settings Press the NETWORK soft key Second soft key row gt To manage the network drives Press the DEFINE NETWORK CONNECTN soft key In a window the TNC shows the network drives available for access The soft keys described below are used to define the connection for each drive Function Soft key Establish the network connection If the Connect connection is active the TNC marks the Mount column Disconnect the network connection Unmou
154. PC in the following manner gt Select lt Extras gt lt TNCserver gt TNCremo is now in server mode It can receive data from the TNC and send data to the TNC gt On the TNC select the functions for file management using the PGM MGT keysee Data transfer to from an external data medium page 116 and transfer the desired files End TNCremo Select lt File gt lt Exit gt Refer also to the TNCremo context sensitive help texts where all of the functions are explained in more detail The help texts must be called with the F1 key 360 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Ethernet interface 14 11 14 11 Ethernet interface Introduction The TNC is shipped with a standard Ethernet card to connect the control as a client in your network The TNC transmits data via the Ethernet card with m the smb protocol Server Message Block for Windows operating systems or m the TCP IP protocol family Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol and with support from the NFS Network File System Connection options You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network 1 1 through the RJ45 connection X26 100BaseTX or 10BaseT or E gt x lt E directly to a PC The connection is metallically isolated from the control electronics For a 100BaseTX or 10BaseT connection you need a Twisted Pair TNC cable to connect the TNC to your network PC The maximum cable length between TNC
155. Preassigned O parameters Coordinates after probing during program run The parameters 0115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement with the 3 D touch probe The coordinates refer to the datum point that is active in the Manual Operation mode The length of the stylus and the radius of the ball tip are not compensated in these coordinates Coordinate axis Parameter value X axis Q115 Y axis Q116 Z axis Q117 4th Axis Q118 Machine dependent V axis Q119 Machine dependent Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 Deviation of actual from nominal value Parameter value Tool length Q115 Tool radius Q116 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 8 12 249 Programming Miscellaneous functions 9 1 Entering miscellaneous functions M 9 1 Entering miscellaneous functions M Fundamentals With the TNC s miscellaneous functions also called M functions you can affect m the program run e g a program interruption m the machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off m the path behavior of the tool 7 The machine tool builder may add some M functions that are not described in this User s Manual Refer to ee your machine manual Refer to your machine manual You can enter up to four M functions at the end of
156. Q370 The TNC always calculates a constant stepover Input Q351 1 range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece blank side length 2 0425 Length of the stud blank parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Stud position 0367 Position of the stud in ee xX reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0 Tool position stud center 1 Tool position left corner below 2 Tool position right corner below 3 Tool position right corner top 4 Tool position left top corner top 0203 gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Input range O to 99999 999 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Q200 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 435 P Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud milling 436 17 3 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle 256 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for finishing 0385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively F
157. QL UPDATEQ1 HANDLE Q5 INDEX5 Row number is transferred in a Q parameter 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE 40 SQL INSERTQ1 HANDLE Q5 230 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Accessing tables with SQL commands 38 9 SOL COMMIT SQL COMMIT transfers all rows in the result set back to the table A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE is canceled The handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses its validity gt Parameter no for result O parameter in which COMMIT the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or equal entries in columns requiring unique entries gt Database SQL access ID Q parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT SQL ROLLBACK How SQL ROLLBACK is executed depends on whether INDEX is programmed m f INDEX is not programmed The result set is not written back to the table any changes insertions are discarded The transaction is closed and the handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses its validity Typical application Ending a transaction solely containing read accesses f INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains All other rows are deleted from the result set The t
158. QL command text with the following elements m SELECT keyword Name of the SOL command names of the table columns to be transferred Separate column names with a comma see examples Q parameters must be bound to all columns entered here FROM table name Synonym or path and file name of this table The synonym is entered directly the path name and table name are entered in single quotation marks see examples of the SOL command names of the table columns to be transferred separate several columns by a comma see examples Q parameters must be bound to all columns entered here TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Select all table rows 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE Selection of table rows with the WHERE function 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE WHERE MEAS_NO lt 20 Selection of table rows with the WHERE function and O parameters 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE WHERE MEAS_NO Q11 Table name defined with path and file name 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM V TABLE TAB_EXAMPLE WHERE MEAS_NO lt 20 227 Programming Q Parameters 8 9 Accessing tables with SOL commands
159. REVIOUS FILE Up down one line aae lt A lt 77 Return to main menu Informational texts After a faulty operation such as pressing a key without function or entering a value outside of the valid range the TNC displays a green text in the header informing you that the operation was not correct The TNC clears this informational text upon the next valid Input Saving service files If necessary you can save the Current status of the TNC and make it available to a service technician for evaluation A group of service files is saved error and keystroke logs as well as other files that contain information about the current status of the machine and the machining operation If you repeat the Save service files function with the same file name the previously saved group of service data files is overwritten To avoid this use another file name when you repeat the function Saving service files gt Open the error window ace gt Press the LOG FILES soft key SAVE gt Press the Save service files soft key The TNC SERVICE FILES opens a pop up window in which you can enter a name for the service file gt Save the service files Press the OK soft key TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 135 Programming Programming aids 4 6 Error messages Calling the TNCguide help system You can call the TNC s help system via soft key Immediately t
160. RINGQS11 CH_NC Assign string parameter for key 15 DECLARE STRINGQS12 CFGGEOCYCLE Assign string parameter for entity 16 DECLARE STRINGQS13 POCKETOVERLAP Assign string parameter for parameter name 17 Q50 CFGREAD KEY_QS11 TAG_QS12 ATR_QS13 Read out machine parameter 246 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Preassigned Q parameters 8 12 8 12 Preassigned O parameters The Q parameters Q100 to Q199 are assigned values by the TNC The following types of information are assigned to Q parameters m Values from the PLC Tool and spindle data Data on operating status Results of measurements from touch probe cycles etc The TNC saves the values for the preassigned Q parameters Q108 Q114 and Q115 to Q117 in the unit of measure used by the active program Do not use preassigned Q parameters or QS parameters between Q100 and Q199 QS100 and QS199 as calculation parameters in NC programs Otherwise you might receive undesired results Values from the PLC Q100 to 0107 The TNC uses the parameters Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from the PLC to an NC program Active tool radius 0108 The active value of the tool radius is assigned to 0108 Q108 is calculated from m Tool radius R tool table or TOOL DEF block Delta value DR from the tool table m Delta value DR from the TOOL CALL block gt The TNC remembers the current tool radius even if the power is interrupted
161. RNER RADIUS ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE INFEED FOR FINISHING 9 L X 0 Y 0 RO FMAX M3 M99 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 FACE MILLING Cycle 233 17 4 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt 1st limit O347 Select the workpiece side on which the level surface is limited by a side wall Depending on the position of the side wall the TNC limits the machining of the level surface to the respective coordinate of the starting point or to the side length Input 0 No limit Input 1 Limit in the negative reference axis Input 1 Limit in the positive reference axis Input 2 Limit in the negative minor axis Input 2 Limit in the positive minor axis gt 2nd limit 0348 See parameter 1st limit Q347 gt 3rd limit 0349 See parameter 1st limit Q347 gt Finishing allowance for side 0368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Infeed for finishing Q338 incremental Infeed per cut Q338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range O to 99999 9999 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 443 Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud milling 17 5 Programming Examples 17 5 Programming Examples Example Milling pockets studs 40 30 20 0 BEGIN
162. SEANEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEREEEE EEEE EEEE 123 Functions for editing of the COMMENt cccccccccccccccccsteceececsseeeececseeeeeescsseeeeeecsaeeeeeseseseeesssteeeeesees 123 SErUCTUNiG T E E ces ee een san ca wag tae E 124 Definition and applicatl Ons siseringi add eb EEE aE iaaa 124 Displaying the program structure window Changing the active WINKOW 0 cccceesscecesessteeeeeetseeeees 124 Inserting a structuring block in the program WINCOW c ecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettstesieaeeees 124 Selecting blocks in the program structure WINGOW ccccccccccccececcsseceeeeceseeeeeeccsaeeeeescsaeeseeessaeeeseeensaes 124 Gaal cul eat reise 25 ca cece sass cette vs bs ces ae eo ence ong vp cece Saeed nbs cane gus ea cee ete ve be pape se bb Sonoe eared eee eS 125 DEI E T E E O A A slagdeduessspbendaabscences 125 Programming e e a a E ianreesesrccacest 128 Generate do not generate graphics during PrOGrFAMIMING ccccccecsceececsseeeecescseeeeesssaeeeeesssaeeeeereaaas 128 Generating a graphic for an existing prograM s ss sssseeiistettirttttttttt rttr trt EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE 128 Block number display ON OFF ieissar siaiieeieeidennn ineeiieo ei EEA ENEE EEA E EEEE RE ERTER 129 Erasing the graphiG isien ea aaae aa POE a E E I AE E A ERNE 129 Showing gna INES eeure AN a aaa E A AEA TE 129 Magnification or reduction Of details ccceccccccseessececeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeee
163. SINGLE Halt test run soft key only appears once you have started the test run STOP E You can interrupt the test run and continue it again at any point even within a fixed cycle In order to continue the test the following actions must not be performed m Selecting another block with the arrow keys or the GOTO key Making changes to the program m Selecting a new program TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 13 4 331 Test run and program run 13 5 Program run 13 5 Program run Application In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program stop In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you must start each block separately by pressing the machine START button The following TNC functions are available in the program run modes of operation Interrupt program run Starting the program run from a certain block Optional block skip Editing the tool table TOOL T Checking and changing O parameters Superimposing handwheel positioning Functions for graphic simulation Additional status display E program run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM 113 BLK FORM O 1 Z X 0 Yeo 2 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Ze TOOL CALL 4 Z 2000 L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING 7 GYGL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 40 CYCL
164. SUMC cr lt c ccrsecrcascneecesccexsscceesszaszesceecanacsedscetsssccsttnaneersasceeainetesasuesenstestesseestiiiess 353 Application manner e E A E E E E 353 14 7 Displaying operating times e reei eeaeee ee E aE E a e Ae a Ee aE ae AAEE e aa 353 Applicatio Misrin aa a A Xa ent ERE AE ig acne TEA ER Aaa 353 EERE EA E a A A sacs tentecenee rest oreds reraesects turers eecrers coer tteceriesecee 354 Applicat Missina aaa a e EREE E A EEA 354 14 9 Entering the code mumberiic cccessicccvecs ssae ence ccvess ceeds ea aE scat AA e A E aar aa e EAEE svmananeecseesteseveees 354 Applications a ia a a aa E aE aa Aaaa ae 354 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 31 Contents 32 14 10Setting up data interfacese sis siccccccc catecesssceeeescceceseecenscscehens ere sotessaatcerstcessessetesceeecuabiessoceevensasysnetereasicns 355 Serial interfaces on the TNC 128 is cchccatsassccsactaidibcociaad bdesavaicesanetataascassonddaceneeaddoas saeuensusaneaatesgeeneealaneess 355 APICAL OM szacaneacsdtttanmhdaseneeansetaediceunadtatdeed REA E EERE LEARE EE AEAEE 355 Setting the RS 232 interface cccccccccecscccccsesssececcseseeeeceeeseeeecceesseeeeceeeseeeeceeseeeeseseseeeseeeeseeeeeeesaas 355 Setting the BAUD RATE baudRate ccccccccccceccccsceccssececcsseecsseeeecsseecsseeeecsseeeesseeecsaeeecseescsseeeseaaes 355 Setting the Protocol Protocol sssrirsisiniserrrsrsiidsnnnan nids EENEN ENNA SAAANA AEEA A RANEA ERENS AE
165. T End the dialog immediately END Abort dialog discard entries DEL Soft keys on the screen with which you select a functions appropriate to the active state Further information on this topic m Writing and editing programs see Editing a program page 90 m Overview of keys see Controls of the TNC page 2 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 1 3 45 First Steps with the TNC 128 1 3 Programming the first part Creating a new program file management gt Press the PGM MGT key The TNC opens the oro a er file manager The file management of the TNC is aane arranged much like the file management on a PC Ekon aaaea with the Windows Explorer The file management EER Ej EE enables you to manipulate data on the internal Eao a oa memory of the TNC wit i ee BH ee gt Use the arrow keys to select the folder in which rican aed Ra P1 h 6675 RADB n 400 Rastplatte 4027 you want to open the new file 10 esi 08 51 09 Senulter n 3477 26 07 2012 09 59 02 02 05 2011 10 15 24 3 gt Press the GOTO key The TNC opens a keyboard in ren Se tear ania ee the pop up window Rees a gt Enter any desired file name with the extension H t 1 CS e 2 le raise iiaa oe gt Confirm with the ENT key The control asks you for the unit of measurement for the new program gt Select the un
166. TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 381 Cycle fundamentals 15 4 PATTERN DEF pattern definition Defining individual frames NC blocks If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not 10 Z 100 RO FMAX equal to 0 then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the 11 PATTERN DEF FRAME1 machining cycle X 25 Y 33 5 DX 8 DY 10 NUMX5 NUMY4 ROT 0 ROTX 0 ROTY 0 Z The Rotary pos ref ax and Rotary pos minor 0 ax parameters are added to a previously performed rotated position of the entire pattern ooo Os FRAME gt Starting point in X absolute Coordinate of the Pai starting point of the frame in the X axis gt Starting point in Y absolute Coordinate of the pore ae starting point of the frame in the Y axis E209 gt Spacing of machining positions X incremental Distance between the machining positions in the X direction You can enter a positive or negative value gt Spacing of machining positions Y incremental Distance between the machining positions in the Y direction You can enter a positive or negative value gt Number of columns Total number of columns in the pattern gt Number of lines Total number of rows in the pattern gt Rot position of entire pattern absolute Angle of rotation by which the entire pattern is rotated around the entered starting point Reference axis Reference axis
167. TT Cycle 480 ae 481 ams a Measuring the tool length Cycle 481 as 483 a Measuring the tool radius Cycle 482 ee 485 a Measuring the tool length and radius Cycle 483 487 The measuring cycles can be used only when the central tool file TOOL T is active Before working with the measuring cycles you must first enter all the required data into the central tool file and call the tool to be measured with TOOL CALL Setting machine parameters Before you start working with the measuring cycles check all machine parameters defined in ProbeSettings gt CfgTT and CfgTTRoundStylus The TNC uses the feed rate for probing defined in probingFeed when measuring a tool at standstill When measuring a rotating tool the TNC automatically calculates the spindle speed and feed rate for probing The spindle speed is calculated as follows n maxPeriphSpeedMeas r 0 0063 where n Spindle speed rom maxPeriphSpeedMeas Maximum permissible cutting speed in m min ir Active tool radius in mm The feed rate for probing is calculated from v measuring tolerance n with v Feed rate for probing in mm min Measuring tolerance Measuring tolerance mm depending on maxPeriphSpeedMeas n Shaft speed rpm TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 477 Touch probe cycles 20 4 Fundamentals probingFeedCalc determines the calculation of the probing feed rate probingFeedCalc Constan
168. The calibrating tool must be a precisely cylindrical part for example a cylinder pin The resulting calibration values are stored in the TNC memory and are accounted for during subsequent tool measurement Please note while programming The functioning of the calibration cycle is dependent on machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement Refer to your machine tool manual Before calibrating the touch probe you must enter the exact length and radius of the calibrating tool into the tool table TOOL T The position of the TT within the machine working space must be defined by setting the Machine Parameters centerPos gt 0 to 2 If you change the setting of any of the Machine Parameters centerPos gt 0 to 2 you must recalibrate Cycle parameters aso gt Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle A 5 axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from safetyDistStylus Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 17 NC blocks in new format 6 TOOL CALL 1 Z 7 TCH PROBE 480 CALIBRATE TT Q260 100 CLEARANCE HEIGHT 481 Touch probe cycles 20 6
169. This process may take several minutes Then the TNC will display the Power interrupted message in the screen header gt Press the CE key The TNC compiles the PLC program gt Switch on the control voltage The TNC checks operation of the emergency stop circuit and goes into the reference run mode gt Cross the reference points manually in the Ww displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START button If you have absolute linear and angle encoders on your machine there is no need for a reference run The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode Further information on this topic Traversing the reference marks see Switch on page 280 Operating modes see Programming page 65 44 Mi A s li TE g Brrooramino X 0 000 0 000 500 000 0 X Nm 0 Y Nm 15 10 Toucu preser F PROBE TABLE TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming the first part 1 3 Programming the first part Selecting the correct operating mode You can write programs only in Programming mode gt Press the Programming operating mode key The TNC switches to Programming mode Further information on this topic Operating modes see Programming page 65 The most important TNC keys Functions for conversational guidance Key Confirm entry and activate the next dialog ie prompt Ignore the dialog question
170. Touch probe cycles 20 4 Fundamentals 20 4 Fundamentals Overview When running touch probe cycles Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING must not be active HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The TNC and the machine tool must be set up by the machine tool builder for use of the TT touch probe Some cycles and functions may not be provided on your machine tool Refer to your machine manual The touch probe cycles are available only with the Touch Probe Functions software option option number 17 If you are using a HEIDENHAIN touch probe this option is available automatically In conjunction with the TNC s tool measurement cycles the tool touch probe enables you to measure tools automatically The compensation values for tool length and radius can be stored in the central tool file TOOL T and are accounted for at the end of the touch probe cycle The following types of tool measurement are provided m Tool measurement while the tool is at standstill m Tool measurement while the tool is rotating m Measurement of individual teeth 476 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Fundamentals 20 4 You can program the cycles for tool measurement in the Programming mode of operation using the Cycl Def key The following cycles are available Cycle New Page format Calibrating the
171. Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling the last infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when approaching the starting position and when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely to the material O389 1 the TNC moves the tool at the feed rate for milling Q207 Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Clearance to side 0357 incremental Safety clearance to the side of the workpiece when the tool approaches the first plunging depth and distance at which the stepover occurs if the machining strategy O389 0 or O389 2 is used Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 NC blocks 8 CYCL DEF 233 FACE MILLING Q215 0 Q389 2 Q350 1 Q218 120 Q219 80 Q227 0 Q386 6 Q369 0 2 Q202 3 Q370 1 Q207 500 Q385 500 Q253 750 Q357 2 Q200 2 Q204 50 Q347 0 Q348 0 Q349 0 Q220 0 Q368 0 Q338 0 MACHINING OPERATION MILLING STRATEGY MILLING DIRECTION 31ST SIDE LENGTH 2ND SIDE LENGTH STARTNG PNT 3RD AXIS END POINT 3RD AXIS ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR MAX PLUNGING DEPTH TOOL PATH OVERLAP FEED RATE FOR MILLING FINISHING FEED RATE F PRE POSITIONING CLEARANCE TO THE SIDE SET UP CLEARANCE 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE 31ST LIMIT 32ND LIMIT 33RD LIMIT CO
172. Update and Insert evaluate this binding 11SQL BIND Q881 assignment during data transfer between the result set and the NC TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_ NO program q 12SQL BIND Q882 An SQL BIND command without a table or column name cancels the TAB EXAMPLE MEAS X binding Binding remains effective at most until the end of the NC 13SQL BIND Q883 program or subprogram TAB EXAMPLE MEAS Y m You can program any number of bindings Read and 14SQL BIND Q884 write processes only take into account the columns TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z that were entered in the Select command SQL BIND must be programmed before Fetch Update or Insert commands are programmed 91 SQL BIND Q881 You can program a Select command without a 92 SQL BIND Q882 preceding Bind command If in the Select command you include columns for which no binding is programmed an error occurs 94 SQL BIND Q884 during read write processes program interrupt Cancel binding 93 SQL BIND Q883 aa gt Parameter no for result O parameter that is BIND bound assigned to the table column gt Database column name Enter the table name and column name separated by a Table name Synonym or path and file name of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and file name are entered in single quotation marks Column designation Designation of the table column as given in the configuration data 226 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conver
173. _PROBE Position at feed rate from FMAX m Input value FMAX_MACHINE Pre position at rapid traverse 472 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles 20 2 Executing touch probe cycles All touch probe cycles are DEF active This means that the TNC runs the cycle automatically as soon as the TNC executes the cycle definition in the program run Danger of collision When running touch probe cycles no cycles must be active for coordinate transformation Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycles 11 SCALING and 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Touch probe cycles with a number greater than 400 position the touch probe according to a positioning logic m f the current coordinate of the south pole of the stylus is less than the coordinate of the clearance height defined in the cycle the TNC retracts the touch probe in the probe axis to the clearance height and then positions it in the working plane to the first starting position m f the current coordinate of the stylus south pole is greater than the coordinate of the clearance height then the TNC first positions the touch probe to the first probe point in the working plane and then in the touch probe axis directly to the measuring height TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 473 Touch probe cycles 20 3 Touch probe table 20 3 Touch probe table General information Various
174. a DETAIL ii TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 325 Test run and program run 13 1 Graphics After a new workpiece detail magnification is selected the control forgets previously simulated machining operations The TNC then displays machined areas as unmachined areas If the workpiece blank cannot be further enlarged or reduced the TNC displays an error message in the graphics window To clear the error message reduce or enlarge the workpiece blank Repeating graphic simulation A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired To do so you can reset the graphic to the workpiece blank Function Soft key Show the unmachined workpiece blank RESET Tool display You can show the tools during the simulation Function Soft key Program Run Full Sequence Program Run Single Block Test Run TOOL iin X 326 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Graphics 13 1 Measurement of machining time Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes The timer counts and displays the time from program start to program end The timer stops whenever machining is interrupted of seo store Reset II ADD ECEE aS ICKE 00 02 20 a Test Run operating mode The timer displays the time that the TNC calculates for the duration of tool movements that
175. adapted by the machine manufacturer lt b Refer to your machine manual You can use this function to test programs whose kinematics does not match the active machine kinematics If your machine manufacturer saved different kinematic configurations in your machine you can activate one of these kinematics configurations with the MOD function When you select a kinematics model for the test run this does not affect machine kinematics Danger of collision When you switch the kinematics model for machine operation the TNC implements all of subsequent movements with modified kinematics Ensure that you have selected the correct kinematics in the test run for checking your workpiece 350 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 System settings 14 4 14 4 System settings Set the system time With the Set system time MOD function you can set the time zone data and time manually or with the aid of an NTP server synchronization To set the system time manually gt Inthe MOD menu select the System settings group gt Press the SET DATE TIME soft key gt Select your time zone in the Time zone area gt Press the Local NTP soft key in order to select the Set time manually entry If required change the datum and the time Press the OK soft key To set the system time with the aid of an NTP server In the MOD menu select the System settings group Press the SET DATE TIME soft key Select
176. adscccerscetiinatinccdalsaadencusaessssaasncnadiaiiuimsescada 463 TOUCH probe CY CIOS orisii ea ia E a aae a A a iae aa ia aaia aaa 469 Tabl s and QV CR VIC WS si sssrinin aaan aaaea a aaaea NEEE iaa eiaa 489 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 11 Contents 12 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 i We He 3 71 0 Beceem ee eeeere ee eerecee Pee eee T ERN 44 WZ Machine Switch Omisi ces E 44 Acknowledging the power interruption and moving to the reference POINtS cece ceeeeseseeeeeeeees 44 1 3 Programming the finst particcccccceccccrecesc cece coco eee ee ee ene eae nee nee Seance ENAERE R eannan 45 Selecting the correct operating MOUS scsccsisiccesessasgesanawasdanceasendas dscatan nos eanenen gascachendangssasauadsaseeussacucossaddsess 45 The most IMportant TNG KEYS ecceri eiiean iieii E iie EE AEE EEEE Eii ESEE 45 Creating a new program file MANAGEMENL cccccccccecsssececeecseeeeeecesaeeeseecsseeeeeeessseeesesssaeeseeseseeeeesenaas 46 Defining a Workpiece Bla kscsiicis ind aceinadssanniansesidasacdastudbeinads aahiaauesaualasgasdaandinatsqidanietsadelinnetabtianesatahins 47 PROGMAMIN AVOUT cer es ces ancecedevesi iniaiaiai ia ideea tilema eiae Ea Aa a ea EEn aaah AEE E DEER 48 Programming a simple ContoUN srein eia a a a Tia ERAN 49 Creating a cycle Progi aM iersinii eranen SAA Eii AEAEE SAA EEA iaiia 51 1 4 gt Graphically testing the fi
177. aeebi idea tatseladgemstiebadaebiniae ss 106 Deleting amp CIE CORY sssrinin bamenttisnwanag ceeannsebieendenteineatiaaaigesetunnenmetht thazeneiaddscaeedenndsenegtanedaangeratdaccieatn 106 TAGGING TGS a AEO E E end tiaanddbteldgaranuatadaaenesneneaeonns 107 Renaming a Til se Ga tia date cid EEE AEE AE AEAEE 108 OMIM TOS E cet tey th aseaice dane teeaeeaes A taltoe atten tans Mereemees stuart danaueshc E N 108 Additional HUNG COINS ese oe toate rasa gg ec eeeenew E E N eee 109 Additional tools for management of external file tyD S ccc ccccccccecssneeeeeesseeeeeescaeeeeessaaeeeeeeesaees 110 Data transfer to from an external data MECIUM ccccceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeceaeeecceeesetieeesteeeeeeeeees 116 The TNC iMa MEWO K issnin esnean annA E E EAE AA a E AAE 118 USB devices On the TNC niressiisenraieoni nn aa a EE NED stn Ea 119 16 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 Screen Keyboard ae E A eee AA A aad Se ene oe ee ees at tee Core eee ee 122 Enter the text with the screen keyboOard c ccccccecceceeeeteceeecnecaeeeeeeeeeeseececscecesaeeeeeseeeeeeeteessesiesaeess 122 PAGING COMMENTS o2eeer oes a os tres cater c se cone cece s rece tant sstcns ine te cceat cov sonsbsees ter seittn sevee tines aE 123 Application a a a ERE AEE EE a EE aa AA Raad 123 Add COMMENMS ccecceeceeee eee ee cee ee cece eae cence APAE EEEEEEEEEEEREEEANEEEEEEEEEEERE
178. ak detection the TNC will lock the tool status L in TOOL T gt Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from safetyDistStylus Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Cutter measurement O No 1 Yes Choose whether the control is also to measure the individual teeth maximum of 20 teeth 488 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tables and overviews 21 1 Machine specific user parameters 21 1 Machine specific user parameters Application The parameter values are entered in the configuration editor To enable you to set machine specific functions your machine tool builder can define which machine parameters are available as user parameters Furthermore your machine tool builder can integrate additional machine parameters which are not described in the following into the TNC Refer to your machine manual The machine parameters are grouped as parameter objects in a tree structure in the configuration editor Each parameter object has a name e g CfgDisplayLanguage that gives information about the parameters it contains A p
179. al Refer 4 0 your machine manual With the MOD function External access you can grant or restrict access to the TNC If you have restricted the external access it is no longer possible to connect to the TNC and exchange data via a network or a serial connection e g with the TNCremo data transfer software Restricting external access In the MOD menu select the Machine settings group Select the External access menu Set the EXTERNAL ACCESS ON OFF soft key to OFF Press the OK soft key v v v v Tool usage file The tool usage test function must be enabled by your machine manufacturer Refer to your machine Er manual Refer to your machine manual With the MOD function Tool usage file you can select whether the TNC never once or always uses a tool usage file To generate a tool usage file gt Inthe MOD menu select the Machine settings group gt Select the Tool usage file menu gt Select the desired setting for the Program Run Full Sequence Single Block and Test Run operating modes gt Press the APPLY soft key gt Press the OK soft key TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Machine settings 14 3 anual operation oe BJTest run G Manual operation ta Bse 000 0 X Nm 0 Y Nm S1 07 24 m RA GON a o cancet 349 MOD functions 14 3 Machine settings Select kinematics T The Select Kinematics function must be enabled and
180. al HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Additional functions 8 8 207 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional functions The following functions allow you to include the following additional information in the protocol log file Keyword Function CALL_PATH Indicates the path for the NC program where you will find the FN16 function Example Measuring program S CALL_PATH M_CLOSE Closes the file to which you are writing with FN16 Example M_CLOSE M_APPEND Upon renewed output appends the log to the existing log Example M_APPEND L_ENGLISH Outputs text only for English conversational language L_GERMAN Outputs text only for German conversational language L_CZECH Outputs text only for Czech conversational language L_FRENCH Outputs text only for French conversational language L_ITALIAN Outputs text only for Italian conversational language L_SPANISH Outputs text only for Spanish conversational language L_SWEDISH Outputs text only for Swedish conversational language L_DANISH Outputs text only for Danish conversational language L_FINNISH Outputs text only for Finnish conversational language L_DUTCH Outputs text only for Dutch conversational language L_POLISH Outputs text only for Polish conversational language L_PORTUGUE Outputs text only for Portuguese conversational language L_HUNGARIA Outputs text only for Hungarian conversational language
181. al Programming 5 2014 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions 11 7 software option 17 11 7 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Overview The following soft key functions are available for setting the datum on an aligned workpiece Soft key Function Page Datum setting in any axis with 305 POS Setting a circle center as datum 306 7 Center line as datum 308 cL ae Setting the center line as datum HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used Datum setting in any axis PROBING gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING Pos e POS soft key gt Move the touch probe to a position near the touch point gt Use the soft keys to select the probe axis and Z direction in which you want to set the datum such as Z in direction Z y gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button gt Datum Enter the nominal coordinate and confirm your entry with the Set datum soft key see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 298 gt To terminate the probe function press the END soft key TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 305 Manual operation and setup 11 7 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Circle center as datum With
182. all programs stored in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for Q1200 to Q1399 OEM cycles and are globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory This may require coordination with the machine manufacturer or supplier Parameters that are primarily used for Q1400 to Q1499 call active OEM cycles globally effective for all programs that are stored in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for Q1500 to Q1599 Def active OEM cycles globally effective for all programs that are stored in the TNC memory 190 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Principle and overview of functions 8 1 Meaning Range Freely applicable parameters globally Q1600 to Q1999 effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory Freely usable QL parameters only QLO to QL499 effective locally within a program Freely usable QR parameters that are QRO to QR499 nonvolatile i e they remain in effect even after a power interruption QS parameters the S stands for string are also available on the TNC and enable you to process texts In principle the same ranges are available for QS parameters as for Q parameters see table above Note that for the QS parameters the QS100 to QS199 range is reserved for internal texts Local parameters OL are only effective within the respective program and are not applied as part of program calls or macros Programming n
183. an enter the spindle speed S feed rate F and the miscellaneous functions M with soft keys The miscellaneous functions are described in page 252 The machine tool builder determines which miscellaneous functions M are available on your Er control and what effects they have Entering values Spindle speed S miscellaneous function M s gt Enter the spindle speed Press the S soft key SPINDLE SPEED S gt Enter 1000 spindle speed and confirm your entry Ww with the machine START button The spindle speed S with the entered rpm is started with a miscellaneous function M Proceed in the same way to enter a miscellaneous function M Feed rate F After entering a feed rate F you must confirm your entry with the ENT key instead of the machine START button The following is valid for feed rate F If you enter F 0 then the lowest feed rate from the machine parameter manualFeed is effective m lf the feed rate entered exceeds the value defined in the machine parameter maxFeed then the parameter value is effective m Fis not lost during a power interruption 284 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M 11 3 Adjusting spindle speed and feed rate With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed rate F from 0 to 150 of the set value T The override knob for spindle speed is only functional on machines wit
184. and active M functions Axis is clamped Axis can be moved with the handwheel No active program gt TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 67 Introduction 2 4 Status displays Icon Meaning Program run has started I ER Program run is stopped tol x Program run is being aborted Additional status displays The additional status displays contain detailed information on the program run They can be called in all operating modes except for the Programming mode of operation To switch on the additional status display G gt Call the soft key row for screen layout display In the right half of the screen the TNC shows the OVERVIEW status form gt Select the screen layout with additional status STATUS To select an additional status display gt gt Switch the soft key rows until the STATUS soft keys appear ars gt Either select the additional status display directly Pos by soft key e g positions and coordinates or gt use the switch over soft keys to select the desired view The available status displays described below can be selected either directly by soft key or with the switch over soft keys Please note that some of the status information described below is not available unless the associated software option is enabled on your TNC 68 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Overvi
185. and currently have no function Configuring the firewall Make your firewall settings as follows gt Use the mouse to open the task bar at the bottom edge of the screen see Window Manager page 74 gt Press the green HEIDENHAIN button to open the JH menu gt Select the Settings menu item gt Select the Firewall menu item HEIDENHAIN recommends activating the firewall with the prepared default settings gt Set the Active option to switch on the firewall gt Press the Set standard values button to activate the default settings recommended by HEIDENHAIN gt Close the dialog with OK TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 14 12 367 MOD functions 14 12 Firewall Firewall settings Option Meaning Active Switching the firewall on or off Interface Selection of the ethO interface usually corresponds to X26 of the MC main computer eth1 corresponds to X116 This can be verified in the network settings on the Interfaces tab On main computer units with two Ethernet interfaces the DHCP server is active by default for the second non primary interface for the machine network With this setting it is not possible to activate the firewall for eth1 because the firewall and the DHCP server exclude themselves mutually Report other Firewall active with high safety level All inhibited services except for the SSH are blocked packets Inhibit ICMP If this opt
186. anization 84 SMUCIUTING esserisrissis sisiran 124 Program Call 466 Any desired program as SUDPFOGraM ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 179 AV AT K 0 gt 466 Program defaults 06 263 Program management See file manag iniinis 95 Programming tool movements 87 Program TUN icisirnririseirnnirini 332 EXECU G iisti iisipirinani 333 INC MrUpt cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 334 Mid program startup 339 Optional block skip 342 OVEIVIQW cccceccesseceeeeeeeeeeees 332 Resuming after interruption 335 Retraction 337 Program section repeat 177 Projection in three planes 321 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Q parameter EXPO oniiir 221 Transfer values to PLC 220 Transfer values to the PLC 221 O parameter programming 190 236 Additional functions 202 Angle functions 196 Calculation of circles 197 If then deciSions 00 198 Mathematical functions 194 Programming notes 191 237 238 239 241 243 Q parameters 190 236 CNEOKIN Geirinn 200 Local parameters OQL 190 Nonvolatile parameters OR 190 PreaSSIQNe d cccccccccceseeeees 247 Ro Radius compensation 164 ENte rinQ cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 165 Rapid traverse 146 Reading out machine parameters 244 REAMING ccc
187. ar 95 FOS aa E E E E E AEE E E E A E E E E E 95 Displaying externally generated files on the TNC ccccccccccccceccecssteceeescseceeeesaeeeeesssseeeeesesseeeeeseaaes 97 Data BackUp kerise a jonapaedanleacandsaeeaneseihuaansoa sh E A D EA EEEE 97 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 15 Contents 3 4 Working with the file mamage ticcccicccccvce secs ceccaleceececasseecs nnn Eer AANEEN eee eeasecreeeesshees cevssbucs eee eaccoestuesscones 98 DIFECLOMES encre n E ATENEA 98 Ba N E T E T E na ona eaten aa AE T E N E 98 Overview Functions of the file MANAGED cccecccccceseeceeecsseceeeecseeeeeescsseeeeeecsaeeeeesesseeesessssaeeeeeeenaes 99 Calling the Te MAM AGS ernen RE E T AENA 100 Selecting drives directories and fileS ssssssissseniiistettiittttttit ttt tr rtr EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EE EErEE 101 Creating a new GING CON Y sneis rnrn EEr S EEA TEES EA EAE EENE EDES A EAEE 102 SE ea E N E 102 Copying a singe flohen A EEEE EOR EAEE 102 Copying files into another directory s sssiiiseeeeiietttiitttttrrt ttt tr tAE EEEE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EE E 103 Copying a tabla ere 104 Poe E BE E a A E O E E A A 104 Choosing one of the last files SCIOCTEC oe ccccccccccccnececcecnseeeeceecaeeeeeecsaeeeeescaeeesessssaeeeeesssieeeeeeeesas 105 Deleting A Tiles ces scavirioniady Sates a aaaescuday ethaneniah aantsscnbnsenrbedau ges ssebas aduusoladgsuedstnbal
188. arameter object entity is marked with an E in the folder symbol in the tree structure Some machine parameters have a key name to identify them unambiguously The key name assigns the parameter to a group e g X for X axis The respective group folder bears the key name and is marked by a K in the folder symbol If you are in the configuration editor for the user parameters you can change the display of the existing parameters In the default setting the parameters are displayed with short explanatory texts To display the actual system names of the parameters press the key for the screen layout and then the SHOW SYSTEM NAME soft key Follow the same procedure to return to the standard display 490 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Machine specific user parameters Calling the configuration editor and changing parameters Select the Programming mode of operation Press the MOD key Enter the code number 123 Changing parameters Press the END soft key to exit the configuration editor Press the SAVE soft key to save changes The icon at the beginning of each line in the parameter tree shows additional information about this line The icons have the following meanings vvv vV V VK Branch exists but is closed E Branch is open Empty object cannot be opened Initialized machine parameter Uninitialized optional machine parameter ka Can be read but not edited
189. arameters 8 9 Accessing tables with SOL commands 8 9 Accessing tables with SQL commands Introduction Accessing of tables is programmed on the TNC with SOL commands in transactions A transaction consists of multiple SOL commands that guarantee an orderly execution of the table entries T Tables are configured by the machine manufacturer Names and designations required as parameters for E SQL commands are also specified The following terms are used m Table A table consists of x columns and y rows It is saved as a file in the File Manager of the TNC and is addressed with the path and file name table name Synonyms can also be used for addressing as an alternative to the path and file name Columns The number and names of the columns are specified when configuring the table In some SOL commands the column name is used for addressing Rows The number of rows is variable You can insert new rows There are no row numbers or other designators However you can select rows based on the contents of a column Rows can only be deleted in the table editor not by an NC program Cell The part of a column in a row Table entry Content of a cell Result set During a transaction the selected columns and rows are managed in the result set You can view the result set as a sort of intermediate memory which temporarily assumes the set of selected columns and rows Result set Synonym This term defines a name u
190. are executed at feed rate Dwell times are included in the calculation by the TNC The time calculated by the TNC can only conditionally be used for calculating the production time because the TNC does not account for the duration of machine dependent interruptions such as tool change Activating the stopwatch function gt gt Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the stopwatch functions appears gt Select the stopwatch functions STORE gt Select the desired function by soft key e g saving the displayed time Stopwatch functions Soft key Store displayed time STORE Display the sum of stored time ADD and displayed time Or Clear displayed time 00 00 88 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 327 Test run and program run 13 2 Showing the workpiece blank in the working space 13 2 Showing the workpiece blank in the working space Application In the Test Run operating mode you can graphically check the position of the workpiece blank or reference point in the machine s working space and activate work space monitoring Press the BLANK IN WORKSPACE soft key to activate this function You can activate or deactivate the function with the SW limit monitoring soft key 2nd soft key row A transparent cuboid represents the workpiece blank Its dimensions are shown in the BLK FORM table The TNC takes the dimensions from the workpiece blank definition of the selected program T
191. ate Spindle speed 100 100 O AWF Os 3 o TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Cycles subprograms and program section repeats A ey Key Function Define and call cycles DEF CALL Function Confirm entry and resume dialog Conclude block and exit entry Enter and call labels for CE SET CALL subprogramming and program Clear numerical entry or TNC error message section repeats pet Tool functions Key Function Define tool data in the program Call tool data CALL Special functions Key Function Show special functions Select the next tab in forms Up down one dialog box or button Entering and editing coordinate axes and numbers Key Function Select coordinate axes or enter them in a program Ra B Numbers B Decimal point Reverse algebraic sign P 1 Polar coordinate input Incremental values 2 Q parameter programming Q parameter status Save actual position or values from calculator ial Skip dialog questions delete words TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Abort dialog delete program section Controls of the TNC 4 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Fundamentals About this manual About this manual The symbols used in this manual are described below This symbol indicates that important information about t
192. ate Time Set the date and time m Language Language setting for the system dialogs During startup the TNC overwrites this setting with the language setting of the machine parameter CfgLanguage Network Network setting Reset WM Conf Restore basic settings of the Windows Manager May also reset settings implemented by your machine manufacturer m Screensaver Settings for the screen saver several are available m Shares Configure network connections Firewall Configuring the Firewall see Firewall page 367 m Tools Only for authorized users The applications available under tools can be started directly by selecting the pertaining file type in the file management of the TNC see File manager Fundamentals page 95 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Window Manager enuan operation FY rrogramming 2 5 75 Introduction 2 6 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 2 6 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 3 D touch probes The various HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes enable you to m Quickly and precisely set datums m Measure the workpiece Measure and inspect tools The triggering touch probes TS 220 and KT 130 These touch probes are particularly effective for datum setting and workpiece measurement The TS 220 and KT 130 touch probes transmit the triggering signals to the TNC via cable Prin
193. ath If you do not enter a feed rate the TNC moves the tool along the entered path at rapid traverse Effect M140 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M140 becomes effective at the start of block Example NC blocks Block 250 Retract the tool 50 mm from the contour Block 251 Move the tool to the limit of the traverse range 250 X 0 F125 M140 MB 50 F750 251 X 0 F125 M140 MB MAX With M140 MB MAX you can only retract in the positive direction Always define a TOOL CALL with a tool axis before entering M140 otherwise the direction of traverse is not defined TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 259 Programming Miscellaneous functions 9 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 Standard behavior When the stylus is deflected the TNC outputs an error message as soon as you attempt to move a machine axis Behavior with M141 The TNC moves the machine axes even if the touch probe is deflected This function is required if you wish to write your own measuring cycle in connection with measuring cycle 3 in order to retract the stylus by means of a positioning block after it has been deflected Danger of collision If you use M141 make sure that you retract the touch probe in the correct direction M141 functions only for movements with straight line blocks Effect M141 is effective only in the block in which i
194. axes during an interruption in the same way as in the Manual Operation mode Example Retracting the spindle after tool breakage gt Interrupt machining gt Enable the external direction keys Press the MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key gt Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons On some machines you may have to press the machine START button after the MANUAL OPERATION soft key to enable the axis direction buttons Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual Resuming program run after an interruption If you cancel a program with INTERNAL STOP you have to start the program with the RESTORE POS AT N function or with GOTO 0 If a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle the program must be resumed from the beginning of the cycle This means that some machining operations will be repeated If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or program section repeat use the RESTORE POS AT N function to return to the position at which the program run was interrupted TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Program run 13 5 335 Test run and program run 13 5 Program run When a program run is interrupted the TNC stores The data of the last defined tool Active coordinate transformations e g datum shift mirroring The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined gt Note that the stored data remain active until
195. axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd side length Q219 incremental value Length 2 mo o W of the surface to be machined in the minor axis of the working plane Use the algebraic sign to specify the direction of the first stepover in reference to the starting point in the 2nd axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 441 P Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud milling 17 4 FACE MILLING Cycle 233 Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface used to calculate the infeeds Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 End point in 3rd axis Q386 absolute Coordinate in the spindle axis to which the surface is to be face milled Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Allowance for floor 0369 incremental Distance used for the last infeed Input range O to 99999 9999 Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 Path overlap factor Q370 Maximum stepover factor k The TNC calculates the actual stepover from the second side length Q219 and the tool radius so that a constant stepover is used for machining Input range 0 1 bis 1 9999 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Input range O to 99999 999 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for finishing 0385
196. ble format see Editing the table format page 266 Machine tool builders may define their own table templates and save them in the TNC When you create a new table the TNC opens a pop up window listing all available table templates You can also save your own table templates in the TNC To do this you create a new table change the table format and save the table in the TNC system proto directory Then your template will also be available in the list box for table templates when you create a new table TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 265 Programming Special functions 10 2 Freely definable tables Editing the table format gt Press the EDIT FORMAT soft key 2nd soft key level The TNC Ep ooran ror coring opens the editor form in which the table structure is shown poems sie bie The meanings of the structure commands header entries are Sr shown in the following table ee ren Structure Meaning a command a Available List of all columns contained in the D columns table 2 Move before The entry highlighted in Available a eee columns is moved in front of this SS POE EE SE z Bane mal E Name Column name Is displayed in the header Column type TEXT Text entry SIGN Sign or BIN Binary number DEC Decimal positive complete number cardinal number HEX Hexadecimal number INT Complete number LENGTH
197. ble of contents display of the subject index and the full text search function and switching to the screen half at right m f the text window at right is active Jump back to the window at left m m f the table of contents at left is active Select the entry above it or below it m f the text window at right is active Jump to next link Select the page last shown fa 2 2 Page forward if you have used the select F page last shown function e a D a D Move up by one page Move down by one page Emi TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 139 Programming Programming aids 4 7 TNCguide context sensitive help system Function Display or hide table of contents Switch between full screen display and reduced display With the reduced display you can see some of the rest of the TNC window The focus is switched internally to the TNC ae application so that you can operate the control when the TNCguide is open If the full screen is active the TNC reduces the window size automatically before the change of focus Exiting TNCguide Subject index The most important subjects in the Manual are listed in the subject index Index tab You can select them directly by mouse or with the arrow keys The left side is active gt Select the Index tab gt Activate the Keyword input field gt Enter the word for the desired subject and the TNC synchroniz
198. called Use the screen keyboard to enter the path name GOTO key or ee gt press the SELECT PROGRAM soft key for the TNC PROGRAM to display a selection window in which you can select the program to be called Confirm with the END key PROGRAM v If the program you want to call is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from then you only need to enter the program name If the called program is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you must enter the complete path e g TNC ZW35 ROUGH PGM1 H You can also call a program with Cycle 12 PGM CALL As a rule Q parameters are effective globally with a PGM CALL So please note that changes to Q parameters in the called program also influence the calling program Danger of collision Coordinate transformations that you define in the called program remain in effect for the calling program too unless you reset them 180 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Nesting 75 Nesting Types of nesting m Subprogram calls in subprograms m Program section repeats within a program section repeat m Subprogram calls in program section repeats Program section repeats in subprograms Nesting depth The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or subprograms Maximum nesting depth for subprograms 1
199. center point referenced to the machine datum 1 Y coordinate of the stylus center point referenced to the machine datum 2 Z coordinate of the stylus center point referenced to the machine datum Setup clearance above the stylus for pre positioning 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Setup clearance in the tool axis direction Clearance zone around the stylus for pre positioning 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Setup clearance in the plane vertically to the tool axis TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 495 Tables and overviews 21 1 Machine specific user parameters Parameter settings CfgToolMeasurement M function for spindle orientation 1 Spindle orientation directly via NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of M function for spindle orientation Probing routine MultiDirections Probing from more than one direction SingleDirection Probing from one direction Probing direction for tool radius measurement X_Positive Y_Positive X_Negative Y_Negative depending on tool axis Distance of tool lower edge to stylus upper edge 0 001 to 99 9999 mm Offset of stylus to tool Rapid traverse in probing cycle 10 to 300 000 mm min Rapid traverse in probing cycle Probing feed rate with tool measurement 1 to 3000 mm min Probing feed rate with tool measurement Calculation of probing feed rate ConstantTolerance Calculation of probing feed rate with constant tolerance VariableTolerance Calculation of
200. chine parameter see Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles later in this chapter When the probe stylus contacts the workpiece m the 3 D touch probe transmits a signal to the TNC the coordinates of the probed position are stored m the touch probe stops moving and m returns to Its starting position at rapid traverse If the stylus is not deflected within a defined distance the TNC displays an error message distance DIST from touch probe table 1 eN s2enems Touch probe cycles in the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel operating modes In the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes the TNC provides touch probe cycles that allow you to Calibrate the touch probe m Setting datums The manual touch probe cycles are described in the Manual operation and setup chapter see Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software option 17 page 293 470 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles 20 2 20 2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles To make it possible to cover the widest possible range of applications machine parameters enable you to determine the behavior common to all touch probe cycles Maximum traverse to touch point DIST in touch probe table If the stylus is not deflected within the path defined in DIST the Z TNC outputs an error message DIST Set up clearance to touch p
201. ciple of operation HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feature a wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical signal as soon as the stylus is deflected This signal is transmitted to the control which stores the current position of the stylus as the actual value TT 140 tool touch probe for tool measurement The TT 140 is a triggering 3 D touch probe for tool measurement and inspection Your TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with which you can measure the tool length and radius automatically either with the spindle rotating or stopped The TT 140 features a particularly rugged design and a high degree of protection which make it insensitive to coolants and swarf The triggering signal is generated by a wearresistant and highly reliable optical switch 76 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic 2 6 Handwheels HR electronic handwheels Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by hand A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 panel mounted handwheels HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 portable handwheel TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 77 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 1 Fundamentals 3 1 Fundamentals Position encoders and reference marks The machine axes are equipped with
202. ckwise Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Q244 80 PITCH CIRCLE DIA gt Number of repetitions Q241 Number of machining Q245 0 STARTING ANGLE operations on a pitch circle Input range 1 to 99999 gt Set up clearance 0200 incremental Distance ER OT SOANE ANGE between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range Q247 0 STEPPING ANGLE 0 to 99999 9999 Q241 8 NR OF REPETITIONS gt Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Input range Q203 30 SURFACE COORDINATE 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Q204 50 2ND SET UP gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental CLEARANCE Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q301 1 MOVE TO CLEARANCE between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Input range O to 99999 9999 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 385 Cycle fundamentals 15 5 POLAR PATTERN Cycle 220 gt Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between machining operations 0 Move at set up clearance between machining operations 1 Move at 2nd set up clearance between machining operations 386 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 15 6 15 6 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 Cycle run 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool from its current
203. cles 20 7 Measure the tool length Cycle 481 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Cycle parameters as gt Measure tool 0 Check tool 1 Select whether NC blocks the tool is to be measured for the first time or amp 6 TOOL CALL 12 Z whether a tool that has already been measured is to be inspected If the tool is being measured for the 7 TCH PROBE 481 TOOL LENGTH first time the TNC overwrites the tool length L in Q340 1 CHECK the central tool file TOOL T by the delta value DL z O If you wish to inspect a tool the TNC compares R260 sr 120 CLEARANCE HEIGHT the measured length with the tool length L that is Q341 1 PROBING THE TEETH stored in TOOL T It then calculates the positive or negative deviation from the stored value and enters it into TOOL T as the delta value DL The deviation can also be used for O parameter Q115 If the delta value is greater than the permissible tool length tolerance for wear or break detection the TNC will lock the tool status L in TOOL T gt Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from safetyDistStylus Input rang
204. copy FILE and tag it You can tag several files in this way if desired copy gt Copy the tagged files into the target directory aBc xyz Additional tagging functions see Tagging files page 107 If you have tagged files in both the left and right windows the TNC copies from the directory in which the highlight is located Overwriting files If you copy files into a directory in which other files are stored under the same name the TNC will ask whether the files in the target directory should be overwritten gt To overwrite all files Existing files check box selected press the OK soft key or gt Press the CANCEL soft key if no file is to be overwritten If you wish to overwrite a protected file you need to select the Protected files check box or cancel the copying process TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 103 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Copying a table Importing lines to a table If you are copying a table into an existing table you can overwrite individual lines with the REPLACE FIELDS soft key Prerequisites The target table must already exist The file to be copied must only contain the lines you want to replace Both tables must have the same file extension The REPLACE FIELDS function is used to overwrite lines in the target table To avoid losing data create a e backup
205. copy of the original table Example With a tool presetter you have measured the length and radius of ten new tools The tool presetter then generates the TOOL_Import T tool table with 10 lines for the 10 tools gt Copy this table from the external data medium to any directory gt Copy the externally created table to the existing table using the TNC file manager The TNC asks if you wish to overwrite the existing TOOL T tool table gt If you press the YES soft key the TNC will completely overwrite the current TOOL T tool table After the copying process the new TOOL T table consists of 10 lines gt Or press the REPLACE FIELDS soft key for the TNC to overwrite the 10 lines in the TOOL T file The data of the other lines is not changed Extracting lines from a table You can select one or more lines in a table and save them in a separate table Open the table from which you want to copy lines Use the arrow keys to select the first line to be copied Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Press the TAG soft key Select additional lines if required Press the SAVE AS soft key Enter a name for the table in which the selected lines are to be saved YY vV vV vV V VK Copying a directory gt Move the highlight in the right window onto the directory you want to copy gt Press the COPY soft key the TNC opens the window for selecting the target directory gt Select the target directory and confirm with ENT or the OK so
206. cseeeeescssieeeeesssteeeeeseees 390 Selecting a point table in the PrOQKAM seceessicsseersvenscdiaesasedssanassadiseaaiassdsdteavsndsbeanaioiAceaesiusscdenevecaceeaiasia 390 Calling a cycle in connection with point tables s s isssiresrrirkenciik nne inisin aisinn nEn AANA REENEN AEEA 391 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 33 Contents 34 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 Fumdammenntals rete recicrccecceeezs A evens tev tseaua see caees ceredenauy tense auees yn tecpesetantsuene tant r secs bee ee needs shtanbcnscen ts 394 OVER REE A E E TAA A TA E A N TA EEN NAA 394 CENTERING Cycle 240 m rA a A T ne ee A E E eee 395 a EA A E ETE A TA AEN EE TE sed EE A E 395 Please note while ProgrammMing cccccecececceeeeeeeeceeceeeeteceeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeteeecceteeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeaees 395 Pa aee e E o E E E E E N 396 DRILEING Cy cle 200 TAATA TE T TE E eee 397 Or TUM E E E E E E EEE N 397 Please note while ProgramMmMing ccccccccecceeeeeeee cee ceeeeteceeeecceaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeecetaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseneees 397 Cvele PIMEC aaki en aa E EEA Massie vorbodestuentecnnanmaddualatsverbandulices 398 REAMING Cyclez2 0 A AE E ETE E T E A E a E E e R 399 CUTE TUM eaae aa a O E E E a 399 Please note while ProgramMmMing ccccccccecceeeeeeee cee ceeeeteceeecceesaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeesceeseeeueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneees 399 Cycle parame TONS ssii5c snned ecie
207. curred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or index too large Database SQL access ID Q parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Database Index to SQL result Line number within the result set The table entries of this row are read and are transferred into the bound Q parameters If you do not enter an index the first row is read n O Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Row number is transferred in a Q parameter 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE 30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX Q2 Row number is programmed directly 30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX5 229 Programming O Parameters 8 9 Accessing tables with SOL commands SOL UPDATE SQL UPDATE transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the row of the result set addressed with INDEX The existing row in the result set is completely overwritten SQL UPDATE takes into account all columns entered in the Select command gt Parameter no for result Q parameter in which UPDATE the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle index too large
208. cuted A floating tap holder is required for tapping It must compensate the tolerances between feed rate and spindle speed during the tapping process When a cycle is being run the spindle speed override knob is disabled The feed rate override knob is active only within a limited range which is defined by the machine tool builder refer to your machine manual For tapping right hand threads activate the spindle with M3 for left hand threads use M4 If you enter the thread pitch of the tap in the Pitch column of the tool table the TNC compares the thread pitch from the tool table with the thread pitch defined in the cycle The TNC displays an error message if the values do not match In Cycle 206 the TNC uses the programmed rotational speed and the feed rate defined in the cycle to calculate the thread pitch Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface 420 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 TAPPING with a floating tap holder Cycle 206 16 11 Cycle parameters 208 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and
209. d confirm with ENT ENT Copying a single file gt Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy gt Press the COPY soft key Select the copying function The TNC opens a pop up window COPY gt Enter the name of the destination file and confirm EE your entry with the ENT key or the OK soft key The TNC copies the file into the active directory or into the selected target directory The original file is retained or gt Press the Target Directory soft key to call a pop up window in which you select the target directory by pressing the ENT key or the OK soft key the TNC copies the file to the selected directory The original file is retained When the copying process has been started with ENT or the OK soft key the TNC displays a pop up window with a progress indicator 102 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 Copying files into another directory gt Select a screen layout with two equally sized windows In the right window gt Press the SHOW TREE soft key gt Move the highlight to the directory into which you wish to copy the files In the left window gt Press the SHOW TREE soft key gt Select the directory with the files that you wish to copy and press the SHOW FILES soft key to display the files in this directory gt Call the file tagging functions TAG TR gt Move the highlight to the file you want to
210. d in the tool table TOOL T directly without having to enter the number or name gt Working spindle axis X Y Z Enter the tool axis gt Spindle speed S Enter the spindle speed S in revolutions per minute rpm Instead you can define the cutting speed Vc in meters per minute m min Press the VC soft key gt Feed rate F The feed rate mm min or 0 1 inch min is effective until you program a new feed rate in a positioning or TOOL CALL block gt Tool length oversize DL Enter the delta value for the tool length gt Tool radius oversize DR Enter the delta value for the tool radius gt Tool radius oversize DR2 Enter the delta value for the tool radius 2 If you open a pop up window for tool selection the TNC marks all tools available in the tool magazine green You can also search for a tool in the pop up window To do so press the SEARCH soft key and enter the tool number or tool name With the OK soft key you can load the tool into the dialog box TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 159 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Example Tool call Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed of 2500 rpm and a feed rate of 350 mm min The tool length is to be programmed with an oversize of 0 2 mm the tool radius 2 with an oversize of 0 05 mm and the tool radius with an undersize of 1 mm 20 TOOL CALL 5 2 Z 2500 F350 DL 0 2 DR 1 DR2 0 05 The character D prec
211. d panntesad sansewnameeadengsaunesesbanasaeeteee A TARIA 304 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 27 Contents 11 7 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 00006 305 Overview Datum setting in any axis Circle center as datum Setting a center line as datum Measuring workpieces with a 3 D touch Probe ccccceccececeeceeeeee cence eee eeeeeeeeeeeceecaeeaeeeeeeeteeeeeeneees 309 Using touch probe functions with mechanical probes or measuring ialS ccccecceeeeeeceeseteeeeeeeees 28 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 12 1 Programming and executing simple machining Operations cccccceceeeeereeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 314 Positioning with manual data input MDI cce cee cceceeece cece eect eee ceeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeececteneeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 314 Protecting and erasing programs in SMD cece ccc cece cece cceseeeececeeeeesceceeeeescescseeeeeccteeesecesteeeeeeeees 316 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 29 Contents i Fe Fl et CT 1 a1 eee ee epee eeeeeemee eeeereee eee eee pie eereere E ceerrrereeeirere 318 PADD ATOM irere E E tapas antaamaaih E sy saaache EE 318 Speed of the Setting test PUNS ce ccceeccccceeesseececeeeeeeeceeseeeeceeeseeeeeeessaeeseeeeieeeeeessseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeas 319 OVERVIEW Display MOOS sia iecstec
212. d switch to the evaluation menu Press the EVALUATE soft key gt Datum In the menu window enter both coordinates of the circle center confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 298 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 299 gt Terminate the probing function Press the END soft key Setting a center line as datum PROBING gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING y E CL soft key gt Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point gt Select the probing direction by soft key gt Start the probing procedure Press the NC Start button gt Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point gt Start the probing procedure Press the NC Start button gt Datum Enter the coordinate of the datum in the menu window confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the value to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 298 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 299 gt Terminate the probing function Press the END soft key After you have measured the second touch point you can use the evaluation menu to change the direction of the centerline You can choose by soft key whether the datum or zero point should be set
213. data is stored in the touch probe table that defines the probe behavior during the probing process If you run several touch probes on your machine tool you can save separate data for each touch probe Editing touch probe tables To edit the touch probe table proceed as follows Table editing Brest run Gl Manual ol peration gt Table editin o oo gt Select the Manual Operation mode TEETE a aT E E a u TOUCH gt Select the touch probe functions Press the PROBE i i TOUCH PROBE soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys TCH PROBE gt Select the touch probe table Press the Tch probe TABLE table soft key Set the EDIT soft key to ON Using the arrow keys select the desired setting AERE fi Perform desired changes Exit the touch probe table Press the END soft key vv v Yvy 474 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Touch probe data Touch probe table 20 3 Abbr Inputs Dialog NO Number of the touch probe Enter this number in the tool table column TP_NO under the appropriate tool number TYPE Selection of the touch probe used Selection of touch probe CAL_OF1 Offset of the touch probe axis to the spindle axis for the TS center misalignmt ref axis reference axis mm CAL_OF2 Offset of the touch probe axis to the spindle axis for the TS center misalignmt aux axis minor axis mm CAL_ANG The TNC orients the
214. dinate transformation cycles which enable datum shift rotation mirror image naar 448 enlarging and reducing for various contours TRANSF Special cycles such as dwell time program call oriented spindle stop aan 464 CYCLES Cycles for automatic tool measurement enabled by the machine tool builder 476 E gt If required switch to machine specific fixed cycles These fixed cycles can be integrated by your machine tool builder 373 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Cycle fundamentals 15 3 Working with fixed cycles 15 3 Working with fixed cycles Machine specific cycles In addition to the HEIDENHAIN cycles many machine tool builders offer their own cycles in the TNC These cycles are available in a separate cycle number range m Cycles 300 to 399 Machine specific cycles that are to be defined through the CYCLE DEF key m Cycles 500 to 599 Machine specific touch probe cycles that are to be defined through the cycl def key FT Refer to your machine manual for a description of the specific function w Sometimes machine specific cycles use transfer parameters that HEIDENHAIN already uses in standard cycles When using DEF active cycles cycles that the TNC automatically runs during cycle definition see Calling a cycle page 376 simultaneously with CALLactive cycles cycles you need to call in order to run them see Calling a cycle page 376 adhere to the following proced
215. dinnesctcsddonsvscdinandsaladbsadse EEE A ESEN NAANA ANARAN ARE ECAA SENEESE a EARANN EENAA 320 Plan VEW essan e aa a a aaa a a a Ate ia 321 Proj ctionin three DlANSS skivceoncecensveciaeeessietaencnseeiaiedadbeebeaseieiav ENE TEE EREN OR En aa 321 SDV EW enana ei a Ar i R AR a A a Ea E EA aA EAEAN 322 Detail MAQNIFICATION cccccccccccccecceteceececeseeeeeeecaeeeeeeeceeeeeeecsaeeeeeecaeeeeesssaeeeeeesaeeesesscsaeeseessaaeesenensaes 325 Repeating graphic simulatioN sssssa sssini an aiaa aaa Eiana E aaa Eaei 326 MOOMW NS play sscan a e a enaa AA e TE AA tena Seatrack nee aeons can tases E EARE REE A EARR EAR ERE 326 Measurement Of machining iMEssssssrenissiani aan EAE AA EREE TEE E 327 13 2 Showing the workpiece blank in the working Space ccccccccccessseeceeeeeneeceeeesnneeeeeesenteeeeeeeeaas 328 PND DIICAUOM se ec eecnvennateeeressteeaceueacae sg E E nateenecneuteanecean 328 13 3 Functions for PrOGMalMeCispl ayscccc cccccssa cc cece cscecs chee ssccececcxsecccccccdseeccceecsaccceccevsesieteacdsccctctersaesteiierseees 329 VER VIG WV sg secs sicean sat E E A E vies ansacghts saan E E E E S 329 MS AC TOSE RUM ier cee esssnrssaencecutcctcceses viens svcecseccsentsctrestsanccsccssecocthcceanvestsacsancectcenseinstavasvcncs cscs arti tediessnssazesscearsenec 330 PAD DIIC ATOM aces ttreecceteneteescateare aucae dee ceasta estes E E E 330 M325 4G toT A ERA conse secucechttessanacarcrsceftcareaches stohasact satce tans ctesisatneaccescem
216. e 1071 Missing calibration data 1072 Tolerance exceeded 1073 Block scan active 1074 ORIENTATION not permitted 1075 3 D ROT not permitted 1076 Activate 3 D ROT 1077 Enter depth as negative 1078 Q303 in meas cycle undefined 1079 Tool axis not allowed 1080 Calculated values incorrect 1081 Contradictory meas points 1082 Incorrect clearance height 1083 Contradictory plunge type 1084 This fixed cycle not allowed 1085 Line is write protected 1086 Oversize greater than depth 1087 No point angle defined 1088 Contradictory data 1089 Slot position 0 not allowed 1090 Enter an infeed not equal to 0 1091 Switchover of Q399 not allowed 1092 Tool not defined 1093 Tool number not allowed 1094 Tool name not allowed 1095 Software option not active 1096 Kinematics cannot be restored 1097 Function not permitted 1098 Contradictory workpc blank dim 1099 Measuring position not allowed 1100 Kinematic access not possible 1101 Meas pos not in traverse range 1102 Preset compensation not possible TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Additional functions 8 8 205 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional functions Error number Text 1103 Tool radius too large 1104 Plunging type is not possible 1105 Plunge angle incorrectly defined 1106 Angular length is undefined 1107 Slot width is too large 1108 Scaling factors not equal 1109 Tool data inconsistent 206 TNC 12
217. e 0368 0369 is defined gt 1st side length Q218 incremental Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd side length Q219 incremental Pocket length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Pocket position 0367 Position of the pocket in reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0 Tool position pocket center 1 Tool position left corner below 2 Tool position right corner below 3 Tool position right corner top 4 Tool position left top corner top gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Input range O to 99999 999 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for finishing 0385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Finishing allowance for side 0368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working
218. e 221 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 387 Cycle fundamentals 15 6 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 Cycle parameters 221 gt Starting point in 1st axis Q225 absolute H8 Coordinate of the starting point in the reference axis of the working plane gt Starting point 2nd axis Q226 absolute Coordinate of the starting point in the minor axis of the machining plane gt Spacing in 1st axis Q237 incremental Spacing between each point on a line gt Spacing in 2nd axis Q238 incremental Spacing between each line gt Number of columns Q242 Number of machining operations on a line gt Number of lines Q243 Number of lines gt Angle of rotation Q224 absolute Angle by which the entire pattern is rotated The center of rotation lies in the starting point gt Set up clearance 0200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 O A gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental NC blocks Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision 54 CYCL DEF 221 CARTESIAN PATTERN between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Input range O to Qama SARNE PAN MSU AE 99999 9999 Q
219. e 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Cutter measurement O No 1 Yes Choose whether the control is to measure the individual teeth maximum of 20 teeth 484 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Measure the tool radius Cycle 482 software option 17 Touch Probe 20 8 Functions software option 17 20 8 Measure the tool radius Cycle 482 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Cycle run To measure the tool radius program the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 482 Select via input parameters by which of two methods the radius of a tool is to be measured Measuring the tool while it is rotating Measuring the tool while it is rotating and subsequently measuring the individual teeth The TNC pre positions the tool to be measured to a position at the side of the touch probe head The distance from the tip of the milling tool to the upper edge of the touch probe head is defined in offsetToolAxis The TNC probes the tool radially while it is rotating If you have programmed a subsequent measurement of individual teeth the control measures the radius of each tooth with the aid of oriented spindle stops Please note while programming Before measuring a tool for the first time enter the following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL T the approximate radius the approximate length the number of teeth and the cutting direction Cylindrical tools with diamond surfaces ca
220. e MM or INCH soft key The TNC changes to the program blocks window and displays an empty point table EE gt With the INSERT LINE soft key insert new LINE lines and enter the coordinates of the desired machining position AER Repeat the process until all desired coordinates have been entered The name of the point table must begin with a letter Use the soft keys X OFF ON Y OFF ON Z OFF ON second soft key row to specify which coordinates you want to enter in the point table TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Point tables 15 7 389 Cycle fundamentals 15 7 Point tables Hiding single points from the machining process In the FADE column of the point table you can specify if the defined point is to be hidden during the machining process gt Inthe table select the point to be hidden gt Select the FADE column gt Activate hiding or gt Deactivate hiding Ea Selecting a point table in the program In the Programming mode of operation select the program for which you want to activate the point table gt Press the PGM CALL key to call the function for selecting the point table gt Press the POINT TABLE soft key Enter the name of the point table and confirm your entry with the END key If the point table is not stored in the same directory as the NC program you must enter the complete path Example NC block 7 SEL PATTERN TNC DIRKT5 MUST35 PNT
221. e file 106 Dir CtOri S ccccecseseeeeeeeeeeees 98 COPY I 104 Greates ecdiiccioieiitieiagteces 102 External data transfer 116 File CREATE einccccactseacnnasiczzdvnmocs 102 File Ypo 95 File type External file types 97 Function OVErVIEW 0000 eee 99 Overwriting fileS cc eee 103 Protect Mle cccesenvvesedarivarnscneces 109 Rename file 108 108 Selecting fileS cee 101 Tagging files 107 File status 100 FIFGWallll sssesissaahissexisecessiniaacsss FN14 ERROR Displaying error MESSAGES wciibinticiesieniocsess 203 203 FN16 FPRINT Output of formatted TEXTS E 207 207 FN18 SYSREAD Reading system Gat EEE E EE 211 211 FN19 PLC Transfer values to the PEG E E E 220 220 FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC SYNCRrONIZAtION ss nsaan 220 FN23 CIRCLE DATA Calculate a circle from 3 points 00 197 FN24 CIRCLE DATA Calculate a circle from 4 points 197 FN26 TABOPEN Open a freely definable table 268 FN27 TABWRITE Write to a freely definable table 269 269 FN28 TABREAD Read from a freely definable table 270 270 FN29 PLC Transfer values to the E sea en ean PR Oe eT 221 FN37 EXPORT necies 221 FOr VIEW aiioa iranienne 267 Freely definable tables Fundamentals cccccccccccceeeees 80 a GraPNICS ccccceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 318 Detail magnification 325 Display modes 065 320
222. e functions 0 0008 276 Finding text sections 278 Opening and exiting 275 Text VariableS ccccceceseeeeeeees 236 TNCQUIde 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 137 TING EMO sonaren 359 TNCremoN ceceecceceeeeeeee 359 Tool change 161 Tool compensation 08 163 Lengthnaieei tanni 163 Tool Compensation Radi Seini 164 TOO data 148 Cala 159 Delta values 149 Entering into the program 149 Enter into the table 150 Tool data Initiating 157 Tool length 148 Tool measurement 153 476 479 Calibrate TT 481 482 Machine parameters 477 Measuring tool length and TACIUS cee ecceececcceceee sees see ee eee eees 487 Tool length 483 Tool radius 485 TOO NAME 148 Fool NUMDET c0cceeeeeeeeceees 148 Tool radiUS isir 148 TOO table 150 COIL HOX tes cis csi dadeastannatedannnn ated 154 Editing functions 0 157 Input Options 150 Tool usage file 161 349 Tool usage teSt eee 161 Touch probe cycles 0 293 Manual Operation mode 293 512 See Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Touch probe data cc 68 475 Touch probe monitoring 260 Touch probe table 474 TRANS DATUM 00 ceeeeeeees 272 Traversing reference marks 280 TTIQONOMENIY cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 196 Universal drilling 404 410 User parameters Machine
223. e hole at the deepened starting point Input range O to 999 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 D amp NC blocks 11 CYCL DEF 241 SINGLE LIP D H DRLNG Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 80 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q211 0 25 DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM Q203 100 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q379 7 5 START POINT Q253 750 F PRE POSITIONING Q208 1000 RETRACTION FEED RATE Q426 3 DIR OF SPINDLE ROT Q427 25 ROT SPEED INFEED OUT Q428 500 DRILLING SPEED Q429 8 COOLANT ON Q430 9 COOLANT OFF Q435 0 DWELL DEPTH Q401 100 FEED RATE FACTOR Q202 9999 MAX PLUNGING DEPTH PLUNGING DEPTH DECREMENT MIN PLUNGING DEPTH PLUNGING DEPTH Q212 0 Q205 0 415 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 9 SINGLE LIP DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 gt M function for coolant off 0430 M function for switching off the coolant The TNC switches the coolant off if the tool is at the hole depth Input range O to 999 gt Dwell depth 0435 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which the tool is to dwell If 0 is entered the function is not active standard setting Application During machining of through holes some tools require a short dwell time before exiting the bottom of the hole in order to transport the chips to the top Define a value smaller than the hole depth Q201 input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate
224. e inserted gt Press the SPEC FCT key gt Press the PROGRAMMING AIDS soft key gt Press the INSERT COMMENT soft key Functions for editing of the comment Function Soft key Jump to beginning of comment BEGIN k Jump to end of comment END gt Jump to the beginning of a word Words must MOVE be separated by a space Jump to the end of a word Words must be separated by a space Switch between insert mode and overwrite mode OVERWRITE TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 123 Programming Programming aids 4 3 Structuring programs 4 3 Structuring programs Definition and applications This TNC function enables you to comment part programs in structuring blocks Structuring blocks are short texts with up to 252 characters and are used as comments or headlines for the subsequent program lines With the aid of appropriate structuring blocks you can organize long and complex programs in a clear and comprehensible manner This function is particularly convenient if you want to change the program later Structuring blocks can be inserted into the part program at any point They can also be displayed in a separate window Use the appropriate screen layout for this Ei The inserted structure items are managed by the TNC ina separate file extension SEC DEP This speeds navigation in the program structure window Displaying the program
225. e machining If you use indirect parameter assignments in cycles with numbers greater than 200 e g Q210 Q1 any change in the assigned parameter e g Q1 will have no effect after the cycle definition Define the cycle parameter e g Q210 directly in such cases If you define a feed rate parameter for fixed cycles greater than 200 then instead of entering a numerical value you can use soft keys to assign the feed rate defined in the TOOL CALL block FAUTO soft key You can also use the feed rate alternatives FMAX rapid traverse FZ feed per tooth and FU feed per rev depending on the respective cycle and the function of the feed rate parameter Note that after a cycle definition a change of the FAUTO feed rate has no effect because internally the TNC assigns the feed rate from the TOOL CALL block when processing the cycle definition If you want to delete a block that is part of a cycle the TNC asks you whether you want to delete the whole cycle 372 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Available Cycle Groups 15 2 15 2 Available Cycle Groups Overview of fixed cycles gt The soft key row shows the available groups of cycles Cycle group Soft key Page Cycles for pecking reaming boring tapping and counterboring e 394 THREAD Cycles for milling rectangular pockets and rectangular studs POCKETS 428 Gie Cycles for producing point patterns 384 Coor
226. e n indicates the sequential number of the feature content level You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the FCL functions For more information contact your machine tool builder or HEIDENHAIN Intended place of operation The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022 and is intended for use primarily in industrially zoned areas Legal information This product uses open source software Further information is available on the control under gt Programming and Editing operating mode gt MOD function gt License Info soft key TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 4 Fundamentals TNC model software and features 10 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Contents o ON OO OF A WO N yO NO 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 eo O N O oO A DBS O First Steps with the TING 128 i risoss cnciznnciinnndeawninasebsnccununanedcsinnceamagnoayunibvaxupenenannenimndebaphmubmnsele nies 43 DOVER UCU os cases tardies sce cee eee ese een E E E E E E 61 Programming Fundamentals file ManageMent ceccseeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeneee 79 Programming Programming id 2 e ee i ii iii iil inl ni inna 121 PFOGFAMMING TOOlS i ioie aaa eaa aae ecveonncuenecteecsecessdeev ecevecocceenvesveverweusveds 145 Programming Tool movements ssssesseesee
227. e right shows you all files that are stored in the selected directory Each file is shown with additional information illustrated in the table below 09 26 07 2012 09 59 02 02 05 2011 10 18 24 623 02 05 2011 10 15 24 Last emes END Display Meaning File name File name max 25 characters and file type Byte File size in bytes Status File properties E Program is selected in the Programming mode of operation S Program is selected in the Test Run mode of operation M Program is selected in a Program Run mode of operation Ea File is protected against erasing and editing D File is protected against erasing and editing because it is being run Date Date that the file was last edited Time Time that the file was last edited 100 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 Selecting drives directories and files PGM gt Call the file manager MGT Use the arrow keys or the soft keys to move the highlight to the desired position on the screen gt Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa gt Moves the highlight up and down within a window Moves the highlight one page up or down within a window PERLE v Step 1 Select drive gt Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window SELECT gt To select a drive
228. e spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Deepened starting point 0379 incremental with respect to the workpiece surface Starting position for actual drilling operation The TNC moves at the feed rate for pre positioning from the set up clearance to the deepened starting point Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing velocity of the tool during positioning from the set up clearance to the deepened starting point in mm min Effective only if Q379 is entered not equal to 0 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO gt Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in Q206 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO gt Rotat dir of entry exit 3 4 5 0426 Desired direction of spindle rotation when tool moves into and retracts from the hole Input 3 Turn the spindle with M3 4 Turn the spindle with M4 5 Move with stationary spindle gt Spindle speed of entry exit 0427 Desired spindle speed when tool moves into and retracts from the hole Input range 0 to 99999 gt Drilling speed 0428 Desired speed for drilling Input range 0 to 99999 gt M function for coolant on 0429 M function for switching on the coolant The TNC switches the coolant on if the tool is in th
229. e surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during reaming in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 gt Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the Y tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter 0208 0 the tool retracts at the reaming feed rate Input range 0 to 99999 999 gt Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 29 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur 30 80 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 NC blocks 11 CYCL DEF 201 REAMING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 15 DEPTH Q206 100 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q211 0 5 DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM Q208 250 RETRACTION FEED RATE Q203 20 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 100 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE 12 X 30 FMAX 13 Y 20 FMAX M3 M99 14 X 80 FMAX 15 Y 50 FMAX M9 400 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 BORING Cycle 202 16 5 16 5 BORING Cycle 202 Cycle run 1 The TNC pos
230. e test run RESET gt START STOP START v Press the RESET START soft key The TNC simulates the active program up to a programmed break or to the program end While the simulation is running you can use the soft keys to change views Press the STOP soft key The TNC interrupts the test run Press the START soft key The TNC resumes the test run after a break Further information on this topic m Running a test run see Test Run page 330 m Graphic functions see page 318 m Adjust the simulation speed see Speed of the Setting test runs page 319 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 55 First Steps with the TNC 128 1 5 Setting up tools 1 5 Setting up tools Selecting the correct operating mode Tools are set up in the Manual Operation mode gt Press the operating mode key The TNC switches to the Manual mode of operation Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC see Modes of Operation page 65 Preparing and measuring tools gt Clamp the required tools in their tool holders gt When measuring with an external tool presetter Measure the tools note down the length and radius or transfer them directly to the machine through a transfer program gt When measuring on the machine Insert the tool Manual operation Gi Manual oj poration Ise T Bai am ABA j s100 A e DE on exc
231. e the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key SUBSTR v gt Remember that the first character of a text sequence starts internally with the zeroth place Example A four character substring LEN4 is read from the string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character BEG2 37 QS13 SUBSTR SRC_QS10 BEG2 LEN4 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 239 Programming Q Parameters 8 11 String parameters Converting a string parameter to a numerical value The TONUMB function converts a string parameter to a numerical value The value to be converted should be only numerical gt The QS parameter must contain only one numerical value Otherwise the TNC will output an error message gt Select Q parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function gt Enter the number of the parameter in which the TNC is to save the numerical value Confirm with the ENT key gt Shift the soft key row FORMULA gt Select the function for converting a string parameter to a numerical value gt Enter the number of the Q parameter to be converted and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key TONUMB E E Example Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical parameter Q82 37 Q82 TONUMB SRC_QS11 240 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Con
232. eaecedde messes Sinwendadeeevaedanawt 138 Downloading Current help fIES ccc ccccccccccsteeeeceecseeeceecseeeeeeccseeeeeecsaeeeeeecseeeeeescsaeeesessssitesenenaees 142 18 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 52194 Entering tool relate chatter rir oocti iso ccectsesscceccscsso cece isnsecccedevesscuecssuszsnuingsinesencettrs ssnaettsas sect SEAE 146 Feed Tatan Eoee a EE A E eauiarearartaameans arate 146 Spindle speed Ic in cee 147 BZ MOON atalnrrcccerveceeceeccctecancrcetsncencnvcsiteceecintett asec avers cecetaretacvervanss tncnr stot carerrntsrs dine sae retro reat tineerensncersorarerearee 148 Requirements for tool COMPENSATION cccccecseccccecsseeeeceecseeeeeeecsaeeeeescueeeeeessaeeeeeecseeeseeseseeeeessaaes 148 Tool number tool namena ainra aaa EEEE ea EEEa TEE A RAEAN ream 148 TO OUS CMG th enned e iai A e aaie arei aai aA E aE 148 Tool radius Reremoana E A ean donee wig deine eee R a 148 Delta values for lengths and radii ssssesssssskiisettiitttttt ttet tr rrn EttEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EErEE EEEE 149 Entering tool data into the progra wascieisccsatiascavces cssciaeedceesszsaaenbaeaaeecadeesessseoaaigunenetenndaeecsapaaraadebnoneeeess 149 Enter tool data into the table aii fees ccanss encaznactinndedveabessvcbean iia anaa ra aari aia a aE Eaa 150 Importing tool taDleS cece cece cece eee e eee e cee eee ae cae eeeeeeeceeeeceeaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeee
233. eanindasextuaaaa EER aia a eaea Ea arae EATE A EE 65 Test RU Minie eonan aaa A EEEa a EEEE 66 Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single BIOCK cccccccccccsseceeecesteeeeeessseeeeessseeeeenenses 66 Status Gis plays orcs ccevccccsccc ea cass ees sce cones sev evundercsveusseey est suet cevessebuees vests peesestaeresseuseecreveasnecresreamscoresvenmereg 67 General Status CISPlAY vse canciesescnisivandedndsasaaedasitnadawaeceistanegdatiiatapdandaadapagcaadiase joadidanapsedlpedcendaoweaadtieancain 67 Additi nal status display Sasss mennan ipa a ae an a A aR 68 Window Managen si se neeaaea e aa aenea e aaae e ee Ea E Enee AE aeaa AEA EAEn EAEE E a aE EAA EEEa En eaea na 74 TASK E E E E E E etn eee ee ae 75 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheelg ccssseccceeseseees 76 3 D LOUGH Probe Siisera ia n an ane ea vids E aa ERE AA E AE EAE A ED 76 HR electronic handwheels cccccccecececceeeeeceeceeeeeeececececceececneceeeeeeeeeeeseeseecceceeeeeeeeseeeeseesseccecieeeeeeeeees 77 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Si lity Fundamentals irccrc coves sates scoe eee scenccctv ites s tecteeseecris ates saztececa stent comes taveusencatantarrey teattdoucrar secure npr teetees ine see 80 Position encoders and reference MarkS cccccccccccccccscsseceecescseeeeeecsseeeeeecsseeeeescsaeeesessseeeeesscseeseessaaes 80 Reference SYSTEM cccccccccceecccccsseeee
234. ed a part program with an INTERNAL STOP the TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid program Jorr 1005 usa startup vajon ADVANCED DEE on Mid program startup must not begin in a subprogram All necessary programs tables and pallet files must be selected in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes status M If the program contains a programmed interruption before the startup block the block scan is interrupted Press the machine START button to continue the block scan After a block scan return the tool to the calculated position with RESTORE POSITION Tool length compensation does not take effect until after the tool call and a following positioning block This also applies if you have only changed the tool length TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 339 Test run and program run 13 5 Program run The TNC skips all touch probe cycles in a mid program startup Result parameters that are written to from these cycles might therefore remain empty You may not use mid program startup if the following occurs after a tool change in the machining program The stretch filter is active m The program is started in a threading cycle Cycles 17 206 207 or the subsequent program block gt Go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan Enter GOTO 0 BLOCK gt Selec
235. ed operating mode To change the screen layout O gt Press the screen layout key The soft key row shows the available layout options see Modes of Operation PROGRAM gt Select the desired screen layout TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Visual display unit and operating panel 2 2 dees Bes m ieee BeBSBBeaBea B PEOR gt oe eeee 4 ooma C 888 E eee Bane O prmogora A lt aA Fargam 2 0 ammm oE E o gt 63 Introduction 2 2 Visual display unit and operating panel Control Panel The TNC 128 is delivered with an integrated keyboard 1 Machine operating panel refer to your machine manual 2 Em File management Calculator MOD function m HELP function 3 Programming modes is H 4 Machine operating modes E E r a 2R E E 5 Initiation of certain programming dialogs s HHI E Saa 5 HHL 6 Navigation keys and GOTO jump command amo A 7 Numerical input axis selection and programming of positioning a gt blocks Ms The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front cover Some machine manufacturers do not use the standard operating panel from HEIDENHAIN Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual Machine panel buttons e g NC START or NC STOP are described in the manual for your machine tool 64 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 2 3 Modes o
236. ed with the 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 x 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUS8 INTERNAL STOP function ig E nZ 2 RO EMAK M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET m Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS AT sea a N for example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP SS ee Depending on the machine if the position of an axis has a ae changed after the control loop has been opened during a Ji E o 000 program interruption f gt To select a return to contour Press the RESTORE POSITION soft hai ea key gt Restore machine status if required gt To move the axes in the sequence that the TNC suggests on the screen press the machine START button or gt To move the axes in any sequence press the soft keys RESTORE X RESTORE Z etc and activate each axis with the machine START button gt To resume machining press the machine START button TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 341 Test run and program run 13 6 Optional block skip 13 6 Optional block skip Application In a test run or program run the control can skip over blocks that begin with a slash gt Torun or test the program without the blocks preceded by a slash set the soft key to ON gt Torun or test the program with the blocks preceded by a slash set the soft key to OFF This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks After a power interruption the TNC returns to the most rece
237. ed word gt Select the search function Press the FIND soft key gt Press the FIND CURRENT WORD soft key gt Exit the search function Press the END soft key Finding any text gt Select the search function Press the FIND soft key The TNC displays the dialog prompt Find text gt Enter the text that you wish to find gt Find the text Press the EXECUTE soft key gt Exit the search function Press the END soft key 278 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Manual operation and setup 11 1 Switch on switch off 11 1 Switch on switch off Switch on Switch on and crossing over the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool wb Refer to your machine manual Switch on the power supply for TNC and machine The TNC then displays the following dialog SYSTEM STARTUP gt TNC is started POWER INTERRUPTED gt TNC message that the power was interrupted clear the message COMPILE A PLC PROGRAM gt The PLC program of the TNC is automatically compiled RELAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING gt Switch on external dc voltage The TNC checks the functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit MANUAL OPERATION TRAVERSE REFERENCE POINTS a gt Cross the reference points manually in the t displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START button or gt Cross the reference points in any sequence Press and hold the machine axis direction button for each axis until the r
238. eding L R and R2 designates delta values Preselection of tools The preselection of tools can vary depending on the individual machine tool Refer to your machine T manual If you are working with tool tables use TOOL DEF to preselect the next tool Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding Q parameter or type the tool name in quotation marks 160 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tooldata 5 2 Tool change Automatic tool change T The tool change function can vary depending on the individual machine tool Refer to your machine E manual Refer to your machine manual If your machine tool has automatic tool changing capability the program run is not interrupted When the TNC reaches a TOOL CALL it replaces the inserted tool by another from the tool magazine Tool usage test The tool usage test function must be enabled by your machine manufacturer Refer to your machine E manual Refer to your machine manual In order to be able to conduct a tool usage test tool usage files have to be generated The conversational program has to be completely simulated in the Test Run operating mode or executed in the Program Run Full Sequence or Single Block operating mode Applying the tool usage test Before starting a program in the Program Run mode of operation you can use the TOOL USAGE and TOOL USAGE TEST soft keys to se check whether the tools being used in the
239. ee FNZ3 points eae e g FN 23 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs of three points on a circle must be saved in Q30 and the following five parameters in this case up to Q35 The TNC then saves the circle center in the reference axis X if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q20 the circle center in the minor axis Y if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q21 and the circle radius in parameter Q22 Function Soft key FN24 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from four FN24 points R e g FN 24 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs of four points on a circle must be saved in Q30 and the following seven parameters in this case up to 037 The TNC then saves the circle center in the reference axis X if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q20 the circle center in the minor axis Y if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q21 and the circle radius in parameter Q22 the resulting parameter and the two following parameters gt Note that FN 23 and FN 24 automatically overwrite TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 197 Programming O Parameters 8 6 If then decisions with Q parameters 8 6 If then decisions with Q parameters Application The TNC can make logical if then decisions by comparing a Q parameter with another O parameter or with a numerical value If the condition is fulfilled the TNC continues the program at the label that is programmed after the condition for information on labels see Labelin
240. eeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 399 Rectangular pocket Roughing finishing 0 429 Rectangular stud 433 Reference System 81 81 Replacing texts 94 Retraction 337 After a power interruption 337 Retraction from the contour 259 Returning to the contour 341 Rotary axis Reduce display M94 256 SO SCAN ecenin s 457 Screen keyboard 000000 122 Screen layout 63 Search function 93 Selecting the datum 82 Selecting the unit of measure 86 Select kinematics 0 350 Setting the BAUD RATE 355 356 356 356 356 357 Single lip deep hole drilling 414 Software NUMbET 0 eee 354 SPEC FCT ccssisisusssssieasensacasdies 262 Special functions 08 262 Spindle orientation 468 SOL COMMAMNAS ceeeeeees 222 Status display 67 67 Additional ccccccccesesececeeeeeees 68 GENEL Alo cece ccecceeeeeteseeeeeeees 67 511 Index String parameters 236 Structuring programs 124 SUDPFOGraM cccceeeeccceeeeeeeees 175 SWALCHHO Pivcieecatidedaeseasregteeteccets 281 SWIN O ieie naan 280 Tapping With a floating tap holder 420 Without a floating tap holder 422 each IN 89 171 Test R M ariiraa 329 Test run EXECUTE naranata 331 Test Run OVerVIeW sesser 329 test run Setting Speed 319 Text Fil soscsccdcscsisstddccssantaneetesanss 275 Text file Delet
241. eecneeeeeeeeeeeeeteeceaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeccescaaeeeeeeeeeeetettees 286 Datum management with the preset table cc eceececcce ccc ee cee ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 287 Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software Option 17 ccccscccccccssssesessesreees 293 OWE NVI E E EA A E EN E E AE E E EEE 293 Functions in touch probe cycleS s s ssssssssssittitttnttt ertt t ttti AEEA AEA ANEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEENENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EErEE EEE 294 SEISCHNG touch probe Cycles sesssscoceitacisceveceasvsebavandeheneueess Meavacesbstndeconasseceandd SuaaVoddubsanagceddvosngncndesebubends 296 Recording measured values from the touch probe CYCIES ccccccccceeceececceeeeeeecsesseeeeecsseseeeeestsaeeees 297 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table cc cceeeccceeseeeseeeeeeeeeees 298 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table 0 cece ceeesteeeeeeeneees 299 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 300 WCOGUCTION e 2atraccsravaten A AE TE E E ETE 300 Calibrating the effective ION Gt sccicescswnsdcesaduntataeanaontecnss iedseesnnnldecaaui sie tatanshied capedhintdexastunnadaeeedontaemdsinls 301 Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center MiSalIQNMENt ccceeeeteceeeestteeeeeeeeaes 302 Displaying calibration VAlUSSiisscsaissecatsesisnnesensediuaddota
242. eed Gna GCE D F100 a W 0 Y Nm 15 10 i touch preser Tool uw s F PROBE ABLE TABLE im i 56 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 The tool table TOOL T In the tool table TOOL T permanently saved under TNC table save the tool data such as length and radius but also further tool specific information that the TNC needs to perform its functions To enter tool data in the tool table TOOL T proceed as follows TOOL gt Display the tool table TABLE V3 a gt Edit the tool table Set the EDITING soft key to ON siu gt With the upward or downward arrow keys you can select the tool number that you want to edit gt With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can select the tool data that you want to edit gt To exit the tool table press the END key Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC see Modes of Operation page 65 m Working with the tool table see Enter tool data into the table page 150 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Setting up tools gt DOS table editing G Program run full sequence Tool table editing First Steps with the TNC 128 1 6 Workpiece setup 1 6 Workpiece setup Selecting the correct operating mode Workpieces are set up in the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel mode gt Pr
243. eeeceeecceeaeeaeeeeeeeeseeeecesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseseaees 474 TOUCH OPO dalarn A E A I E pattanaeete lanes ase 475 20 4 T E A E A A A 476 OVE W aa E A A E ee en Fee ee meee 476 Setting machine PALAMEtELS cc cece ceeeesecceceeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceesseeeseeeeseeeesesessaeeeeesesseeeseeseseeesenesaee 477 Entries in the tool table TOOL Terraire enuntat aaa aE aiaa a ar aaiae idia 479 20 5 Calibrate the TT Cycle 480 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 ssssessseesseesseeeereeeenee 481 E O eaa E E 481 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccccccecceeeeeeeeceeceeeeteceeecceeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeesecescetecneeeeeeeeeeeseseeseeseeeaees 481 IEP TE O a E AEA A 481 20 6 Calibrate the wireless TT 449 Cycle 484 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software optional e EATE ETE EEN TEAN ANTEE TA TE E EER 482 F rndamental S ti eeii aa a aea a aaa aaa EARE A tine ee EAE a aaea ae 482 SS EA E A A E A E NA A N A A ENE EA 482 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccecececceeeeecee cee ceeeeteceeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeetececceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseesaees 482 GY CIE DAN AMISTO Soins 2i ac since eck EEE EEEE EAEE 482 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 39 Contents 40 20 7 20 8 20 9 Measure the tool length Cycle 481 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software option UZ Sees E sw once rac eer ees cee erates Pe ee crea oer E sets Sandu va gee cae bpe fee E m
244. eeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeecsaeeeeeeceeeeeeecssaeeeeeecaeeeeeeccsaeeeeeecaaeeeesscsaeeeeesssaeeeeeseea 80 Reference system On milling MACHINES cece ccceccceccsteceececssteeeeeecseeeeeescsseeeeesssaeeeeeseseeeeesssaeeeeeess 81 Designation of the axes ON milling MACHINGS cee ceeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeescsseeeeeesesesseeesesstseeeesenssaeeess 81 Absolute and incremental workpiece POSITIONS ccccccc cee ceecee ee ceeeeeeeeeeececeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesteesiseeeeeeeeees 82 SEISCHNG The atu M1 occciatsncsetacassanesatad tenadsaiudeaadasn ddemuneatitan tenadsthaisdanceanedeaetoanieas Eonia NEEE AAR EAEAN 82 32 Opening and entering programms sis eissai rnrn aesae ceed ce ses sock oy EEEE booed ENNEA 84 Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN Conversational format cccccccccscsceeeeesteeeeeeesaaes 84 Detine the blank BLR FOR Maeiennaer NEE EE EEEE 85 Opening a MEW part Prog aM ersscicccsessedewnsdassenbeceasweeddnodasendinnechdeunac esesendsnsadtanaranedeashdcddavanciedtassacdhocsseaes 86 Programming tool movements in CONnVErSatiOnal c ccccccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 87 Actual position CAP UU soree namera a a A ieenarseetiuaies younia AN 89 Editing a progr aM sceitseanna aria nea A aa iea AEEA TA R ERa ai aAA AREAN TEER NEARE ai ceases 90 Tae TNC Sgarch Tune UON a A RE E A EE 93 3 3 File manager Fundamentals aeaee aeaaaee eaae aeee e tees aaee Raa Ee eae e aE e aE EA aE aa
245. eeeeeeeeeeees 76 Actual position capture 89 Adding commente 06 123 Additional axes 00c000 81 81 Adjusting spindle speed 285 Angle functions ccceeees 196 ASCII FiBS ensina 275 Automatic tool measurement 153 479 Axis specific scaling 005 458 Calculating with parentheses 232 Calculation of circles 197 Cal Guild tO inian 125 Centering 395 Circular point patterns 384 Code nNuMbe S 0ccceeeeeeeee 354 Connecting removing USB devices 119 Connector pin layout for data interfaces 500 Context sensitive help 137 Control panel 64 Conversational dialog 87 Coordinate transformation 272 448 CY ClE onena 374 Calli scteisssstebetcsaxiveetinaieteens 376 De fiM Eionn anstiiengn 375 Cycles and point tables 391 DO Data Backuf 000eeeeeee 97 Data interface 355 Connector pin layouts 500 Set UP cccccccccccscccccessseeeeeeeeaes 355 Data output on the screen 210 Data transfer software 359 Data transfer speed 355 356 356 356 356 357 Datum management 287 510 Datum setting 286 Without a 3 D touch probe 286 Datum Shiftessarnnneii 449 In the program 449 Resetting 274 Using the datum table 273 With datum tables 450 Datum table 0ceeeee 298 Transf
246. eeeeeeeeeeseseaees 158 Call TOO Gata E E rotasdsndeid A sab yondbaagnnmeahehea A hesaohlbebad NE 159 WOOW CHANG e455 e552 cecantctceensanacehcdes seumenssvnanaahesds a aa aa nak dance bale e aaa p Eee 161 TOG usage toSt irii races ses ee evbsta n e a ETO Ea O ae E AAE PENE E 161 5 3 Tool compensation E aaa ee eE eaea a Laa aea Ee EE aaee ea aaa a LEASE E Eaa 163 IMr Od UCtiON aena R E AA E A O E E E and 163 Tool length COMPENSATION cccceeccceccece eee eeeeceneecaeeeeeeeeeeeeececaaeaecaeeeeeeeeeneeececcceceesaeeeeeeeeeeeesseesnesiesaeess 163 Tool radius compensation with paraxial positioning DIOCKS ccceeeeeeccee cece cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaees 164 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 19 Contents 20 6 1 6 2 Fumadaimenntals irtccecooccsetcn nzesnivs sve oe cape evens tg taeav ares a E A 168 Tool movements in the PrOGraM cccccceccceeecseeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaeaeeaeeeeeseeeeeseceescaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesensessaeaeeees 168 Miscellaneous FUNCTIONS Mai cccccccccccceessececssseeeececseeeeececcseeeeeesceaeeeesecesseeesceesseeeesesesseeesecstsseeesenenaeess 168 SubprograMs and program SECTION FEPEALtS ccc ccccccecceceseseseeeeeeecesceeccseeseesseeaeeeeeeeeeeseeetttstaeeaes 169 Programming With O parameter Seesen rin einai AAE EEEE a a KENE AEAEE EE REEE 169 TOON MOVEM ENS a R ie cenit rra r aaa RE rre a A EEE EE EE Aet 170 Programming tool movements for work
247. eeeessaeeeeesessaeeeeeeesas 130 A EE E E A conueieceaeceransaaners cn recueeirttes tans gacchonees 131 Display Of er n EAEE EEEE 131 Open the error WINGOW s sicsineden ie i iE EE AAEE AEE EEEE AEEA E ia E 131 Closing the error WINKOW cccccccccceseccececssseeeececseeeeeecceeeeeeecaeeeeescsaeeeeeeceaeeeeescseeeeeeccsaeeeeessnsaeeeeseea 131 Detailed error MESSAGES c cccccceecececceceeccee eee iea TEE EEE AAA EAEE EEEE AETA Aa RETEA 132 INTERNAL INFO Soft keY crsiscsirrersrsiirssnarrnasrsrnasoi ia rnrarsAa RAA Arad AAAs PAEA ANAR SA ARAARA ERAI ARARA ENARE EAA RSEAREA 132 dearing SrO crnca eE E EE E A 133 ROE AE AE E E A EE EEE TE 133 Keystirok Og Saen eee a EE A A EIA AAAA E E AND EO 134 inlormetonal LEXES Ace ccsescnaiianssdanacaubesscniaiedustabdauwusahenahuus Eaa aE EEGA anA EENeti 135 Saving service FICS ccccecccccceeeecececsseeeeececseeeeeeccaeeeecccsaeeeeeseueeeeescsasseeesesseseeesecsseeeesenstsaeescesesaaeess 135 Calling the TNCguide help SYStOM ccccccccccccecssececcecsseeeececcseeeeeecaeeeeescsaseeeeccsaeeeeescsaeeeeeescseeeeeees 136 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 17 Contents 4 7 TNCguide context sensitive help System ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee easeeaeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeseeeneaeeeeees 137 Applicatio Meson na A EE E dae A A A AE E EE ARESA 137 Working with the TNC GUIDE seers ie dacasccausacesiisandiaded Cansuedaecuaviggancdeesimededeeaiaedadeterg
248. eference point has been traversed If your machine is equipped with absolute encoders you can leave out crossing the reference marks In such a case the TNC is ready for operation immediately after the machine control voltage is switched on The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode The reference points need only be crossed if the machine axes are to be moved If you intend only to write edit or test programs you can select the Programming or Test Run mode of operation immediately after switching on the control voltage You can cross the reference points later by pressing the PASS OVER REFERENCE soft key in the Manual Operation mode 280 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Switch off To prevent data from being lost at switch off you need to shut down the operating system of the TNC as follows gt Select the Manual Operation mode van gt Select the function for shutting down confirm is again with the YES soft key gt When the TNC displays the message Now you can switch off Press the END key if you want to restart the control in a pop up window you may cut off the power supply to the TNC Caution Data may be lost Inappropriate switch off of the TNC can lead to data loss Remember that pressing the END key after the control has been shut down restarts the control Switch off during a restart can also result in data loss TNC 128 Us
249. eir respective file type extensions If you enter only the file name for the path of the log file the TNC saves the log file in the directory in which the NC program with the FN 16 function is located You can define a standard path for outputting protocol files via the user parameters fn16DefaultPath and fn16DefaultPathSim Program Test TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 8 8 209 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional functions Displaying messages on the TNC screen You can also use the function FN 16 to display any messages from the NC program in a pop up window on the TNC screen This makes it easy to display explanatory texts including long texts at any point in the program in a way that the user has to react to them You can also display O parameter contents if the protocol description file contains such instructions For the message to appear on the TNC screen you need only enter SCREEN as the name of the protocol file 96 FN 16 F PRINT TNC MASKE MASKE1 A SCREEN If the message has more lines than fit in the pop up window you can use the arrow keys to page in the window To close the pop up window press the CE key To have the program close the window program the following NC block 96 FN 16 F PRINT TNC MASKE MASKE1 A SCLR The FN 16 function overwrites already existing log files with the same name Use M_APPEND if you want to append new log information
250. electing the screen layout J Window Soft key i f Program i EE 7 LS LR ESSE Left program right program structure PROGRAM Lt Ft Pp fm ae SECTS Left program right programming graphics PROGRAM EERE TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 65 Introduction 2 3 Modes of Operation Test Run In the Test Run mode of operation the TNC checks programs and program sections for errors such as geometrical incompatibilities missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the working space This simulation is supported graphically in different display modes Soft keys for selecting the screen layout see Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block page 66 sf 00 01 44 F MAK eo el e lels Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC Tae executes a part program continuously to its end or to a manual ne ice eee or programmed stop You can resume program run after an interruption In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you execute each block separately by pressing the machine START button Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Window Soft key EE s 10 000 Program ee ae Left program right program structure PROGRAM casio Left program right status PROGRAM cache Left pr
251. eleting a directory Caution Data may be lost Once you delete files they cannot be restored gt Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete as gt To select the erasing function press the Z ALL DELETE soft key The TNC inquires whether you really intend to delete the directory and all its subdirectories and files gt To confirm the deletion press the OK soft key or gt To cancel deletion press the CANCEL soft key 106 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 Tagging files Tagging function Soft key Tag a single file a FILE Tag all files in the directory TAG FTLes Untag a single file UNTAG FILE Untag all files UNTAG ALL FILES Some functions such as copying or erasing files can not only be used for individual files but also for several files at once To tag several files proceed as follows gt Move the highlight to the first file gt To display the marking functions press the TAG soft key gt Tag a file by pressing the TAG FILE soft key gt Move the highlight to the next file you wish to tag Only works via soft keys Do not use the arrow keys gt To tag further files press the TAG FILES soft key TAG el FILE etc copy gt Copy the tagged files Press the COPY soft key or laBc gt xvz gt Delete the tagged files Leave the active soft key and then press the DELETE sof
252. enarbnestaesh ne ENEE E EARO 178 74 Any desired program as subprogram ss isere ener eme ccsscensevssoassncxcaseeseenasanse EAE EREA EEE EEE aeea E PAARE ae Erna 179 Operating SEQUENCE icsi siinne eiin i een iE E SEEE EESE EUe A A EEEE EEEREN EEEE EEEa 179 Programming NOTE Sirnea a a aaa E a a Na DERREN iE E 179 Calling any pr gram as a SUDPFOGIAM cccccccccseccececcsteceeeecesneeeeeccseeeeeecsaeeeeeecaeeeeessssieeesesssseesesenaees 180 DD oot E ATITA TE E A ATT 181 Types OT NESUNE EAEan A EAA 181 Nesting depth eieaeoeaii aa a Eana aei EA Eaa a aeae Oa EEEa e ioe 181 Subprogram WITHIN a SUBDBOGIAM s scccseseesssseesass nukia sscerssuenaseeceds vhsddaceed sanedesaussseeaeiib ESEKAN ESENE 182 Repeating program section rePEats ccccceceeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetesteeeees 183 Repeating a SUBPLOGMa Mp2 ctitt i dedeasannscessasetbceonanmeiandan nn ghonmneessuntwinaduusaneaannr stile EAE A EAEE 184 76 Programming examples eeehe cnvevsce cones ces cesende rence seee sence cueeeessiveanlassesssniecsececveeteanscaeesscesee 185 Example Groups Of NOB Sesaras E A REEE AEA AARE AAA EAEE 185 Example Group of holes with several tOOlS c cccccccccccccecssseceeceesteeeeeeecsseeeeeessaeeeeesesseeesessstaeeeeesesaees 187 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 21 Contents 8 1 Principle and overview Of fUNCTIONS cs20 cccccseceeeecanscescescusc
253. enient for simple machining operations or to pre position the tool It enables you to write a short program in HEIDENHAIN conversational programming and execute it immediately You can also call TNC cycles The program is stored in the file MDI In the Positioning with MDI mode of operation the additional status display can also be activated Positioning with manual data input MDI Limitation The following functions are not available in the MDI mode Program section repeats Subprogramming Path compensation The programming graphics Program call PGM CALL The program run graphics gt Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation Program the file MDI as you wish ar gt To start program run press the machine START Ww button 314 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming and executing simple machining operations 12 1 First you pre position the tool with straight line blocks to the hole center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the workpiece surface Then drill the hole with Cycle 200 DRILLING Call the tool tool axis Z spindle speed 2000 rom Retract the tool F MAX rapid traverse Move the tool at F MAX to a position above the hole spindle on Define the DRILLING cycle Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Hole depth algebraic sign working direction Feed rate for drilling Depth of each infeed before retraction Dwell time after every r
254. enseeeeecstseeeescestseeeesesstsseeseeseaaeess 263 Functions for contour and point MACHINING MENU ccccceeeececesssceeceesseseeeceesesseeeeecstsseeeseeesseeeeeeetsaaees 263 Menu of various Conversational FUNCTIONS cc cccceeeccecceeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeceeeseeeeseeessueeseeessaeeeeesesseeeseneaes 264 10 2 Freely definablevtabl es ics co c2cc2scevcewe Secs vscecess dvs svenisve veces eves sucess Svvsceuss sevecuedexsvsvucteis sy suceusd fev edertevevevuntey 265 Fundamental Sine cecatee inene anaE EEE a chearsasaan tech essa atttcesapeneataranedtterechadebarenstantincnncte 265 Creating a freely definable tabs Svc sicsinets caccvmesdeesanddeecsewntetwaneavnetadeshanicemeonietatennaettenshaedae added 265 Editing the table TOMMAL vccusnarachiccanstencnnstandeceswinaniticnesasentneessyoadedeangu taeda wapesiaiausvageated xagatiednwegeoitnavewaginene 266 Switching between table and fOrM VICW cccccccccccccsseceececsseeecescsueeeeeecseaeeeeesssaeeeeeessseeesessssieeeeeesaees 267 FN 26 TABOPEN Open a freely definable table cc ccccccccccccseeceeecssseeeecessseeeeeescseeesesssaeeseneeaees 268 FN 27 TABWRITE Write to a freely definable table ccc cccccccccceceeesseeeseessseeeeessseeeeeessteeeeesenes 269 FN 28 TABREAD Read from a freely definable table cccccccccccccceccsseeeeeecsteeeeeccseeeeessnseeeeesees 270 MOS File FUMOti E A E E T cuccacceced sons E cv E E E T T 271 Application eare E E E A A 271 Defining file fUNCTONS
255. enter the following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL T the approximate radius the approximate length the number of teeth and the cutting direction Cylindrical tools with diamond surfaces can be measured with stationary spindle To do so define in the tool table the number of teeth CUT as 0 and adjust machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement Refer to your machine manual TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 487 Touch probe cycles 20 9 Measure the tool length and radius Cycle 483 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Cycle parameters asa gt Measure tool 0 Check tool 1 Select whether NC blocks the tool is to be measured for the first time or 6 TOOL CALL 12 Z whether a tool that has already been measured is to be inspected If the tool is being measured 7 TCH PROBE 483 MEASURE TOOL for the first time the TNC overwrites the tool Q340 1 CHECK radius R and the tool length L in the central tool file z 7 TOOL T by the delta values DR 0 and DL 0 If AOO TEATAN E HEIGHT you wish to inspect a tool the TNC compares the Q341 1 PROBING THE TEETH measured data with the tool data stored in TOOL T The TNC calculates the deviations and enters them as positive or negative delta values DR and DL in TOOL T The deviations are also available in the Q parameters Q115 and Q116 If the delta values are greater than the permissible tool tolerances for wear or bre
256. equal to the depth m the plunging depth is greater than the depth Dwell time at top Q210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip removal Input range 0 to 3600 0000 Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 Depth reference 0395 Select whether the entered depth is referenced to the tool tip or the cylindrical part of the tool If the TNC is to reference the depth to the cylindrical part of the tool the point angle of the tool must be defined in the T ANGLE column of the tool table TOOL T 0 Depth referenced to the tool tip 1 Depth referenced to the cylindrical part of the tool Q200 Uae LA NC blocks 11 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 15 DEPTH Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 20 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 100 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 1 DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM Q395 0 DEPTH REFERENCE 12 X 30 FMAX 13 Y 20 FMAX M3 M99 14 X 80 FMAX 15 Y 50 FMAX M99 TNC 128 User s Manual HEI
257. er to your machine manual Before calibrating the touch probe you must enter the exact length and radius of the calibrating tool into the tool table TOOL T The TT needs to be recalibrated if you change its position on the table Cycle parameters Cycle 484 has no cycle parameters 482 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Measure the tool length Cycle 481 software option 17 Touch Probe 20 7 Functions software option 17 20 7 Measure the tool length Cycle 481 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Cycle run To measure the tool length program the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 481 Via input parameters you can measure the length of a tool by three methods If the tool diameter is larger than the diameter of the measuring surface of the TT you measure the tool while it is rotating m If the tool diameter is smaller than the diameter of the measuring surface of the TT or if you are measuring the length of a drill or spherical cutter you measure the tool while it is at standstill m lf the tool diameter is larger than the diameter of the measuring surface of the TT you measure the individual teeth of the tool while it is at standstill Cycle for measuring a tool during rotation The control determines the longest tooth of a rotating tool by positioning the tool to be measured at an offset to the center of the touch probe and then moving it toward the measur
258. er a cycle call gt If necessary enter the miscellaneous function M for example M3 to switch the spindle on or end the dialog by pressing the END key Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL PAT The CYCL CALL PAT function calls the most recently defined fixed cycle at all positions that you defined in a PATTERN DEF pattern definition see PATTERN DEF pattern definition page 378 or in a point table see Point tables page 389 376 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with fixed cycles 15 3 Cycle call with M99 M89 The M99 function which is active only in the block in which it is programmed calls the last defined fixed cycle once You can program M99 at the end of a positioning block The TNC moves to this position and then calls the last defined fixed cycle If the TNC is to run the cycle automatically after every positioning block program the first cycle call with M89 To cancel the effect of M89 program m M99 in the positioning block in which you move to the last starting point or m Use CYCL DEF to define a new fixed cycle TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 377 Cycle fundamentals 15 4 PATTERN DEF pattern definition 15 4 PATTERN DEF pattern definition Application You use the PATTERN DEF function to easily define regular machining patterns which you can call with the CYCL CALL PAT function As with the cycle definitions support
259. er functions Press the Q key E gt Select the mathematical functions Press the BASIC ARITHM ARITHMETIC soft key gt Select the Q parameter function ASSIGN Press the FNO X Y soft key PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT m gt 12 Enter the Q parameter number and confirm with the ENT key FIRST VALUE PARAMETER a gt Enter 10 Assign the numerical value 10 to Q5 and confirm with the ENT soft key Example 2 La gt Select the Q parameter functions Press the Q key ans gt Select the mathematical functions Press the ARITHM BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key gt To select the Q parameter function MULTIPLICATION press the FN3 X Y soft key PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT an gt 12 Enter the Q parameter number and confirm with the ENT key FIRST VALUE PARAMETER E gt Enter Q5 as the first value and confirm with the ENT key SECOND VALUE PARAMETER ae gt Enter 7 as the second value and confirm with the ENT key TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Program blocks in the TNC 16 FN 0 Q5 10 17 FN 3 Q12 Q5 7 8 3 195 Programming Q Parameters 8 4 Angle functions 8 4 Angle functions Definitions Sine sinad a c Cosine cosa b c Tangent tana a b sina cosa c where cis the side opposite the right angle ee A m ais the side opposite the angle a b m bis the third side The TNC can find the angle from the tangent a arctan a b arctan sin a co
260. er s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Switch on switch off 11 1 281 Manual operation and setup 11 2 Moving the machine axes 11 2 Moving the machine axes Note T Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons can vary depending on the machine tool Refer to 4 your machine manual Refer to your machine manual Moving the axis with the machine axis direction buttons A gt Select the Manual Operation mode X gt Press the machine axis direction button and hold it as long as you wish the axis to move or gt Move the axis continuously Press and hold the z machine axis direction button then press the machine START button a fol gt Stop the axis Press the machine STOP button f You can move several axes at a time with these two methods You can change the feed rate at which the axes are traversed with the F soft key see Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M page 284 Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a preset distance gt Select the Manual Operation or El Handwheel mode of operation gt Shift the soft key row gt Select incremental jog positioning Switch the INCREMENT soft key to ON JOG INCREMENT ne gt Enter the jog increment in mm and confirm with the ENT key gt Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired gt The maximum
261. er s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 141 Programming Programming aids 4 7 TNCguide context sensitive help system Downloading current help files You ll find the help files for your TNC software on the HEIDENHAIN homepage www heidenhain de under gt Documentation and information Documentation User Documentation TNCguide Select the desired language TNC Controls Series e g TNC 100 Desired NC software number e g TNC 128 77184x 01 Select the desired language version from the TNCguide online help table Download the ZIP file and unpack it gt Move the unzipped CHM files to the TNC in the TNC tncguide en directory or into the respective language subdirectory see also the following table vvvvrvvvyy v If you want to use TNCremo to transfer the chm files to the TNC then in the Extras gt Configuration gt Mode gt Transfer in binary format menu item you have to enter the extension CHM 142 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 TNCguide context sensitive help system Language TNC directory German TNC tncguide de English TNC tncguide en Czech TNC tncguide cs French TNC tncguide fr Italian TNC tncguide it Spanish TNC tncguide es Portuguese TNC tncguide pt Swedish TNC tncguide sv Danish TNC tncguide da Finnish TNC tncguide fi Dutch TNC tncguide nl Polish TNC tncguide pl Hungarian TNC tncguide
262. ering the fourth point save the block with the END key yer gt Display the menu for defining the cycle call a HJ TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 100 90 10 4 10 20 Programming 1 3 80 90 100 51 1 _ First Steps with the TNC 128 1 3 Programming the first part Run the drilling cycle on the defined pattern Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Miscellaneous function M Switch on the spindle and coolant e g M13 Confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Enter Retract the tool Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp R R no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Miscellaneous function M Enter M2 to end the program and confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block vv Ls v 5 3 a3 o Z O z o o G Further information on this topic Creating a new program see Opening and entering programs page 84 Cycle programming Cycle fundamentals see Cycle fundamentals page 371 Ol 2 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming
263. erring test results 298 Deepened starting point with ae AEE 413 415 Defining local Q parameters 192 Defining nonvolatile Q parameters 192 Defining the workpiece blank 86 DialO Osores ie anena 87 DIEGO Yinsenin anas 98 102 COPY PA E E 104 ChE Ate eE 102 Delete erreen 106 Displaying HTML files 112 Displaying Internet files 112 Display SCreeN c eee 63 Downloading help files 142 DV IMIAG scexevseseseoarsdeers 397 404 410 Deepened starting point 413 415 Drilling Cycles 394 Dwell time ceeeeeeeeeeeees 465 a eel Enter spindle speed 159 Error messages 131 131 Help WIth 0c ceeceeeeeeeeeeees 131 Ethernet interface 361 Configuring ssssssrsrsssrrrnrsrsrrssa 361 Connecting and disconnecting network drives 118 Connection options 361 Introduction 361 External ACCESS 349 External data transfer TNC 580 cccceecesteceeeeenaees 116 PSS SS FG EE P 354 FCL PUNCUON iscssiscsitrnisrsiisanirns 9 Feature Content Level 9 Feed rate 284 AdJUS Tisina 285 Input OptionS s s s 88 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 08 257 Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 0 ee 258 File Create ierre 102 File fUnNCtONS eesrei rn 271 File Manager 95 9 o ET E TT 100 Copying files 102 Copying tables 008 104 Delet
264. es at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle 256 17 3 Cycle parameters 256 gt Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define a machining operation Y 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only machined when the specific allowance 0368 0369 is defined gt 1st side length Q218 Stud length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece blank side length 1 0424 Length of 0368 X the stud blank parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Enter Workpiece blank side length 1 greater than 1st side length The TNC performs multiple stepovers if the difference between blank dimension 1 and finished dimension 1 is greater than the permitted stepover tool radius multiplied by path overlap Q370 The TNC always calculates a constant stepover Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Y Y gt 2nd side length 0219 Stud length parallel to the 0367 3 0367 4 minor axis of the working plane Enter Workpiece blank side length 2 greater than 2nd side length h 0425 The TNC performs multiple stepovers if the 7 difference between blank dimension 2 and finished dimension 2 is greater than the permitted stepover y tool radius multiplied by path overlap
265. es the following views m Plan view m Projection in three planes m 3 D view In the Test Run operating mode you can also use the 3 D line graphics The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined with a cylindrical end mill If a tool table is active the TNC also considers the entries in the LCUTS FANGLE and R2 columns The TNC will not show a graphic if m the current program has no valid workpiece blank definition m no program is selected m if the BLK FORM block was not yet executed during the workpiece blank definition with the aid of a subprogram 318 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Speed of the Setting test runs gt The most recently set speed stays active until a power interruption After the control is switched on the speed is set to FMAX After you have started a program the TNC displays the following soft keys with which you can set the simulation speed Functions Soft key Perform the test run at the same speed at which rer the program will be run programmed feed rates are taken into account Increase the simulation speed incrementally EN Decrease the simulation speed incrementally rw Test run at the maximum possible speed default max au setting Q You can also set the simulation speed before you start a program gt Select the function for setting the simulation IN speed IEN g
266. es the index and creates a list in which you can find the subject more easily or gt Use the arrow key to highlight the desired keyword gt Use the ENT key to call the information on the selected keyword be aastrnng rT ven vere yten zu ooranaten cya 7 ULLARO 2B SPEGELN spun 10 BERKE ncn Thaw sO car Tone DAAA THEE TUNGSEEENE watson ve Wetererfomaioney zu Tastysen Tabete fren Se i Benutzer Harchuch Ziereroganmienng serre t serte t zur ck voruners gt ral EAE D gt You can enter the search word only with a keyboard connected via USB 140 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 TNCguide context sensitive help system 4 7 Full text search In the Find tab you can search the entire TNCguide for a specific word The left side is active gt Select the Find tab gt Activate the Find input field gt Enter the desired word and confirm with the ENT key The TNC lists all sources containing the word gt Use the arrow key to highlight the desired source gt Press the ENT key to go to the selected source You can enter the search word only with a keyboard connected via USB The full text search only works for single words If you activate the Search only in titles function by mouse or by selecting it and then pressing the space key the TNC searches only through headings and ignores the body text TNC 128 Us
267. es the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to the starting position At the end of a roughing operation the TNC positions the tool back to the pocket center at rapid traverse The tool is above the current pecking depth by the set up clearance Enter the set up clearance so that the tool cannot jam because of chips At the end the TNC positions the tool back to the set up clearance or to the 2nd set up clearance if one was programmed TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 429 P Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud milling 430 17 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 17 2 Cycle parameters 251 gt Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only machined when the specific allowanc
268. ess the operating mode key The TNC switches to the Manual mode of operation Further information on this topic Manual Operation mode see Moving the machine axes page 282 Clamping the workpiece Mount the workpiece with a fixture on the machine table so that it is fixed with its edges parallel to the machine axes 58 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Workpiece setup Datum setting with 3 D touch probe software option 17 Touch Probe Functions gt Insert a 3 D touch probe In the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode run a TOOL CALL block containing the tool axis and then return to the Manual Operation mode TOUCH gt Select the probing functions The TNC displays the rive available functions in the soft key row PROBING gt Select the function for setting the datum e g a PROBE POSITION gt Position the touch probe near the first touch point on the first workpiece edge gt Select the probing direction via soft key gt Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Then the TNC displays the coordinates of the measured position DATUM gt To set to 0 Press the SET DATUM soft key SET gt Press the END soft key to close the menu gt Repeat this procedure for all axes in which you want to set the datum Further information on this topic Datum sett
269. et available on your TNC it automatically opens the English version The following user documentation is available in the TNCguide Conversational Programming User s Manual BHBKlartext chm DIN ISO User s Manual BHBIso chm User s Manual for Cycle Programming BHBtchprobe chm List of All Error Messages errors chm In addition the main chm book file is available with the contents of all existing chm files As an option your machine tool builder can embed machine specific documentation in the TNCguide These documents then appear as a separate book in the main chm file TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 137 Programming Programming aids 4 7 TNCguide context sensitive help system Working with the TNCguide Calling the TNCguide There are several ways to start the TNCguide gt Press the HELP key if the TNC is not already showing an error message gt Click the help symbol at the lower right of the screen beforehand then click the appropriate soft keys gt Use the file manager to open a help file chm file The TNC can open any chm file even if it is not saved on the TNC s internal memory Wen nigah no oyes must be ache fr coorrate varsoratio Oye 7 DATUM yee 8 Mion nie Cys 0 ROTATE chow 1 20 SALT ar Oae tS WORN ARE mE Formere nfomion abut the ou probe tie reter to Me Une Manu fr Cycle Programming If one or more error messages are waiting for your
270. etraction in seconds Coordinate of the workpiece surface Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Dwell time in seconds at the hole bottom Call the DRILLING cycle Retract the tool End of program DRILLING cycle see page 397 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 315 Positioning with Manual Data Input 12 1 Programming and executing simple machining operations Protecting and erasing programs in MDI The MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only needed temporarily Nevertheless you can store a program if necessary by proceeding as described below gt Select the Programming mode of operation gt Call the file manager Press the PGM MGT key gt Move the highlight to the MD file COPY gt Copy a file Press the COPY soft key aBc xyz DESTINATION FILE gt Enter the name under which you want to save the current contents of the MDI file e g HOLE gt Press the OK soft key gt Close the file manager Press the END soft key More information see Copying a single file page 102 316 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Test run and program run 13 1 Graphics 13 1 Graphics Application In the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes as well as in the Test Run operating mode the TNC simulates the machining of the workpiece The TNC featur
271. ew After switch on the TNC displays the Overview status form provided that you have selected the PROGRAM STATUS screen Se ee layout or POSITION STATUS The overview form contains a es p ie joe summary of the most important status information which you can Ree o eee e mem also find on the various detail forms eee ee soe Soft key Meaning fo kann y TER Position display S Emen OVERVIEW l E arg 0 000 Tool information ac Active M functions NeR me slz Status displays 2 4 EQproaram run full sequence A 1 ence BP rooraming Active coordinate transformations Active subprogram Active program section repeat Program called with PGM CALL Current machining time Name of the active main program General program information PGM tab Soft key No direct selection possible Meaning Name of the active main program Dwell time counter Machining time Active programs TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 EXeroaram run full sequence Programing er IN EA eA orita Thics niesprog azeuh overview rau La ove Ju ros Toot r trans arana E 7 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 2 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 x 00 Y 100 240 le 5 TOOL CALL 15 z szooo E 24100 RO FWAX MS si 5x30 AD FMX
272. f Operation Manual Operation and El Handwheel The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine Modes of Opera tion 2 3 i i kre a BProoramino sr tool In this mode of operation you can position the machine axes manually or by increments and set the datums Position display MODE NOML zvzew Pou LaL ove u Pos TOOL TT The El Handwheel mode of operation allows you to move the a machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel 500 000 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout select as described E previously Window Soft key Si mr Positions ee ay EREB ABs TOUCH PRESET TOOL M s aoe ae Tig Left positions right status display POSITION STATUS Positioning with Manual Data Input This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing movements such as for face milling or prepositioning Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Window Soft key Left program blocks right status display PROGRAM STATUS Programming In this mode of operation you can write your part programs Doran the various cycles and the O parameter functions help you with Tae eae sen programming and add necessary information If desired you can iS 1 have the programming graphics show the programmed paths of PR ee traverse i i Soft keys for s
273. f you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface 404 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 16 6 Cycle parameters aD Set up clearance 0200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 0 to 99999 9999 The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if m the plunging depth is equal to the depth m the plunging depth is greater than the depth and no chip breaking is defined Dwell time at top Q210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip removal Input range 0 to 3600 0000 C
274. factor 0401 Factor by which the TNC reduces the feed rate after the dwell depth has been reached Input range O to 100 gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Decrement 0212 incremental Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 after each infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Minimum plunging depth 0205 incremental If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 416 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming Examples 16 10 16 10 Programming Examples Example Drilling cycles 10 20 80 90 100 0 BEGIN PGM C200 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Definition of workpiece blank 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S4500 Tool call tool radius 3 4 Z 250 RO FMAX Retract the tool 5 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 15 DEPTH Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 10 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 20 32ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 2 DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM Q395 0 DEPTH REFERENCE 6 X 10 RO FMAX M3 Approach hole 1 spindle ON 7 Y 10 RO FMAX M99 Approach hole 1 call cycle 8 X 90 RO FMAX M99 Approach hole 2 call cycle 9 Y 90 RO FMAX M99 Approach
275. ffective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display The scaling factor has an effect on all three coordinate axes at the same time Dimensions in cycles Prerequisite It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the contour before enlarging or reducing the contour Enlargement SCL greater than 1 up to 99 999 999 Reduction SCL less than 1 down to 0 000 001 Resetting Program the SCALING cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 Cycle parameters 1 gt Scaling factor Enter the scaling factor SCL The P TNC multiplies the coordinates and radii by the SCL factor as described under Effect above Input range 0 000001 to 99 999999 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 SCALING Cycle 11 NC blocks 11 CALL LBL 1 12 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM 13 CYCL DEF 7 1 X 60 14 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 40 15 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING 16 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 75 17 CALL LBL 1 18 6 457 Cycles Coordinate Transformations 18 7 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 18 7 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 Effect With Cycle 26 you can account for shrinkage and oversize factors for each axis SCALING becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor
276. file in its own application using the Xarchiver additional tool Sa return to the TNC user interface while leaving the m archive file open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface If you position the mouse pointer over a button a brief tooltip explaining the function of this button will gt With the key combination ALT TAB you can always be displayed More information on how to use the Xarchiver function is provided under Help Please note that the TNC does not carry out any binary to ASCII conversion or vice versa when compressing or decompressing NC programs and NC tables When such files are transferred to TNC controls using other software versions the TNC may not be able to read them To exit Xarchiver proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the Archive menu item gt Select the menu item Quit The TNC returns to the file manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the Xarchiver Li gt Press the key for switching the soft keys The Xarchiver opens the Archive pull down menu gt Select the Quit menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 113 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Displaying and editin
277. finable tables 10 2 FN 27 TABWRITE Write to a freely definable table After you have opened a table with FN 26 TABOPEN you can use the function FN 27 TABWRITE to write to it You can define and write to several column names in a TABWRITE block The column names must be written between quotation marks and separated by a comma You define the values that the TNC is to write to the respective column with Q parameters Example Note that by default the FN 27 TABWRITE function writes values to the currently open table also in the Test Run mode The FN18 ID992 NR16 function enables you to query in which operating mode the program is to be run If the FN27 function is to be run only in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes you can skip the respective program section by using a jump command page 198 You can write only to numerical table fields If you wish to write to more than one column in a block you must save the values under successive Q parameter numbers You wish to write to the columns Radius Depth and D in line 5 of the presently opened table The value to be written in the table must be saved in the Q parameters Q5 Q6 and Q7 53 Q5 3 75 54 Q6 5 55 Q7 7 5 56 FN 27 TABWRITE 5 RADIUS DEPTH D Q5 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 269 Programming Special functions 10 2 Freely definable tables FN 28 T
278. ft key The TNC copies the selected directory and all its subdirectories to the selected target directory 104 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 Choosing one of the last files selected gt Call the file manager E oo rogramming EOE BSF ES PLC f t Fite nam Bytes Status Date Time gt To display the 10 files last selected Press the es ETE TEET FILES Ba TNC nc_prog H LAST FILES soft key EE tp iandien aa Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to BR 2 10 41 26 1 1 1 1 1 3 08 51 09 gt Moves the highlight up and down within a window EE ame Ff 54 file s 198 18 GB vacan t jal m copy FIELD PASTE FIELD gt To select a file Press the OK soft key or n gt a D oO O ct ra gt Press the ENT key TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 105 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Deleting a file Caution Data may be lost Once you delete files they cannot be restored gt Move the highlight to the file you want to delete DELETE gt To select the erasing function Press the DELETE Kn soft key The TNC asks whether you really want to delete the file gt To confirm deletion press the OK soft key or gt To interrupt deletion Press the CANCEL soft key D
279. g 5 2014 411 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 Cycle parameters 205 44 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 0 to 99999 9999 The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if m the plunging depth is equal to the depth m the plunging depth is greater than the depth gt Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Decrement 0212 incremental Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Minimum plunging depth 0205 incremental If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Upper advanced stop distance 0258
280. g Subprograms and Program Section Repeats page 174 If it is not fulfilled the TNC continues with the next block To call another program as a subprogram enter a PGM CALL program call after the block with the target label Unconditional jumps An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump whose condition is always true Example FN 9 IF 10 EQU 10 GOTO LBL1 Programming if then decisions Press the JUMP soft key to call the if then conditions The TNC then displays the following soft keys Function Soft key FN 9 IF EQUAL JUMP a e g FN 9 IF Q1 EQU Q3 GOTO LBL See UPCAN25 If both values or parameters are equal jump to specified label FN 9 IF UNDEFINED JUMP of e g FN 9 IF Q1 IS UNDEFINED GOTO LBL WEES UPCAN25 Is UNDEFINED If the given parameter is undefined jump to the specified label FN 9 IF DEFINED JUMP a e g FN 9 IF Q1 IS DEFINED GOTO LBL oo UPCAN25 If the given parameter is defined jump to the specified label FN 10 IF NOT EQUAL TO JUMP FNie e g FN 10 IF 10 NE Q5 GOTO LBL 10 ee If both values or parameters are not equal jump to specified label FN 11 IF GREATER JUMP FINI e g FN 11 IF Q1 GT 10 GOTO LBL 5 T If the first value or parameter is greater than the second value or parameter jump to specified label FN 12 IF SMALLER JUMP TEE e g FN 12 IF Q5 LT 0 GOTO LBL ANYNAME ee If the first value or paramete
281. g from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the tool retracts at feed rate for plunging Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 999 Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 Q214 Determine the direction in which the TNC retracts the tool on the hole bottom after spindle orientation 0 Do not retract the tool 1 Retract the tool in minus direction of the principle axis 2 Retract the tool in minus direction of the minor axis 3 Retract the tool in plus direction of the principle axis 4 Retract the tool in plus direction of the minor axis Angle for spindle orientation 0336 absolute Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before retracting it Input range 360 000 to 360 000 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 BORING Cycle 202 50 16 5 20 10 Z 100 RO FMAX 11 CYCL DEF 202 BORING Q200 2 Q201 15 Q206 100 Q211 0 5 Q208 250 Q203 20 Q204 100 Q214 1 Q336 0 SET UP CLEARANCE DEPTH FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM RETRACTION FEED RATE SURFACE COORDINATE 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE DISENGAGING DIRECTN sANGLE OF SPINDLE 12 X 30 FMAX
282. g text files To open and edit text files ASCII files e g with the extension txt use the internal text editor Proceed as follows gt Call the file manager Select the drive and the directory in which the text file is saved gt Move the highlight to the text file gt Press the ENT key The TNC opens the text file with the internal text editor the Leafpad additional tool The shortcuts you are familiar with from Windows which you can use to edit texts quickly CTRL C CTRL V are available within Leafpad With the key combination ALT TAB you can always return to the TNC user interface while leaving the text file open Alternatively you can also click the gt Alternatively you can also open the ASCII files using corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface To open Leafpad proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the Menu HEIDENHAIN icon from the task bar gt Select the Tools and Leafpad menu items in the pull down menu To exit Leafpad proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Quit The TNC returns to the file manager 114 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 Displaying graphic files To open graphics files with the extension bmp gif jog or png directly on the TNC proceed as follows gt Call the file manager gt
283. ge missing Traverse reference points The Retraction operating mode offers the following modes of traverse Mode Function Machine axes Movement of all axes in the original coordinate system Tool axis Movements of the tool axis in the active coordinate system Thread Movements of the tool axis in the active coordinate system with compensating movement of the spindle Effective parameters Thread pitch and direction of rotation The TNC selects the mode of traverse and the associated parameters automatically If the traverse mode or the parameters were not correctly chosen you can change them manually Danger of collision For nonreferenced axes the TNC adopts the most recently saved axis values These values generally are not the exact actual axis positions As a result for example the tool might not move exactly along the actual tool direction If the tool is still in contact with the workpiece it can cause stress or damage to the tool and workpiece Stress or damage to the workpiece or tool can also be caused by uncontrolled coasting or braking of axes after a power interruption Move the axes carefully if the tool is still in contact with the workpiece Set the feed rate override to the smallest values possible If you use the handwheel use a small feed rate factor The traverse range monitoring is not available for nonreferenced axes Observe the axes while you move them Do not move to the limits of traverse
284. ght screen half If you do not wish to have the TNC generate graphics during programming set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF Even when AUTO DRAW ON is active graphics are not generated for program section repeats Generating a graphic for an existing program gt Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the graphic to be generated or press GOTO and enter the desired block number RESET gt To generate graphics press the RESET START START soft key Additional functions Function Soft key Generate a complete graphic RESET ae Generate programming graphic blockwise START SINGLE Generate a complete graphic or complete it after RESET START START Stop the programming graphics This soft key only appears while the TNC is generating the interactive graphics STOP EE 128 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming graphics 4 5 Block number display ON OFF gt Shift the soft key row See picture gt To show block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NO soft key to SHOW gt To omit block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NO soft key to OMIT Erasing the graphic gt Shift the soft key row See picture aun gt To erase the graphic Press the CLEAR GRAPHIC GRAPHICS soft key Showing grid lines gt Shift the soft key row See picture gt Show grid lines Press the Show grid lines soft OFF key
285. graphics that illustrate the respective input parameter are also available for pattern definitions PATTERN DEF is to be used only in connection with the tool axis Z J The following machining patterns are available Machining patterns Soft key Page POINT POINT 379 Definition of up to any 9 machining positions ROW ROU 379 Definition of a single row straight or a rotated PATTERN PATTERN 381 Definition of a single pattern HH straight rotated or distorted FRAME 382 Definition of a single frame straight rotated or distorted CIRCLE CIRCLE 383 Definition of a full circle se PITCH CIRCLE PITCH CIR 383 Definition of a pitch circle oe Entering PATTERN DEF gt Select the Programming mode of operation a el SPEC gt Press the special functions key CONTOUR gt Select the functions for contour and point POINT oe MACHINING machinin g gt Open a PATTERN DEF block ROW gt Select the desired machining pattern e g a single ro gt Enter the required definitions and confirm each entry with the ENT key i 78 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 PATTERN DEF pattern definition 15 4 Using PATTERN DEF As soon as you have entered a pattern definition you can call it with the CYCL CALL PAT function Calling a cycle page 376 The TNC then performs the most recently defined machining cyc
286. h infinitely variable spindle drive 285 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Manual operation and setup 11 4 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe 11 4 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe Note gt Setting the datum with a 3 D touch probe see Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 page 305 You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates of a known position on the workpiece Preparation gt Clamp and align the workpiece gt Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle gt Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual position values Workpiece presetting with axis keys Protective measure If the workpiece surface must not be scratched you can lay a metal shim of known thickness d on it Then enter a tool axis datum value that is larger than the desired datum by the value d A gt Select the Manual Operation mode Xt gt Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the workpiece surface Y Z Z gt Select the axis DATUM SETTING Z o gt Zero tool in spindle axis Set the display to a known workpiece position here 0 or enter the thickness d of the shim In the tool axis offset the tool radius Repeat the process for the remaining axes If you are using a preset tool set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the
287. he help system shows you the same error explanation that you receive by pressing the HELP soft key If your machine manufacturer also provides a help system the TNC shows an additional MACHINE MANUFACTURER soft key with which you can call this separate help system There you will find further more detailed information on the error message concerned 136 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 TNCguide context sensitive help system 4 7 4 7 TNCguide context sensitive help system Application gt Before you can use the TNCguide you need to download the help files from the HEIDENHAIN home page see page 142 The TNCguide context sensitive help system includes the user documentation in HTML format The TNCguide is called with the HELP key and the TNC often immediately displays the information specific to the condition from which the help was called context sensitive call Even if you are editing an NC block and press the HELP key you are usually brought to the exact place in the documentation that describes the corresponding function oan oye 8 nA RO eee IRERE O m For more information abut the touch probe tate reter to Me Une Man for Cycle Programing DIRECTORY Og alse The TNC always tries to start the TNCguide in the language that you have selected as the conversational language on your TNC If the files with this language are not y
288. he TNC provides the following coordinate transformation cycles Cycle Soft key Page 7 DATUM z 449 For shifting contours directly within the program or from datum tables 247 DATUM SETTING 247 455 Datum setting during program run LE a 8 MIRRORING 3 456 Mirroring contours a2 11 SCALING FACTOR E 457 Increasing or reducing the size of contours 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING 25 cc 458 Increasing or reducing the size of contours with axis specific scaling Effect of coordinate transformations Beginning of effect A coordinate transformation becomes effective as soon as it is defined it is not called separately It remains in effect until it is changed or canceled To cancel coordinate transformations Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value such as scaling factor 1 0 m Execute a miscellaneous function M2 M30 or an END PGM block depending on machine parameter clearMode Select a new program 448 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 18 2 18 2 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 Effect A DATUM SHIFT allows machining operations to be repeated at various locations on the workpiece When the DATUM SHIFT cycle is defined all coordinate data is based on the new datum The TNC displays the datum shift in each axis in the additional status display Input of rotary axes is also permitted Resetting Program a da
289. he function described must be considered This symbol indicates that there is one or more of the following risks when using the described function m Danger to workpiece Danger to fixtures Danger to tool Danger to machine Danger to operator This symbol indicates a possibly dangerous situation that may cause injuries if not avoided This symbol indicates that the described function must be adapted by the machine tool builder The function described may therefore vary depending on the machine This symbol indicates that you can find detailed information about a function in another manual Would you like any changes or have you found any errors We are continuously striving to improve our documentation for you Please help us by sending your requests to the following e mail address tnc userdoc heidenhain de 6 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 TNC model software and features TNC model software and features This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of the following NC software numbers TNC model NC software number TNC 128 771841 02 The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may therefore not be among the features provided by the TNC on your machine tool TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include m Probing functi
290. he highlight to the Internet file ae gt Press ENT The TNC opens the Internet file in its own application using the Mozilla Firefox additional tool With the key combination ALT TAB you can always return to the TNC user interface while leaving the PDF file open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface If you position the mouse pointer over a button a brief tooltip explaining the function of this button will be displayed More information on how to use Mozilla Firefox is provided under Help To exit Mozilla Firefox proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Quit The TNC returns to the file manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the Mozilla Firefox gt gt Press the key for switching the soft keys The Mozilla Firefox opens the File pull down menu gt Select the Quit menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager 112 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 Working with ZIP archives To open ZIP archives with the extension zip directly on the TNC EE FTE proceed as follows ieee ese gt Call the file manager TE gt Select the directory in which the archive file is saved gt Move the highlight to the archive file gt Press ENT The TNC opens the archive
291. he machine tool builder adapts the features of the filter function to the requirements of your machine Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual 154 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tooldata 5 2 Hiding or sorting the tool table columns You can adapt the layout of the tool table to your needs Columns that should not be displayed can be hidden gt Press the SORT HIDE COLUMNS soft key fourth soft key row gt Select the appropriate column name with the arrow key gt Press the HIDE COLUMN soft key to remove this column from the table layout You can also modify the sequence of columns in the table gt You can also modify the sequence of columns in the table with the Move to dialog The entry highlighted in Displayed columns is moved in front of this column You can use a connected mouse or the TNC keyboard to navigate in the form Navigation using the TNC keyboard gt Press the navigation keys to go to the input fields Use the arrow keys to navigate within an input field To open pop down menus press the GOTO key With the Fix number of columns function you can define how many columns 0 3 are fixed to the left screen edge These columns are also displayed if you navigate in the table to the right TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 155 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Opening any other tool table gt Selec
292. he material TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 407 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 Danger of collision Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation Set the angle so that the tool tip is parallel to a coordinate axis Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves away from the edge of the hole 408 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 BACK BORING Cycle 204 16 7 Cycle parameters zoa gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Depth of counterbore 0249 incremental Distance between underside of workpiece and the top of the hole A positive sign means the hole will be bored in the positive spindle axis direction Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Material thickness 0250 incremental Thickness of the workpiece Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 gt Off center distance 0251 incremental Off center distance for the boring bar value from tool data sheet Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 gt Tool edge height 0252 incremental Distance between the underside of the boring bar and the main cutting tooth value from tool data sheet Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 gt Feed ra
293. he program by one screen o m 0 H 2 Go to the start of the program Go to the end of the program k o TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 329 Test run and program run 13 4 Test Run 13 4 Test Run Application In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and program sections to reduce programming errors during program run The TNC checks the programs for the following Geometrical incompatibilities Missing data Impossible jumps m Violation of the machine s working space The following functions are also available Blockwise test run Interruption of test at any block Optional block skip Functions for graphic simulation Measure machining time Additional status display Danger of collision The TNC cannot graphically simulate all traverse motions actually performed by the machine These include Traverse motions during tool change if the machine manufacturer defined them in a tool change macro or via the PLC Positioning movements that the machine manufacturer defined in an M function macro Positioning movements that the machine manufacturer performs via the PLC HEIDENHAIN therefore recommends proceeding with caution for every new program even when the program test did not output any error message and no visible damage to the workpiece occurred After a tool call the TNC always starts a program test at the following position
294. he workpiece cuboid defines the coordinate system for input Its datum lies within the traverse range cuboid For a test run it normally does not matter where the workpiece blank is located within the working space However if you activate working space monitoring you must graphically shift the workpiece blank so that it lies within the working space Use the soft keys shown in the table You can also activate the current datum for the Test Run operating mode see the following table Function n oft keys Shift workpiece blank in positive negative X direction ie Shift workpiece blank in positive negative Y direction a Shift workpiece blank in positive negative Z direction ct Ae Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum Switch monitoring function on or off SW limit monitoring gt Note that even with BLK FORM CYLINDER a cuboid is shown in the working space as workpiece blank 328 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Functions for program display 13 3 13 3 Functions for program display Overview In the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence modes of operation the TNC displays the following soft keys for displaying a part program in pages Functions Soft key Go back in the program by one screen Go forward in t
295. hine T manual Refer to your machine manual TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 353 MOD functions 14 8 Software numbers 14 8 Software numbers Application The following software numbers are displayed on the TNC screen after the Software version MOD function has been selected Control model Designation of the control managed by HEIDENHAIN NC SW Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN m NCK Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN PLC SW Number and name of the PLC software managed by your machine tool builder In the FCL information MOD function the TNC shows the following information Development level FCL Feature Content Level Development level of the software installed on the control see Feature Content Level upgrade functions page 9 14 9 Entering the code number Application The TNC requires a code number for the following functions Function Code number Selecting user parameters 123 Configuring an Ethernet card NET123 Enabling special functions for Q parameter 555343 programming 354 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Setting up data interfaces 14 10 14 10 Setting up data interfaces Serial interfaces on the TNC 128 The TNC 128 automatically uses the LSV2 transmission protocol for serial data transfer The LSV2 protocol is permanent and cannot be changed except for setting the ba
296. hole 3 call cycle 10 X 10 RO FMAX M99 Approach hole 4 call cycle 11 Z 250 RO FMAX M2 Retract the tool end program 12 END PGM C200 MM TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 417 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 10 Programming Examples Example Using drilling cycles in connection with PATTERN DEF The drill hole coordinates are stored in the pattern y definition PATTERN DEF POS and are called by the TNC S with CYCL CALL PAT 100 The tool radii are selected so that all work steps can be a seen in the test graphics i Program sequence 55 Centering tool radius 4 m Drilling tool radius 2 4 m Tapping tool radius 3 i 10 1020 40 80 90 100 O BEGIN PGM 1 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Definition of workpiece blank 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Y 0 3 TOOL CALL 1 Z 5000 Call the centering tool tool radius 4 4 Z 10 RO F5000 Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F the TNC positions to the clearance height after every cycle 5 PATTERN DEF Define all drilling positions in the point pattern POS1 X 10 Y 10 Z 0 POS2 X 40 Y 30 Z 0 POS3 X 20 Y 55 Z 0 POS4 X 10 Y 90 Z 0 POS5 X 90 Y 90 Z 0 POS6 X 80 Y 65 Z 0 POS7 X 80 Y 30 Z 0 POS8 X 90 Y 10 Z 0 6 CYCL DEF 240 CENTERING Cycle definition CENTERING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q343 0 SELECT DEPTH DIA Q201 2 DEPTH Q344 10 DIAMETER Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
297. hu Russian TNC tncguide ru Chinese simplified TNC tncguide zh Chinese traditional TNC tncguide zh tw Slovenian software option TNC tncguide sl Norwegian TNC tncguide no Slovak TNC tncguide sk Korean TNC tncguide kr Turkish TNC tncguide tr Romanian TNC tncguide ro TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 4 7 143 Programming Tools 5 1 Entering tool related data 5 1 Entering tool related data Feed rate F The feed rate F is the speed in millimeters per minute or inches per minute at which the tool center point moves The maximum feed rates can be different for the individual axes and are set in machine parameters Input You can enter the feed rate in the TOOL CALL block and in every positioning block In millimeterprograms you enter the feed rate in mm min and in inch programs for reasons of resolution in 1 10 inch min Rapid traverse If you wish to program rapid traverse enter F MAX To enter FMAX press the ENT key or the FMAX soft key when the dialog question FEED RATE F appears on the control s screen To move your machine at rapid traverse you can also program the corresponding numerical value e g F30000 Unlike FMAX this rapid traverse remains in effect not only in the individual block but in all blocks until you program a new feed rate Duration of effect A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect
298. ication The O parameters listed below enable you to program basic mathematical functions in a part program gt Select a O parameter function Press the Q key in the numerical keypad at right The Q parameter f displayed in a soft key row gt Select the mathematical functions Press the unctions are BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Overview Function FN 0 ASSIGN e g FN 0 Q5 60 Directly assign value Soft key FN 1 ADDITION e g FN 1 Q1 Q2 5 Form and assign sum from two values x FN 2 SUBTRACTION e g FN 2 Q1 10 5 Form and assign difference between two values FN 3 MULTIPLICATION e g FN 3 Q2 3 3 Form and assign the product of two values FN 4 DIVISION e g FN 4 Q4 8 DIV Q2 Form and assign the quotient of two values Not permitted Division by 0 FN 5 SQUARE ROOT e g FN 5 Q20 SQRT 4 Form and assign the square root of a value Not permitted Square root from negative value To the right of the character you can enter the following Two numbers m Two Q parameters Anumber and a O parameter The O parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs 194 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Describing contours with mathematical functions Programming fundamental operations Example 1 a gt Select the Q paramet
299. ices gt The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation When using the 25 pin adapter block TNC Conn cable 365725 xx Adapter block Conn cable 274545 xx 310085 01 Male Assignment Female Color Female Male Female Male Color Female 1 Do not 1 1 1 1 1 White 1 assign Brown 2 RXD 2 Yellow 3 3 3 3 Yellow 2 3 TXD 3 Green 2 2 2 2 Green 3 4 DTR 4 Brown 20 20 20 20 Brown 8 l 5 Signal 5 Red 7 7 7 7 Red 7 GND 6 DSR 6 Blue 6 6 6 6 J 6 7 RTS 7 Gray 4 4 Gray 5 8 CTR 8 Pink 5 Pink 4 9 Do not 9 8 Violet 20 assign Hsg External Hsg External Hsg Hsg Hsg Hsg External Hsg shield shield shield 500 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces 21 2 When using the 9 pin adapter block TNC Conn cable 355484 xx Adapter block Conn cable 366964 xx 363987 02 Male Assignment Female Color Male Female Male Female Color Female 1 Do not 1 Red 1 1 1 1 Red 1 assign 2 RXD 2 Yellow 2 2 2 2 Yellow 3 3 TXD 3 White 3 3 3 3 White 2 4 DTR 4 Brown 4 4 4 4 Brown 6 5 Signal 5 Black 5 5 5 5 Black 5 GND 6 DSR 6 Violet 6 Violet 4 RTS 7 Gray 7 7 7 7 Gray CTR 8 White 8 8 8 8 White 7 Green Green 9 Do not 9 Green 9 9 9 9 Green 9 assign Hsg External Hsg External Hsg Hsg Hsg Hsg External Hsg shield shield shield TNC 128 User
300. iece coordinate system 2 1to9 Last reference point of a manual touch X Y Z A B C probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle U V W O without probe length or probe radius compensation machine coordinate system 3 1to9 Result of measurement of the touch probe X Y Z A B C cycles 0 and 1 without probe radius or probe U V W length compensation 4 1to9 Last reference point of a manual touch X Y Z A B C probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle U V W O without probe length or stylus probe compensation workpiece coordinate system 10 Oriented spindle stop Value from the active Line Column Read values datum table in the active coordinate system 500 Basic transformation 507 Line 1to6 Read the basic transformation of a preset X Y Z SPA SPB SPC Axis offset 508 Line 1to9 Read the axis offset of a preset X_OFFS Y_OFFS Z_OFFS A_OFFS B_OFFS C_OFFS U_OFFS V_OFFS W_OFFS Active preset 530 1 Read the number of the active preset Read data of the current 1 Tool length L tool 950 2 Tool radius R 3 Tool radius R2 4 Oversize for tool length DL 5 Tool radius oversize DR 6 Tool radius oversize DR2 7 Tool locked TL 0 not locked 1 locked 8 Number of the replacement tool RT Maximum tool age TIME1 10 Maximum tool age TIME2 11 Current tool age CUR TIME 218 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programm
301. in the point table for the spindle axis as the starting point coordinate you must define the workpiece surface coordinate Q203 as 0 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Point tables 15 7 391 Cycle fundamentals 15 7 Point tables Effect of the point tables with Cycles 251 to 256 The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates of the cycle starting point If you want to use the coordinate defined in the point table for the spindle axis as the starting point coordinate you must define the workpiece surface coordinate Q203 as 0 392 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 1 Fundamentals 16 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC offers the following cycles for all types of drilling operations Cycle Soft key Page 240 CENTERING 240 395 H With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance optional entry of the centering diameter or centering depth 200 DRILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 201 REAMING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 202 BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING 2 With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking and decrementing 204 BACK BORING 2 With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING With automatic pre positioning 2nd
302. in the affected axes confirming with the ENT key each time Values entered as absolute values refer to the workpiece datum which is specified either by datum setting or with a preset from the preset table Incremental values always refer to the datum which was last valid this may be a datum which has already been shifted 272 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Definition of a datum shift 10 4 TRANS DATUM TABLE You can define a datum shift by selecting a datum number from a NC block datum table with the TRANS DATUM TABLE function Proceed as 13 TRANS DATUMTABLE TABLINE25 follows for the definition SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions on gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions Select transformations TRANSFORM ee gt Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM DATUM v gt Reset the cursor to the function TRANS AXIS TABLE gt Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM TABLE gt If desired enter the name of the datum table from which you want to activate the datum number and confirm with the ENT key If you do not want to define a datum table confirm with the NO ENT key gt Enter the line number to be activated by the TNC and confirm with the ENT key a If you did not define a datum table in the TRANS DATUM TABLE block then the TNC uses the datum table already selected in the NC program with SE
303. ing 5 2014 13 1 323 Test run and program run 13 1 Graphics 3 D view in the Test Run mode of operation The Test Run operating mode additionally offers the following views Function Volume view Volume view and tool paths Tool paths The Test Run operating mode additionally offers the following functions Function Soft keys Show workpiece blank frame ROHTEIL Highlight workpiece edges along Show a transparent workpiece Show the end points of the tool paths Show the block numbers of the tool paths Show the workpiece in color WORKPIECE GRAY SCALE Note that the range of functions depends on the model quality selected You can select the model quality in the MOD function Graphic settings By showing the tool paths you can depict the programmed paths of the TNC in three dimensions A powerful zoom function is available for recognizing details quickly In particular you can use the tool paths display to inspect programs created externally for irregularities before machining This can help you to avoid undesirable traces of the machining process on the workpiece Such traces of machining can occur when points are output incorrectly by the postprocessor The TNC shows traverse movements at FMAX in red 324 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Graphics 13 1 Detail magnification You can magnify details in all display
304. ing 5 2014 Additional functions 8 8 Group name ID no Number Index Meaning 12 PLC status 13 Maximum tooth length LCUTS 15 TT Number of tool teeth CUT 16 TT Wear tolerance for length LTOL 17 TT Wear tolerance for radius RTOL 18 TT Direction of rotation DIRECT 0 positive 1 negative 19 TT Offset in plane R OFFS 20 TT Offset in length LOFFS 21 TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK 22 TT Break tolerance for radius RBREAK 23 PLC value 24 Tool type TYP 0 milling cutter 21 touch probe 27 Corresponding line in the touch probe table 32 Point angle Touch probe cycles 990 1 Approach behaviour 0 standard behavior 1 effective radius safety clearance zero 2 0 Pushbutton monitoring off 1 Pushbutton monitoring on 4 0 Stylus not deflected 1 Stylus deflected Execution status 992 10 Mid program startup active 1 yes 0 no 11 Search phase 14 Number of the last FN14 error 16 Real execution active 1 execution 2 simulation Example Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z axis to Q25 55 FN 18 SYSREAD Q25 ID210 NR4 IDX3 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 219 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional functions FN 19 PLC Transfer values to PLC This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder e The FN
305. ing see Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 page 305 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 1 6 59 First Steps with the TNC 128 1 7 Running the first program 1 7 Running the first program Selecting the correct operating mode You can run programs either in the Single Block or the Full Sequence mode gt Press the operating mode key The TNC goes into the Program Run Single Block mode and the TNC executes the program block by block You have to confirm each block with the NC start key gt Press the Program Run Full Sequence operating mode key The TNC switches to that mode and runs the program after NC start up to a program interruption or to the end of the program Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC see Modes of Operation page 65 m Running programs see Program run page 332 Choosing the program you want to run PaM gt Press the PGM MGT key The TNC opens the file management Last gt Press the LAST FILES soft key The TNC opens a FILES z pop up window with the most recently selected files gt If desired use the arrow keys to select the program that you want to run Load with the ENT key Further information on this topic m File management see Working with the file manager page 98 Start the program gt Press the NC start key The TNC runs the active Ww program
306. ing surface of the TT until it contacts the surface The offset is programmed in the tool table under Tool offset Radius TT R_OFFS Cycle for measuring a tool during standstill e g for drills The control positions the tool to be measured over the center of the measuring surface It then moves the non rotating tool toward the measuring surface of the TT until it touches the surface To activate this function enter zero for the tool offset Radius TT R_OFFS in the tool table Cycle for measuring individual teeth The TNC pre positions the tool to be measured to a position at the side of the touch probe head The distance from the tip of the tool to the upper edge of the touch probe head is defined in offsetToolAxis You can enter an additional offset with tool offset Length TT L_OFFS in the tool table The TNC probes the tool radially during rotation to determine the starting angle for measuring the individual teeth It then measures the length of each tooth by changing the corresponding angle of spindle orientation Please note while programming Before measuring a tool for the first time enter the following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL T the approximate radius the approximate length the number of teeth and the cutting direction You can run an individual tooth measurement of tools with up to 20 teeth TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 483 Touch probe cy
307. ing tables with SQL commands 38 9 Programming SQL commands This function can only be programmed if you have entered the code number 555343 Program SOL commands in the Programming mode gt To select the MOD functions press SQL gt Select an SOL command via soft key see overview or press the SQL EXECUTE soft key and program the SOL command sal Overview of the soft keys Function Soft key SOL EXECUTE aay Program a Select command EXECUTE SQL BIND a Bind a Q parameter to a table column BIND SOL FETCH soL Read table rows from the result set and save them FETCH in Q parameters SQL UPDATE Save data from the O parameters in an existing UPDATE table row in the result set SOL INSERT ae Save data from the O parameters in a new table INSERT row in the result set SOL COMMIT ER Transfer table rows from the result set into the COMMIT table and conclude the transaction SQL ROLLBACK Ea ROLLBACK f INDEX is not programmed Discard any changes insertions and conclude the transaction f INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains in the result set All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction is not concluded TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 225 Programming Q Parameters 8 9 Accessing tables with SOL commands SQL BIND SQL BIND binds a O parameter to a table column The SOL Bind a O parameter to a table column commands Fetch
308. ion 3 axes plus closed loop spindle 1st additional axis for 4 axes plus closed loop spindle 2nd additional axis for 5 axes plus closed loop spindle Program entry In HEIDENHAIN conversational Position entry Tool compensation Nominal positions for lines in Cartesian coordinates Incremental or absolute dimensions Display and entry in mm or inches Tool radius in the working plane and tool length Tool tables Multiple tool tables with any number of tools Parallel operation Creating a program with graphical support while another program is being run Program jumps a Subprograms a Program section repeat m Any desired program as subroutine Fixed cycles a Cycles for drilling and conventional and rigid tapping a Roughing and finishing rectangular pockets a Cycles for pecking reaming boring and counterboring m Roughing and finishing rectangular studs m Cartesian and polar point patterns m OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can also be integrated Coordinate transformation E Datum shift mirroring m Scaling factor axis specific Q parameters m Mathematical functions roots Programming with variables 2 Logical operations D lt gt a Calculating with parentheses m sin a cos q tana arc sin arc cos arc tan a e In log absolute value of a number constant Tr negation truncation of digits before or after the decimal point a Functi
309. ion is not effective for positioning movements in the spindle axis The last selected radius compensation remains active in a positioning block that does not contain any information about radius compensation For radius compensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value R DR ooL caLL DR ag where R Tool radius R from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DR TooL Oversize for radius DR in the TOOL CALL block CALL DR Tap Oversize for radius DR in the tool table Contouring without radius compensation RO The tool center moves in the working plane along the to the programmed coordinates Applications Drilling and boring pre positioning 164 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tool compensation 5 3 Entering radius compensation Radius compensation is entered in a positioning block Enter the coordinates of the target point and confirm your entry with ENT TOOL RADIUS COMP R R NO COMP gt The TNC extends the traverse path of the tool by R the tool radius gt The TNC shortens the traverse path of the tool by the tool radius gt Select tool movement without radius compensation or cancel radius compensation Press the ENT key gt Terminate the block Press the END key ENT TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 165 Programming Tool movements
310. ion is set the control no longer echo answer answers to a PING request Service This column contains the short names of the services that are configured with this dialog For the configuration it is not important here whether the services themselves have been started LSV2 contains the functionality for TNCRemoNT and Teleservice as well as the HEIDENHAIN DNC interface ports 19000 to 19010 SMB only refers to incoming SMB connections i e if a Windows release is made on the NC Outgoing SMB connections i e if a Windows release is connected to the NC cannot be prevented SSH stands for the Secure Shell protocol port 22 As of HEROS 504 the LSV2 can be executed safely tunneled via this SSH protocol VNC protocol means access to the screen contents If this service is blocked the screen content can no longer be accessed not even with the Teleservice programs from HEIDENHAIN e g screenshot If this service is blocked the VNC configuration dialog shows a warning from HEROS that VNC is disabled in the firewall 368 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Firewall 14 12 Option Meaning Method Under Method you can configure whether the service should not be available to anyone Prohibit all available to everyone Permit all or only available to some Permit some If you set Permit some you must also specify the computer under Computer that you wish to g
311. ions such as spindle rotation are not affected Cycle parameters a gt Dwell time in seconds Enter the dwell time in EJ seconds Input range O to 3600 s 1 hour in steps of 0 001 seconds TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 DWELL TIME Cycle 9 NC blocks 89 CYCL DEF 9 0 DWELL TIME 90 CYCL DEF 9 1 DWELL 1 5 19 2 465 Cycles Special Functions 19 3 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 19 3 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 Cycle function Routines that you have programmed such as special drilling cycles or geometrical modules can be written as main programs These can then be called like fixed cycles Please note while programming 466 The program you are calling must be stored in the internal memory of your TNC If the program you are defining to be a cycle is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you need only enter the program name If the program you are defining to be a cycle is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you must enter the complete path for example TNC KLAR35 FK1 50 H As a rule Q parameters are globally effective when called with Cycle 12 So please note that changes to Q parameters in the called program can also influence the calling program N CYCL DEF 12 0 PGM CALL CYCL DEF 12 1 LOT31 9 M99 o e e o l l d o O OTOT OROMOBOMOROROMORORO NO OO eoe e o o o o
312. ious cycles 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm Angle of spindle orientation O to 360 0000 3 4 Datum numbers in Cycle 7 0 to 2999 4 0 Scaling factor in Cycles 11 and 26 0 000001 to 99 999999 2 6 Miscellaneous functions M 0 to 999 4 0 Q parameter numbers 0 to 1999 4 0 Q parameter values 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 9 6 Labels LBL for program jumps 0 to 999 5 0 Labels LBL for program jumps Any text string in quotes Number of program section repeats REP 1 to 65 534 5 0 Error number with O parameter function FN14 Fixed cycles O to 1199 4 0 Cycle Cycle designation DEF CALL number active active 7 Datum shift a 8 Mirror image E 9 Dwell time a 11 Scaling factor a 12 Program call E 13 Spindle orientation m 200 Drilling m 201 Reaming m 202 Boring a 203 Universal drilling a 204 Back boring i 205 Universal pecking a 206 Tapping with a floating tap holder new a 207 Rigid tapping new a 508 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Technical Information 21 3 Cycle Cycle designation DEF CALL number active active 233 Face milling selectable machining direction consider the sides a 240 Centering m 241 Single lip deep hole drilling m 247 Datum setting a 251 Rectangular pocket complete machining a 256 Rectangular stud complete machining a M
313. is shown in the additional status display Resetting Program the SCALING cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 for the same axis Please note while programming You can program each coordinate axis with its own axis specific scaling factor In addition you can enter the coordinates of a center for all scaling factors The size of the contour is enlarged or reduced with reference to the center and not necessarily as in Cycle 11 SCALING with reference to the active datum 458 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 18 7 Cycle parameters gt Axis and scaling factor Select the coordinate axis m axes by soft key and enter the factor s involved in enlarging or reducing Input range 0 000001 to 99 999999 gt Center coordinates Enter the center of the axis specific enlargement or reduction Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 NC blocks TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 459 Cycles Coordinate Transformations 18 8 Programming Examples 18 8 Programming Examples Example Groups of holes Program sequence m Approach the groups of holes in the main program Call the group of holes subprogram 1 in the main program m Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 1 15 45 75 100 a 0 BEGIN PGM SP2 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3
314. iscellaneous functions M Effect Effective at block Start End Page MO Program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF a 253 M1 Optional program run STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF a 343 M2 Program run STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF CLEAR status display m 253 depending on machine parameter Return jump to block 1 M3 Spindle ON clockwise a 253 M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise a M5 Spindle STOP a M6 Tool change STOP program run depending on machine parameter a 253 Spindle STOP M8 Coolant on a 253 M9 Coolant off o M13 Spindle ON clockwise coolant ON a 253 M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise coolant on a M30 Same function as M2 a 253 M89 Vacant miscellaneous function or a 376 cycle call modally effective depending on MPs m M91 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine a 254 datum M92 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position a 254 defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position M94 Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 ia 256 M99 Blockwise cycle call m 376 M140 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction a 259 M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring a 260 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 509 Index Index 3D Touch Probes 470 3 D touch probes cee 372 Calibration 300 Accessing tables 008 222 ACCESSOTIGS 22 cccceeeee
315. it of measure Press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC automatically generates the first and last blocks of the program Afterwards you can no longer change these blocks Further information on this topic m File management see Working with the file manager page 98 Creating a new program see Opening and entering programs page 84 46 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming the first part 1 3 Defining a workpiece blank After you have created a new program you can define a workpiece Lea blank For example define a cuboid by entering the MIN and MAX a points each with reference to the selected reference point After you have selected the desired blank form via soft key the TNC automatically initiates the workpiece blank definition and asks for the required data gt Working plane in graphic XY Enter the active spindle axis Z is saved as default setting Accept with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def minimum X Smallest X coordinate of i the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 fi peeseuecessenssaseeusen Confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def minimum Y Smallest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def minimum Z Smallest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 40 Confirm w
316. ith the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def maximum X Largest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 100 Confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def maximum Y Largest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 100 Confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def maximum Z Largest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key The TNC concludes the dialog TNG no_prog 1 n Example NC blocks 0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 40 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 END PGM NEW MM Further information on this topic m Defining the blank page 86 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 47 First Steps with the TNC 128 1 3 Programming the first part Program layout NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner This makes it easier to find your place accelerates programming and reduces errors Recommended program layout for simple conventional contour machining 1 Call tool define tool axis 2 Retract the tool 3 Pre position the tool in the working plane near the contour starting point 4 Inthe tool axis position the tool above the workpiece or preposition immediately to workpiece depth If required switch on the spindle coolant 5 Contour approach 6 Contour machining
317. ithin a program and replace it by a new text if required Finding any text gt Select the Search function The TNC gt Lae superimposes the search window and displays the eects ae Sao available search functions in the soft key row gt TOOL Enter the text to be searched for Start the search process The TNC moves to the et t next block containing the text you are searching for io REPLACE ALL gt Repeat the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for oe eur E gt End the search function ee 16 END PGM 1 MA ki Er mi v copy zE eam FIELD CURRENT WORO FIND REPLACE REPLACE ALL TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 93 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening and entering programs Finding Replacing any text The find replace function is not possible if m aprogram is protected m the program is currently being run by the TNC When using the REPLACE ALL function ensure that you do not accidentally replace text that you do not want to change Once replaced such text cannot be restored gt Select the block containing the word you wish to find gt Select the Search function The TNC superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row gt Press the CURRENT WORD soft key The TNC loads the first w
318. itions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool drills to the programmed depth at the feed rate for plunging If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time with active spindle rotation for cutting free The TNC then orients the spindle to the position that is defined in parameter 0336 If retraction is selected the tool retracts in the programmed direction by 0 2 mm fixed value The tool then retracts to set up clearance at the retraction rate and from there if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX If 0214 0 the tool point remains on the wall of the hole TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 401 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 5 BORING Cycle 202 Please note while programming Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle This cycle is effective only for machines with servo controlled spindle Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed After the cycle is completed the TNC restores the coolant and spindle conditions that were active before the cycle call Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDep
319. ket number Fixed pocket O No 1 Yes Pocket number Locked pocket O No 1 Yes on AJOJN Pocket number PLC status TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 213 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional functions Group name ID no Values programmed Number Index 1 Meaning Tool number T immediately after TOOL CALL 60 2 Active tool axis 0 X6 U 1 Y7 V 2 Z8 W 3 Spindle speed S 4 Oversize for tool length DL 5 Tool radius oversize DR 6 Automatic TOOL CALL 0 Yes 1 No 7 Tool radius oversize DR2 8 Tool index 9 Active feed rate Values programmed 1 Tool number T immediately after TOOL DEF 61 2 Length 3 Radius 4 Index 5 Tool data programmed in TOOL DEF 1 Yes 0 No Active tool compensation 1 1 without Active radius 200 oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and Oversize from TOOL CALL 2 1 without Active length oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and Oversize from TOOL CALL 3 1 without Rounding radius R2 oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and Oversize from TOOL CALL Active transformations 210 3 Active mirrored axis 214 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Additional functions 8 8 Group name ID no Number Index Meaning 0 Mirroring not active 1 X axis mirrored 2 Y axis mirro
320. key FILE COPY Copy file Enter the name and path ae of the file to be copied as well as copy the target path FILE MOVE Move file Enter the name and path of the file to be moved as well as MOVE the target path FILE Delete file Enter the path and name Be DELETE of the file to be deleted DELETE TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 271 Programming Special functions 10 4 Definition of a datum shift 10 4 Definition of a datum shift Overview As an alternative to the coordinate transformation Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT you can use the TRANS DATUM plain language function Just as in Cycle 7 you can use TRANS DATUM to directly program shift values or activate a line from a selectable datum table In addition there is also the TRANS DATUM RESET function which you can easily use to reset a datum shift TRANS DATUM AXIS You can define a datum shift by entering values in the respective NC block axes with the TRANS DATUM AXIS function You can define up to 13 TRANS DATUMAXIS X 10 Y 25 Z 42 nine coordinates in one block and incremental entries are possible Proceed as follows for the definition SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions TEE gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions Select transformations TRANSFORM aa gt Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM v VALUES gt Select the value input soft key gt Enter the datum shift
321. l sequence i Program run full sequence ING nc_prog 123 h Ovr 100 Eprogramming fas BEz lu 579 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS OF _ _ ovERVIEW Pos STATUS a panam EXproaram run full sequence B programming Gl Program run full sequence PEIRON Ay BT anon wi PEPEE Ovezv3en rou Lat Jove u ros Took 7 TANS arana D BEGIN POM 23 m poc LN 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 2 20 E 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 IE ce 3 TOOL GALL 15 Z 2000 s 4 Z 100 RO FMAX M3 5 X 30 RO FMAX vo 6 30 RO FMAK 7 Z 2 RO FMAX 8 Z a RO F500 9 vss Re 10 X 85 Re 11 Y 85 Re 12 O Xe15 Re ya xinn ye vimi s100 le Zl 0E on nl S 2000 iu 5 9 status staus root STATUS OF ovERVIEW Pos STATUS a panam E a EE MIN and MAX values of the individual cutting edges and the result of measuring the rotating tool DYN dynamic measurement Cutting edge number with the corresponding measured value If the measured value is followed by an asterisk the permissible tolerance in the tool table was exceeded 72 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Coordinate transformations TRANS tab Soft key Meaning STATUS Name of the active datum table COORD TRANSF Active datum number comment from the
322. lasiaasabiadieastaldasdgaete 221 22 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 8 9 8 10 8 11 Accessing tables with SOL commands 5 c s ssc cccsscsoceccssvcccsccstvecocecssvnssecesuvesuscessnsvsocecssusesceents 222 Introductions bed cobsdguned edbbl aaauaewbenadaae T E TENET 222 A MAN SACTION ccacasnstcnetaamnncedtlarnnnies Gktannsundeddatinnddeddainngdddvabadacteavanndddtditaun died Gtananand O OEO 223 Programming SOL COMMAMNGCG ccccceeessecceceeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeseeseeeeeesssseeesessseeeeeeesseeeeeeeaas 225 OVErViIEW OF The SOTt KEYS i sissies vitsaesatriladnann rstdubunenidiasnaasyndubbann E S 225 SOLE heen cree pce ee eee cer ee een Pe eer eee ee 226 SOL SELEC esd tees tes ca n E e EE paid ok eae wat de ect ERE nde Sees cae dient 227 pI gE CUE sss hee aca t ca easter ounce tte ta neem esa er ener eo ana ectant aaa acea ancenietem sacar ipeeameet EE 229 SOL UPDATE yiiseeteseisvecs tems an E AEE A AOE E SE E ETA NENE 230 SOLINSER Titaan aai AE E e ban eE dace ee ed eee 230 SOL COMMIT iissa i tnik tarian rentak ikasiik ani AASTA REEA E ARINAREN naia RENE BERTE EEEE AN TA TAPER ENRE A AR EAAN AEEA BRA ARA NER EEnE EA 231 MOL ROLLBACK priere oraaa ara e aT ETEA EO E PENA cia a EEE EA Er 231 Entenng formulas directly eeaeee a aaae A EEEE AAE E AA A AAEE AEE AA E AAA E AAEREN En 232 Entering Dniie T E E E 232 RULES for form lase renere ken nerean raea T Ea EEEE E AE EERE EEEE E i
323. le on the machining pattern you defined A machining pattern remains active until you define anew one or select a point table with the SEL PATTERN function You can use the mid program startup function to select any point at which you want to start or continue machining see Any entry into program mid program startup page 339 Defining individual machining positions NC blocks You can enter up to 9 machining positions Confirm 10 Z 100 RO FMAX each entry with the ENT key i P 11 PATTERN DEF POS1 If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not X 25 Y 33 5 Z 0 POS2 X 50 Y equal to 0 then this value is effective in addition to 75 Z 0 the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the machining cycle vanuai operation BQeroorarming 2 PIrOg PAT H TNO nc o B m coordinate gt X coord of machining position absolute Enter X gt Y coord of machining position absolute Enter Y coordinate t j gt Coordinate of workpiece surface absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin Defining a single row NC blocks If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not i ae 10 Z 100 RO FMAX equal to 0 then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the 11 PATTERN DEF ROW1 machining cycle X 25 Y 33 5 D 8 NUM5 ROT 0 Z 0 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014
324. le programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 397 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 3 DRILLING Cycle 200 Cycle parameters 398 Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during drilling Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 0 to 99999 9999 The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if m the plunging depth is
325. lect a file and open it with the SELECT soft key or ENT key or create a new file by entering the new file name and confirming your entry with the ENT key To leave the text editor call the file manager and select a file of a different file type for example a part program Cursor movements Soft key Move cursor one word to the right ae oo ac om Move cursor one word to the left oo ac om Go to next screen page Go to previous screen page EN Go to beginning of file o m Q H 2 Go to end of file m o j TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 275 Programming Special functions 10 5 Creating Text Files Editing texts Above the first line of the text editor there is an information field showing the file name location and line information File Name of the text file Line Line in which the cursor is presently located Column Column in which the cursor is presently located The text is inserted or overwritten at the location of the cursor You can move the cursor to any desired position in the text file by pressing the arrow keys The line in which the cursor is presently located is depicted in a different color You can insert a line break with the Return or ENT key Deleting and re inserting characters words and lines With the text editor you can erase words and even lines and insert them at any desired location in the text gt Move
326. les and studs If you use a function for probing a circle automatically the TNC automatically positions the touch probe to the respective touch points Ensure that the positions can be approached without collision If you use a probing routine for probing a hole or a stud automatically the TNC opens a form with the required input fields Input fields in the Measure stud and Measure hole forms Input field Function Stud diameter or Hole Diameter of probe contact optional diameter for holes Safety clearance Distance to the probe contact in the plane Incr clearance height Positioning of touch probe in spindle axis direction starting from the current position Starting angle Angle for the first probing operation 0 Positive direction of principal axis i e in X for spindle axis Z All other probe angles result from the number of touch points Number of touch Number of probing operations 3 to points 8 Angular length Probing a full circle 360 or a circle segment angular length lt 360 294 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software option 17 11 5 Position the touch probe approximately in the center of the hole inside circle or near the first touch point on the stud outside circle and select the soft key for the first probing direction Once you press the machine START button to start the touch
327. les for common tool types Tool type CUT TT R_OFFS TT L_OFFS Drill no function 0 no offset required because tool tip is to be measured End mill with diameter 4 4 teeth 0 no offset required O no additional offset of lt 19mm because tool diameter is required during radius smaller than the contact measurement Offset from plate diameter of the TT offsetToolAxis is used End mill with diameter 4 4 teeth R offset required because O no additional offset of gt 19mm tool diameter is larger than required during radius the contact plate diameter measurement Offset from of the TT offsetToolAxis is used Radius cutter with a 4 4 teeth O no offset required 5 always define the tool diameter of 10 mm for example 480 because the south pole of the ball is to be measured radius as the offset so that the diameter is not measured in the radius TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Calibrate the TT Cycle 480 Touch Probe Functions software option 20 5 20 5 Calibrate the TT Cycle 480 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Cycle run The TT is calibrated with the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 30 or TCH PROBE 480 see Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 The calibration process is automatic The TNC also measures the center misalignment of the calibrating tool automatically by rotating the spindle by 180 after the first half of the calibration cycle
328. level surface so that for example side walls or shoulders are considered Y during machining A side wall that is defined by a limit is machined to the finished dimension resulting from the starting point or the side lengths of the level surface During roughing the TNC takes the allowance for the side into account whereas during finishing 17 4 MAX the allowance is used for pre positioning the tool Please note while programming Pre position the tool in the machining plane to the starting position with radius compensation RO Keep in mind the machining direction The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note the 2nd set up clearance Q204 Enter the 2nd set up clearance in Q204 so that no collision with the workpiece or the fixtures can occur If the starting point in the 3rd axis Q227 and the end point in the 3rd axis Q386 are entered as equal values the TNC does not run the cycle depth 0 has been programmed TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 439 P Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud milling 440 17 4 FACE MILLING Cycle 233 Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning if starting point lt end point is entered This mea
329. libration gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button The 3 D touch probe probes all required touch points in an automatic probing routine and calculates the effective ball tip radius If probing from opposite orientations is possible the TNC calculates the center offset gt Check the results change the values if required gt Press the OK soft key for the values to take effect gt Press the END soft key to terminate the calibrating function In order to be able to determine the ball tip center misalignment the TNC needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 303 Manual operation and setup 11 6 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Proceed as follows for manual calibration with a stud or calibration pin gt In the Manual Operation mode position the ball tip above the center of the calibration pin gt Select the calibration function Press the CAL R gt Enter the diameter of the stud gt Enter the safety clearance gt New cal spindle angle Spindle angle that is used for the calibration The TNC uses CAL_ANG from the touch probe table as a default value If you change the value the TNC saves the value to the touch probe table during calibration gt Start the probing procedure Pre
330. lt set Do this by specifying the table column containing the sorting criteria Also select ascending or descending order SQL SELECT ORDER BY The selected rows that were transferred to the result set are addressed with the HANDLE All following SOL commands use the handle to refer to this set of selected columns and rows When concluding a transaction the handle is released SQL COMMIT or SQL ROLLBACK It is then no longer valid You can edit more than one result set at the same time The SOL server assigns a new handle for each Select command Binding O parameters to columns The NC program does not have direct access to the table entries in the result set The data must be transferred in Q parameters In the other direction the data is first prepared in the Q parameters and then transferred to the result set Specify with SQL BIND which table columns are mapped to which Q parameters The Q parameters are bound assigned to the columns Columns that are not bound to O parameters are not included in the read write processes If a new table row is generated with SQL INSERT the columns not bound to O parameters are filled with default values SQL S SELECT Tabelle ABC Dateiver waltung SOL FETCH Q1 HANDLE Q5 Handle t r selektierte Daten SQL Server 1234 NC Pro gramm 224 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Access
331. lues if required gt Press the OK soft key for the values to take effect gt Press the END soft key to terminate the calibrating function TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 301 Manual operation and setup 11 6 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The center offset can be determined only with a suitable touch probe If you want to calibrate using the outside of an object you need to preposition the touch probe above the center of the calibration sphere or calibration pin Ensure that the touch points can be approached without collision When calibrating the ball tip radius the TNC executes an automatic probing routine During the first probing cycle the TNC determines the center of the calibration ring or stud coarse measurement and positions the touch probe in the center Then the ball tip radius is determined during the actual calibration process fine measurement If the touch probe allows probing from opposite orientations the center offset is determined during another cycle The characteristic of whether and how your touch probe can be oriented is already defined in HEIDENHAIN touch probes Other touch probes are configured by the machine tool builder
332. m block 36 to block 50 Return jump to block 1 and end of program N BW z TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 183 7 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 75 Nesting Repeating a subprogram Example NC blocks a 3 a 2 S 3 g T z g 5 Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11 Subprogram 2 is called and executed Program section between block 12 and block 10 is repeated twice This means that subprogram 2 is repeated twice Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 up to block 19 Return jump to block 1 and end of program wW N NS 84 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming examples 7 6 76 Programming examples Example Groups of holes Program sequence m Approach the groups of holes in the main program Call the group of holes subprogram 1 in the main program m Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 1 15 45 75 100 ice ol TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 7 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 76 Programming examples 86 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming examples 7 6 Example Group of holes with several tools Program sequence m Program the fixed cycles in the main program m Call the complete hole pattern subp
333. m each of your entries with the ENT key Do not forget the tool axis gt Retract the tool Press the orange axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp R R no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Confirm the Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block gt Preposition the tool in the working plane Press the orange X axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 20 gt Confirm Radius comp R R no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Confirm the Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block gt Press the orange Y axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 20 Confirm with the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp R R no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Confirm the Miscellaneous function M with theEND key The TNC saves the entered positioning block gt Move the tool to workpiece depth Press the orange Z axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached e g
334. m section repeats 7 3 7 3 Program section repeats Label The beginning of a program section repeat is marked by the label 0 BEGIN PGM LBL The end of a program section repeat is identified by CALL LBL n REPn END PGM Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program section CALL LBL n REPn 2 Then the program section between the called LABEL and the label call CALL LBL n REPn is repeated the number of times entered after REP 3 The TNC resumes the part program after the last repetition Programming notes m You can repeat a program section up to 65 534 times in succession The total number of times the program section is executed is always one more than the programmed number of repeats because the first repeat starts after the first machining process TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 177 7 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 73 Program section repeats Programming a program section repeat gt To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key and enter a LABEL NUMBER for the program section you wish to repeat If you want to use a label name press the Ibl name soft key to switch to text entry gt Enter the program section Calling a program section repeat gt Calla program section Press the LBL CALL key gt Enter the number of the program section to be repeated If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME s
335. machine tool builder m The size and position of pop up windows can be changed It is also possible to close minimize and restore the pop up windows The TNC shows a star in the upper left of the screen if an application of the window manager or the window manager itself has caused an error In this case switch to the window manager and correct the problem If required refer to your machine manual 74 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Task bar In the task bar you can choose different workspaces by mouse click The TNC provides the following workspaces m Workspace 1 Active mode of operation m Workspace 2 Active programming mode Workspace 3 Manufacturer s applications optionally available In the task bar you can also select other applications that you have started together with the TNC switch for example to the PDF viewer or TNCguide Click the green HEIDENHAIN symbol to open a menu in which you can get information make settings or start applications The following functions are available About Xfce Information on the Windows manager Xfce About HEROS Information about the operating system of the TNC NC Control Start and stop the TNC software Only permitted for diagnostic purposes Web Browser Start Mozilla Firefox Diagnostics Available only to authorized specialists to start diagnostic functions Settings Configuration of miscellaneous settings D
336. maeey foe etesaney 483 GV GIG TN aia A A AEA AEEA ieedaa et E 483 Pl ase note While PFOGKAMIMING eesse A AA AE EIRE EES 483 Ee ee e E E E A E ya lusbanananih 484 A O A O Bee EEE eeeee cere here renee eee ere 485 GY CIE Teca E E E A 485 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccccecceeseeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeecceaaaaeceeeeeeeeeeeceeseeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteesseseeaees 485 Cycle PALAMETCLS cece cccccecccccceececeecneeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeesceeeeeeessaeeeeeecaeeeeeessaeeeeeecseeeeeeseaeeeeeessieeseeesaees 486 Measure the tool length and radius Cycle 483 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions SOPEW ANE LO PEI OMB TZ occ sters recreate ae en rae ee cae eer EAT 487 VCS WU aes acs facas voc ta ane va nated E ucunsdee cunhend se nuteteed E 487 Please note while ProgramMmMing ccccceccecceeeceeeeceeceeeeteceeecceeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseceeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 487 CYCIE DANAIMSTS E T A A A N A E A A TN 488 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 21 1 21 2 21 3 Machine specific user parameters io occ cccs ceccccssscccccns sees scevass cscs sens sreeesenussrces sunsssrsecuensseceecanteucwessansses 490 PAPC AION frea E E E E E E A estan dur ten 490 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces ccccccsssseeceeesseeeeeeeseseeeees 500 RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN deVICES 00 cc cccccee cee ceceeeecec cece cueeecesceeseuaeeeeeseeeaeateeeeeeanaeees
337. mming 5 2014 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 Swittch Oms SWEN r a cues c cess co ens cece steers A Ea A Sao becca rau E EA ERS 280 S E AT NEE E A NE I EAA AN N EIT AA A T E A 280 Se E 281 Moving the machine aee EAE aaa 282 NIe E EAEE AEE A T 282 Moving the axis with the machine axis direction DUttONS sssssssissiisisssseettttitriirirertettettttrrrrnnnrrer reeet 282 Incremental JOG POSITIONING cccccccececeeeceeceeceee eee ceeeece ee EEN EEEEEEEEAEENAEEENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EE EEEE 282 Traverse with the HR 410 electronic handwheelll cccccceccecceeceeceeceeeeeeeeceececcecaeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeseseeas 283 Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M ccccccccccsecsssessssseseeseeeeeeeesseeees 284 PADDING AION ee heap ct nantes ee ceeetetnect E taberannetatnt aetna a a uendetuehaaee tnediecteenuntte detec 284 Entenng ValW OS sais 2ncsineainsstesang ented tapnetetaannpacntadbninnd satntean dank idesanaenecn RAE a AE ia AREA E AEAEE EAEE 284 Adjusting spindle speed and feed rate cccccccccccccescccccsssseeeecseneeeececesssseeecesssseeesessesseesecsssseeesenenaeees 285 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe ccccceeeeeeece eee ee eee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 286 NOTE asesan oa ewaedeeiaevemisea N a N TA A aa EA R A Eaa 286 Preparation eena aE A A A A O E E aE a 286 Workpiece presetting with axis KCYS c ccccccecceccceeceee
338. modes in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes as well as in the Test Run operating mode The graphic simulation or the program run respectively must first have been stopped A detail magnification is always effective in all display modes Test run Gl Test run AK Khama Changing the detail magnification The soft keys are listed in the table gt Interrupt the graphic simulation if necessary gt Inthe Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes as well as in the Test Run operating mode shift the soft key row until the soft key for the detail magnification function appears gt gt Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the detail magnification functions appears gt Select the functions for detail magnification gt Press the corresponding soft key to select the workpiece surface see table below gt To reduce or magnify the blank form press and hold the minus or plus soft key respectively gt Restart the test run or program run by pressing the START soft key RESET START returns the workpiece to its original state n Function oft keys Select the left right workpiece surface Select the front back workpiece surface Select the top bottom workpiece surface Q Shift the cutting surface for reducing or magnifying the blank form AE Select the isolated detail
339. n be measured with stationary spindle To do so define in the tool table the number of teeth CUT as 0 and adjust machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement Refer to your machine manual TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 485 Touch probe cycles 20 8 Measure the tool radius Cycle 482 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Cycle parameters 482 gt Measure tool 0 Check tool 1 Select whether NC blocks g z the tool is to be measured for the first time or l 6 TOOL CALL 12 Z whether a tool that has already been measured is to be inspected If the tool is being measured for the 7 TCH PROBE 482 TOOL RADIUS first time the TNC overwrites the tool radius R in Q340 1 CHECK the central tool file TOOL T by the delta value DR Q260 100 CLEARANCE HEIGHT O If you wish to inspect a tool the TNC compares the measured radius with the tool radius R that is Q341 1 PROBING THE TEETH stored in TOOL T It then calculates the positive or negative deviation from the stored value and enters it into TOOL T as the delta value DR The deviation can also be used for O parameter Q116 If the delta value is greater than the permissible tool radius tolerance for wear or break detection the TNC will lock the tool status L in TOOL T gt Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is
340. n of the active datum number 450 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 18 3 Please note while programming Danger of collision Datums from a datum table are always and exclusively referenced to the current datum preset If you are using datum shifts with datum tables then use the SEL TABLE function to activate the desired datum table from the NC program If you work without SEL TABLE then you must activate the desired datum table before the test run or the program run This applies also to the programming graphics m Use the file management to select the desired table for a test run in the Test Run operating mode The table receives the status S Use the file management in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes to select the desired table for program run The table receives the status M The coordinate values from datum tables are only effective with absolute coordinate values If you create datum tables the file name has to start with a letter Cycle parameters gt Datum shift Enter the number of the datum from NC blocks the datum table or a Q parameter If you enter a Q 77 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT parameter the TNC activates the datum number entered in the Q parameter Input range 0 to 9999 78 CYCL DEF 7 1 5 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 4
341. n repeats If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program you can save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program section repeat In addition you can have a part program call a separate program for execution Programming with subprograms and program section repeats see Programming Subprograms and program section repeats page 173 Programming with O parameters Instead of programming numerical values in a part program you enter markers called Q parameters You assign the values to the Q parameters separately with the Q parameter functions You can use the O parameters for programming mathematical functions that control program execution or describe a contour In addition parametric programming enables you to measure with the 3 D touch probe during program run Programming with Q parameters see Programming Q Parameters page 189 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 169 Programming Tool movements 6 2 Tool movements 6 2 Tool movements Programming tool movements for workpiece machining Creating the program blocks with the axis keys Use the orange axis keys to initiate the plain language dialog The TNC asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the program block into the part program Example programming a straight line gt Select the axis key you wan
342. ndle orientation Do not display the Plunging type is not possible error message on Do not display error message off Display error message TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 497 Tables and overviews 21 1 Machine specific user parameters Parameter settings Settings for the NC editor Create backup files TRUE Create backup file after editing NC programs FALSE Do not create backup file after editing NC programs Behavior of cursor after deletion of lines TRUE Cursor on previous line after deletion TNC behavior FALSE Cursor on next line after deletion Behavior of cursor with first or last line TRUE Cursor jumps from end to beginning of program FALSE Cursor does not jump from end to beginning of program Line break with multi line blocks ALL Always display lines completely ACT Only display lines of the active block completely NO Only display all lines when block is edited Activate help TRUE Always display help graphics during input FALSE Only display help graphics when the CYCLE HELP soft key is set to ON The CYCLE HELP OFF ON soft key is displayed in the Programming mode of operation after pressing the Screen layout button Behavior of soft key row following a cycle input TRUE Leave cycle soft key row active after a cycle definition FALSE Hide cycle soft key row after a cycle definition Confirmation request before block is deleted TRUE Display confirmation request
343. ndle to an angle that has been set by the machine manufacturer see your machine manual Please note while programming Cycle 13 is used internally for Cycles 202 and 204 Please note that if required you must program Cycle 13 again in your NC program after one of the machining cycles mentioned above Cycle parameters 13 gt Angle of orientation Enter the angle referenced i to the reference axis of the working plane Input range 0 0000 to 360 0000 NC blocks 93 CYCL DEF 13 0 ORIENTATION 94 CYCL DEF 13 1 ANGLE 180 468 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Touch probe cycles 20 1 General information about touch probe cycles 20 1 General information about touch probe cycles HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for the use of a 3 D touch probe Refer to your machine manual The touch probe cycles are available only with the Touch Probe Functions software option option number 17 If you are using a HEIDENHAIN touch probe this option is available automatically Method of function Whenever the TNC runs a touch probe cycle the 3 D touch probe approaches the workpiece in one linear axis This is also true during an active basic rotation or with a tilted working plane The machine tool builder determines the probing feed rate in a ma
344. ngular coordinate system is based on the three coordinate axes X Y and Z The axes are Y mutually perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum A coordinate identifies the distance from the datum in one of these directions A position in a plane is thus described through two coordinates and a position in space through three coordinates Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as absolute coordinates Relative coordinates are referenced to any other known position reference point you define within the coordinate system Relative coordinate values are also referred to as incremental coordinate values 80 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Reference system on milling machines When using a milling machine you orient tool movements to the Cartesian coordinate system The illustration at right shows how the Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes The figure illustrates the right hand rule for remembering the three axis directions the middle finger points in the positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb points in the positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction The TNC 128 can control up to 4 axes The axes U V and W are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X Y and Z respectively Rotary axes are designated as A B and C The illustration at lower right shows the
345. ns that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 FACE MILLING Cycle 233 17 4 Cycle parameters 233 gt Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only machined when the specific allowance Q368 0369 is defined gt Milling strategy 0 to 4 Q389 Determine how the TNC should machine the surface 0 Meander machining stepover at the positioning feed rate outside the surface to be machined 1 Meander machining stepover at the feed rate for milling at the edge of the surface to be machined 2 Line by line machining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate outside the surface to be machined 3 Line by line machining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate at the edge of the surface Q369 to be machined 4 Helical machining uniform infeed from the outside toward the inside gt Milling direction Q350 Axis in the machining plane that defines the machining direction 1 Reference axis machining direction Q347 i a A Q348 2 Minor axis machining direction 0349 aS gt 1st side length 0218 incremental Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis 1 of the working plane referenced to the starting point in the 1st
346. nt Automatically establish network connection Auto whenever the TNC is switched on The TNC marks the Auto column if the connection is established automatically Set up new network connection Add Delete existing network connection Remove Copy network connection Copy Edit network connection Machining Clear status window Clear 118 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 USB devices on the TNC Backing up data from or loading onto the TNC is especially easy with USB devices The TNC supports the following USB block devices Floppy disk drives with FAT VFAT file system Memory sticks with the FAT VFAT file system m Hard disks with the FAT VFAT file system CD ROM drives with the Joliet ISO 9660 file system The TNC automatically detects these types of USB devices when connected The TNC does not support USB devices with other file systems such as NTFS The TNC displays the USB TNC does not support device error message when such a device is connected The TNC also displays the USB TNC does not support device error message if you connect a USB hub In this case simply acknowledge the message with the CE key In theory you should be able to connect all USB devices with the file systems mentioned above to the TNC It may happen that a USB device is not identified correctly by the control In such cases use another USB device The US
347. nt bvehadamted E EE Guassaunaewntnd Gaebenaad Sue OgageeenebAiS 400 BORING Gy cles202 eter cert a E can ceec testes Sect e can ent reo A 401 CY CIO CUM arcara a A AARE 401 Please note while ProgramMmMing ccccccccceccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeteececeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseececccecueeeeeeeeeeeeeteesennnesaees 402 ole parane aie one AE EE E EE EE EN 403 UNIVERSA C DRILLING O vele 20 E 404 AlE TU ai E A E A 404 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccccccecceceeeeee cee ceeeeteceeecceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeteseeccqeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaees 404 GY CIE parane to Seran AAEE AEAEE TEREA TERS 405 BACE BORIN G OVE 20A a ee eee canenee ee 407 Dec E EE E E E EE A dab ga E SE EE E ET E E esate 407 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccecccecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeecececceeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeececeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 407 KV CIE ANAS TONS aE blige target datas td ph cea eaten gles apne alec 409 WNIVERSALE PEGKING Cycle 205 icrrcceeccrrscccrecccccccsccsrcccercecrtee seers cnen ereatreccerteneeees neice teertececteaerors 410 CV CIE T EENE NATE IR ENN 410 Please note while ProgramMmMing cccccccccecceeeceeee cee eeeeeeecececceeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeesceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesees 410 Cycle DAFAIMGtOMS cccisidisscsateess ssssneddsissensacssaseadeessasdscadidasseatsadaassanddspasdecadasssseatnacaassacnddspassanadshsaseandanaass 412 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 CV CIE UA EEEE 414 Please no
348. nter the function l before the axis Example 2 Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates Absolute coordinates of hole 4 X 10 mm Y 10 mm Hole 5 with respect to 4 Hole 6 with respect to 5 X 20 mm X 20 mm Y 10 mm Y 10 mm Selecting the datum A production drawing identifies a certain form element of the workpiece usually a corner as the absolute datum When setting Z the datum you first align the workpiece along the machine axes and then move the tool in each axis to a defined position relative y to the workpiece Set the display of the TNC either to zero or to a known position value for each position This establishes the reference system for the workpiece which will be used for the TNC display and your part program X If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates simply use the coordinate transformation cycles Coordinate transformation cycles see page 449 If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC set the datum at a position or corner on the workpiece from which the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions can be most easily measured Datum setting with a 3 D touch probe see Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions software option 17 page 305 MAX MIN 82 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Fundamentals 3 1 Example The workpiece drawing shows holes 1 to 4 whose dimensions are
349. ntered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to set up clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed If you enter different advance stop distances for Q258 and Q259 the TNC will change the advance stop distances between the first and last plunging depths at the same rate If you use Q379 to enter a deepened starting point the TNC merely changes the starting point of the infeed movement Retraction movements are not changed by the TNC therefore they are calculated with respect to the coordinate of the workpiece surface 410 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 16 8 Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programmin
350. ntly selected setting Inserting the character gt Inthe Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be inserted gt Select the INSERT soft key Erasing the character gt Inthe Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be deleted gt Select the REMOVE soft key 342 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Optional program run interruption 13 7 13 7 Optional program run interruption Application The TNC optionally interrupts program run at blocks containing M1 If you use M1 in the Program Run mode the TNC does not switch off the spindle or coolant ow gt Do not interrupt program run or test run at blocks LAI ore containing M1 Set soft key to OFF gt Interrupt program run or test run at blocks containing M1 Set soft key to ON TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 343 MOD functions 14 1 MOD function 14 1 MOD function The MOD functions provide additional input possibilities and displays In addition you can enter code numbers to enable access to protected areas The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode Selecting MOD functions Open the pop up window with the MOD functions gt To select the MOD functions Press the MOD key The TNC opens a pop up window displaying the available MOD functions
351. number of machining positions on the circle gt Coordinate of workpiece surface absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin Defining a pitch circle PITCH CIR ae o If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to 0 then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the machining cycle gt Bolt hole circle center X absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the X axis gt Bolt hole circle center Y absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the Y axis gt Bolt hole circle diameter Diameter of the bolt hole circle gt Starting angle Polar angle of the first machining position Reference axis Major axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value gt Stepping angle end angle Incremental polar angle between two machining positions You can enter a positive or negative value As an alternative you can enter the end angle switch via soft key gt Number of repetitions Total number of machining positions on the circle gt Coordinate of workpiece surface absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 NC blocks 10 Z 100 RO FMAX 11 PATTERN DEF CIRC1 X 25 Y 33 D80 START 45 NUM8 Z 0 rnan operation GY exoorarming 3 Programming Seu NC blocks 10
352. o to previous page Go to next page Go to beginning of program BEGIN Go to end of program Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed before the current block Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed after the current block Move from one block to the next Select individual words in a block To select a certain block press the GOTO key enter the desired block number and confirm with the ENT key Or Enter the block number step and press the N LINES soft key to jump over the entered number of lines upward or downward 90 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Opening and entering programs 3 2 Function Soft key Key Set the selected word to zero Erase an incorrect number Delete the clearable error message Delete the selected word m2 Zal Delete the selected block Erase cycles and program sections DEL Insert the block that you last edited or INSERT deleted ieee Inserting blocks at any desired location gt Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and initiate the dialog Editing and inserting words gt Select a word in a block and overwrite it with the new one The plain language dialog is available
353. oceecssancceeeesaunceeeescuscoerecensnececessnnecess 190 Programming NOTES uranio ones haan situs Goal gcvicestubatnanes vais bassist aE a aE E A Eaa 191 Calling Q parameter FUNCTIONS ccecccccccececcecsteeeececceeeeeeeeceaeeeeescaeeeeeesaaeeeeeecaeeeeeescaeeeeessstaeeseeessiees 192 8 2 Part families Q parameters in place of numerical ValUeS cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeessseeeeees 193 ApPpIliCatON seinri nns rennan eee NEE EREE 193 8 3 Describing contours with mathematical FUNCTIONS cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeenseeeeeeeesseneeeees 194 APpPICatiO Msisi aAa a sede aa Enae a T E A D a AE 194 Do E A E EO EE E E E N E ES 194 Programming fundamental OPerationS 0 cccceccscecessseeececeesseeeccesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeesssseeeesesseeesessssteeeesesaes 195 8 4 T Angle functions reae Eae EEE EAA eA EEEE E AAEE EA stone n EEEE ARa 196 Bae a E A E A E E tnesioseed 196 Programming trigonometric FUNCTIONS 0 ccccecccececceesseeeceeeeeeeeeeesseeeeecesseeeeeeetueeeeeesstaeeeeeesseeeseeesaas 196 A E EA 197 PAP PIC QUO adaa a a a cutee 197 8 6 If then decisions with Q parameters cccccccceessseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeessaeeeeeesaaeeesesecneseeseessneeeeness 198 Applicat Miser a e a aaa aa a aaa aa Ea 198 Unconditional JUrmMps ccccccecceccceecececeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeecececeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseceeceeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseceessesseseeeeeeeeees 198 Programming iHthen GEGCISIONS c cicccc
354. of NC programs This can reduce the memory space available to you TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 95 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 3 File manager Fundamentals File names When you store programs tables and texts as files the TNC adds an extension to the file name separated by a point This extension indicates the file type File name File type PROG20 H File names should not exceed 24 characters otherwise the TNC cannot display the entire file name File names on the TNC must comply with this standard The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003 1 2004 Edition Posix Standard Accordingly the file names may include the characters below ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZabcdefg hijklmnopgqrstuvwxyz0123456789 _ You should not use any other characters in file names in order to prevent any file transfer problems gt The maximum limit for the path and file name together is 255 characters see Paths page 98 96 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 File manager Fundamentals 3 3 Displaying externally generated files on the TNC The TNC features several additional tools which you can use to display the files shown in the table below Some of the files can also be edited File types Type PDF files pdf Excel tables xls csv Internet files html Text files txt ini Graphics files bmp gif jpg png
355. of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value gt Rotary pos ref ax Angle of rotation around which only the reference axis of the machining plane is distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value gt Rotary pos minor ax Angle of rotation around which only the minor axis of the machining plane is distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value gt Coordinate of workpiece surface absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin 382 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 PATTERN DEF pattern definition 15 4 Defining a full circle CIRCLE re J es If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to 0 then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the machining cycle gt Bolt hole circle center X absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the X axis gt Bolt hole circle center Y absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the Y axis gt Bolt hole circle diameter Diameter of the bolt hole circle gt Starting angle Polar angle of the first machining position Reference axis Reference axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value gt Number of repetitions Total
356. oft key to switch to text entry gt Enter the number of repeats REP and confirm with the ENT key 178 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Any desired program as subprogram 7 4 74 Any desired program as subprogram Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which 0 BEGIN PGMA another program is called with CALL PGM 2 Then the other part program is run from beginning to end 3 The TNC then resumes the first part program i e the calling CALL PGM B program with the block after the program call END PGMA Programming notes m The TNC does not need any labels to call any part program m The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions M2 or M30 If you have defined subprograms with labels in the called part program you then need to replace M2 or M30 with the FN 9 IF 0 EQU 0 GOTO LBL 99 jump function to force a jump over this program section m The called part program must not contain a CALL PGM call into the calling part program otherwise an infinite loop will result TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 179 7 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 74 Any desired program as subprogram Calling any program as a subprogram gt Select the functions for program call Press the PGM CALL key Press the PROGRAM soft key for the TNC to start the dialog for defining the program to be
357. ogram right graphics PROGRAM ETE Graphics 66 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Status displays 2 4 2 4 Status displays General status display The status display in the lower part of the screen informs you of the current state of the machine tool It is displayed automatically in the following modes of operation Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence except if the screen layout is set to display graphics only and during Positioning with Manual Data Input EXproaram run full sequence B programming Gi Program run full sequence TNC no_prog i23 h vezvsew rau Lat ove ros root TT TRans orana In the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes the status display appears in the large window 0 000 500 000 i 2 PA Po tas Bs200 Information in the status display G onm man 0 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS OF gt l OVERVIEW Pos STATUS O PARAM Meaning mit ACTL Position display mode e g actual or nominal coordinates of the current position YIZ Machine axes the TNC displays auxiliary axes in lower case letters The sequence and quantity of displayed axes is determined by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual for more information FSM The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to one tenth of the effective value Spindle speed S feed rate F
358. oint SET_UP in touch probe table In SET_UP you define how far from the defined or calculated Z touch point the TNC is to pre position the touch probe The smaller the value you enter the more exactly you must define the touch Y point position In many touch probe cycles you can also define a set up clearance that is added to SET_UP xX SET_UP Orient the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction TRACK in touch probe table To increase measuring accuracy you can use TRACK ON to have an infrared touch probe oriented in the programmed probe direction before every probe process In this way the stylus is always deflected in the same direction gt If you change TRACK ON you must recalibrate the touch probe TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 471 Touch probe cycles 20 2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles Touch trigger probe probing feed rate F in touch probe table In F you define the feed rate at which the TNC is to probe the workpiece Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning FMAX In FMAX you define the feed rate at which the TNC pre positions the touch probe or positions it between measuring points Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning F_PREPOS in touch probe table In F_PREPOS you define whether the TNC is to position the touch probe at the feed rate defined in FMAX or at rapid traverse Input value FMAX
359. oint A gt Select the probing direction by soft key gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button gt If you need the current datum later write down the value that appears in the Datum display gt Datum Enter 0 gt Cancel the dialog Press the END key gt Select the probing function again Press the PROBING POS soft key gt Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point B gt Select the probe direction with the soft keys Same axis but from the opposite direction gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button The value displayed as datum is the distance between the two points on the coordinate axis To return to the datum that was active before the length measurement gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING POS soft key gt Probe the first touch point again gt Set the datum to the value that you wrote down previously gt Cancel the dialog Press the END key 310 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Touch Probe Functions 11 7 software option 17 Using touch probe functions with mechanical probes or measuring dials If you do not have an electronic 3 D touch probe on your machine you can also use all the previously described manual touch probe functions exception calibration function with mechanical probes or by simply touching the workpiece with the tool
360. ole at the feed rate for pre positioning until the tooth has reached set up clearance on the underside of the workpiece 4 The TNC then centers the tool again over the bore hole switches on the spindle and the coolant and moves at the feed D ma X rate for boring to the depth of bore 5 If a dwell time is entered the tool will pause at the top of the bore hole and will then be retracted from the hole again The TNC carries out another oriented spindle stop and the tool is once again displaced by the off center distance 6 The tool then retracts to set up clearance at the feed rate for pre positioning and from there if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX Please note while programming Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle This cycle is effective only for machines with servo controlled spindle Special boring bars for upward cutting are required for this cycle Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter depth determines the working direction Note A positive sign bores in the direction of the positive spindle axis The entered tool length is the total length to the underside of the boring bar and not just to the tooth When calculating the starting point for boring the TNC considers the tooth length of the boring bar and the thickness of t
361. on If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 3 2767 mm Tool offset length Breakage tolerance length RBREAK Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Breakage tolerance radius 153 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Edit the tool table The tool table that is active during execution of the part program is Edie cane saruna Biman designated TOOL T and must be saved in the TNC table directory eee ee a Other tool tables that are to be archived or used for test runs are given different file names with the extension T By default for the abe Test Run and Programming modes the TNC also uses the TOOL T a tool table In the Test Run mode press the TOOL TABLE soft key to edit it R R2 o A To open the tool table TOOL T a gt Select any machine operating mode Toor gt Select the tool table Press the TOOL TABLE soft gi Ti key gia aan ane gt Set the EDIT soft key to ON OFF oN Displaying only specific tool types filter setting gt Press the TABLE FILTER soft key fourth soft key row gt Select the tool type by pressing a soft key The TNC only shows tools of the type selected gt Cancel the filter Press the SHOW ALL soft key T
362. on Infrared transmission e Workpiece alignment e Setting datums e Workpiece measurement Tool touch probes TT 140 TT 449 TL e Tool measurement Signal transmission by cable Infrared transmission Contact free laser systems e Wear monitoring e Tool breakage detection 819494 21 Ver01 SWO2 5 2014 Printed in Germany H
363. onal axis m RI Inside radius for a hollow cylinder gt The DIST and RI parameters are optional and do not need to be programmed Example Display the BLK FORM CYLINDER in the NC program 0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM Program begin name unit of measure 1 BLK FORM CYLINDER Z R50 L105 DIST 5 RI10 Spindle axis radius length distance inside radius 2 END PGM NEW MM Program end name unit of measure Opening a new part program You always enter a part program in the PROGRAMMING mode of operation An example of program initiation gt Select the PROGRAMMING mode of operation gt Call the file manager Press the PGM MGT key Select the directory in which you wish to store the new program FILE NAME NEW H m gt Enter the new program name and confirm your entry with the ENT key gt Select the unit of measure Press the MM or INCH nm soft key The TNC switches the screen layout and initiates the dialog for defining the BLK FORM workpiece blank gt Select a rectangular workpiece blank Press the soft key for a rectangular blank form WORKING PLANE IN GRAPHIC XY gt Enter spindle axis e g Z WORKPIECE BLANK DEF MINIMUM eiT gt Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MIN point and confirm each of your entries with the ENT key WORKPIECE BLANK DEF MAXIMUM a gt Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MAX point and confirm each of your entries
364. ons for calculation of circles a String parameters Programming aids n Calculator E Complete list of all current error messages 504 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 User functions Technical Information 21 3 Context sensitive help function for error messages Graphic support for the programming of cycles Comment blocks in the NC program Teach In Actual positions can be transferred directly into the NC program Test run graphics Display modes Graphic simulation before program run even while another program is being run Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Magnification of details Programming graphics In the Programming mode the contour of the NC blocks is drawn on screen while they are being entered 2 D pencil trace graphics even while another program is running Program run graphics Display modes Graphic simulation of real time machining in plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Machining time Calculation of machining time in the Test Run operating mode Display of the current machining time in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes Returning to the contour Mid program startup in any block in the program returning the tool to the calculated nominal position to continue machining Program interruption contour departure and return Datum tables Multiple datum tables for storing workpiece
365. ons for the 3 D touch probe Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Fundamentals TNC model software and features Software options The TNC 128 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions Touch Probe Functions option 17 Touch probe cycles a Datum setting in the Manual Operation mode a Automatic tool measurement HEIDENHAIN DNC option 18 a Communication with external PC applications over COM component TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 TNC model software and features Feature Content Level upgrade functions Along with software options significant further improvements of the TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level upgrade functions Functions subject to the FCL are not available simply by updating the software on your TNC gt All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge when you receive a new machine Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n wher
366. oordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Decrement Q212 incremental Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 after each infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 No Breaks before retracting 0213 Number of chip breaks after which the TNC is to withdraw the tool from the hole for chip removal For chip breaking the TNC retracts the tool each time by the value in Q256 Input range 0 to 99999 Minimum plunging depth Q205 incremental If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 NC blocks 11 CYCL DEF 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Q200 2 Q201 20 Q206 150 Q202 5 Q211 0 Q203 20 Q204 50 Q212 0 2 Q213 3 Q205 3 Q211 0 25 Q208 500 Q256 0 2 Q395 0 SET UP CLEARANCE DEPTH FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG PLUNGING DEPTH DWELL TIME AT TOP SURFACE COORDINATE 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE DECREMENT CHIP BREAKING MIN PLUNGING DEPTH DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM RETRACTION FEED RATE DIST FOR CHIP BRKNG DEPTH REFERENCE 405 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 g
367. operation restart the spindle with M3 or M4 If you enter the thread pitch of the tap in the Pitch column of the tool table the TNC compares the thread pitch from the tool table with the thread pitch defined in the cycle The TNC displays an error message if the values do not match Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface 422 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder Cycle 207 16 12 Cycle parameters 207 RT gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Thread depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 gt Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute NC blocks Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input 26 CYCL DEF 207 RIGID TAPPI E range 99999
368. or form view gt Press the key for setting the screen layout Select the respective soft key for list view or form view form view with or without dialog texts EJ Program run full Brie editing CY Progranmin gh Table editin In the form view the TNC lists the line numbers with the contents of the first column in the left half of the screen In the right half you can change the data gt Press the ENT key or the arrow key to move to the next input L m vef field gt To select another line press the green navigation key folder symbol This moves the cursor to the left window and you can select the desired line with the arrow keys Press the green navigation key to switch back to the input window TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 267 Programming Special functions 10 2 Freely definable tables FN 26 TABOPEN Open a freely definable table With the function FN 26 TABOPEN you open a freely definable table to be written to with FN 27 or to be read from with FN 28 Only one table can be open in an NC program A new block with TABOPEN automatically closes the last opened table The table to be opened must have the file name extension TAB Example Open the table TAB1 TAB which is saved in the directory TNC DIR1 56 FN 26 TABOPEN TNC DIR1 TAB1 TAB 268 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Freely de
369. ord of the current block If required press the info key again to load the desired word Start the search process The TNC moves to the next occurrence of the text you are searching for gt To replace the text and then move to the next occurrence of the text press the REPLACE soft key To replace all text occurrences press the REPLACE ALL soft key To skip the text and move to its next occurrence press the FIND soft key End the search function REPLACE v v 94 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 File manager Fundamentals 3 3 3 3 File manager Fundamentals Files Files in the TNC Type Programs in HEIDENHAIN format H Tables for Tools T Tool changers TCH Datums D Points PNT Presets PR Touch probes TP Backup files BAK Dependent files e g structure items DEP Freely definable tables TAB Texts as ASCII files A Protocol files TXT Help files CHM When you write a part program on the TNC you must first enter a program name The TNC saves the program to the internal memory as a file with the same name The TNC can also save texts and tables as files The TNC provides a special file management window in which you can easily find and manage your files Here you can call copy rename and erase files With the TNC you can manage and save files up to a total size of 2 GB Depending on the setting the TNC generates a backup file bak after editing and saving
370. ories Technical Information 21 3 Electronic handwheels a One HR 410 portable handwheel or m One HR 130 panel mounted handwheel or m Up to three HR 150 panel mounted handwheels via HRA 110 handwheel adapter Touch probes a TS 220 Triggering 3 D touch probe with cable connection E TT 140 3 D touch trigger probe for tool measurement m KT 130 Simple touch trigger probe with cable connection Touch Probe Functions option 17 Touch probe cycles HEIDENHAIN DNC option 18 Python OEM Process option 45 Datum setting in the Manual Operation mode Automatic tool measurement Communication with external PC applications over COM component Python applications on the TNC TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 507 Tables and overviews 21 3 Technical Information Input format and unit of TNC functions Positions coordinates chamfer lengths 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 places before the decimal point places after the decimal point mm Tool numbers 0 to 32 7679 5 1 Tool names 16 characters enclosed by quotation marks with TOOL CALL Permitted special characters amp Delta values for tool compensation 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm Spindle speeds 0 to 99 999 999 5 3 rom Feed rates O to 99 999 999 5 3 mm min or mm tooth or mm rev Dwell time in Cycle 9 0 to 3600 000 4 3 s Thread pitch in var
371. oring and thread cycles 16 12 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder Cycle 207 16 12 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder Cycle 207 Cycle run The TNC cuts the thread without a floating tap holder in one or more passes 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set up clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 4 The TNC stops the spindle turning at set up clearance Please note while programming Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle This cycle is effective only for machines with servo controlled spindle Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed The TNC calculates the feed rate from the spindle speed If the feed rate override is used during tapping the TNC automatically adjusts the feed rate The feed rate override knob is disabled At the end of the cycle the spindle comes to a stop Before the next
372. ormula entering function Press the Q c key and the FORMULA soft key a a gt Press the Q key on the externalASCII keyboard b PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT gt Enter parameter number 25 and press the ENT key gt Shift the soft key row and select the arc tangent function gt Shift the soft key row and open the parentheses gt Enter O parameter number 12 Select division gt Enter O parameter number 13 gt Close parentheses and conclude formula entry Pas epyeageat END o Example NC block 37 Q25 ATAN Q12 Q13 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 235 Programming Q Parameters 8 11 String parameters 8 11 String parameters String processing functions You can use the QS parameters to create variable character strings You can output such character strings for example through the FN 16 F PRINT function to create variable logs You can assign a linear sequence of characters letters numbers special characters and spaces up to a length of 256 characters to a string parameter You can also check and process the assigned or imported values by using the functions described below As in O parameter programming you can use a total of 2000 OS parameters see Principle and overview of functions page 190 The STRING FORMULA and FORMULA O parameter functions contain various functions for processing the string parameters STRING FORMULA functions Sof
373. ositions Traverses that were carried out with M118 handwheel superimpositioning M118 With the MOD function Position display 1 you can select the position display in the status display With the MOD function Position display 2 you can select the position display in the status display 352 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Displaying operating times 14 7 14 6 Setting the unit of measure Application This MOD function determines whether the coordinates are displayed in millimeters metric system or inches Metric system e g X 15 789 mm the value is displayed to 3 decimal places m Inch system e g X 0 6216 inches value is displayed to 4 decimal places If you would like to activate the inch display the TNC shows the feed rate in inch min In an inch program you must enter the feed rate larger by a factor of 10 14 7 Displaying operating times Application The MACHINE TIME MOD function enables you to see various types of operating times Manual operation A Operating time Meaning fr _ a Control on Operating time of the control since at being put into service Machine on Operating time of the machine tool since a being put into service Program run Duration of controlled operation since a being put into service Bitest run w T The machine tool builder can provide further operating time displays Refer to your mac
374. otes You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a program Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between 999 999 999 and 999 999 999 The input range is limited to 16 digits of which 9 may be before the decimal point Internally the TNC calculates numbers up to a value of 10 You can assign a maximum of 254 characters to QS parameters The TNC always assigns some O and OS parameters the same data For example Q108 is always assigned the current tool radius see Preassigned Q parameters page 247 The TNC saves numerical values internally in a binary number format standard IEEE 754 Due to this standardized format some decimal numbers do not have an exact binary representation round off error Keep this in mind especially when you use calculated Q parameter contents for jump commands or positioning movements TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 191 Programming O Parameters 8 1 Principle and overview of functions Calling Q parameter functions When you are writing a part program press the OQ key in the numeric keypad for numerical input and axis selection below the The TNC then displays the following soft keys Function group Soft key Page Basic arithmetic assign add ae 194 subtract multiply divide ARITHM square root Trigonometric functions ee 196 NOMETRY Function for calculating circles CIRCLE 197 CALCU LAT
375. ou can now insert the temporarily stored block at a different location gt Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the temporarily stored text block ee gt Press the INSERT BLOCK soft key The text block is inserted You can insert the temporarily stored text block as often as desired Transferring the selected block to a different file gt Select the text block as described previously aes gt Press the APPEND TO FILE soft key The TNC displays the dialog prompt Destination file gt Enter the path and name of the destination file The TNC appends the selected text to the specified file If no target file with the specified name is found the TNC creates a new file with the selected text Inserting another file at the cursor position gt Move the cursor to the location in the text where you wish to insert another file aoe gt Press the READ FILE soft key The TNC displays the dialog prompt File name gt Enter the path and name of the file you want to insert TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 277 Programming Special functions 10 5 Creating Text Files Finding text sections With the text editor you can search for words or character strings in a text Two functions are available Finding the current text The search function is used for finding the next occurrence of the word in which the cursor is presently located gt Move the cursor to the desir
376. ove machine axes Jog POSItiOnINg c eee 282 Moving the axes With machine axis direction DUON S 2 nccccccasncvensisdnaneenttaee ance 282 Moving the machine axes 282 With the handwheel 283 NC error MESSAGES eee 131 Nesting sssniiniieiieeeeeererrrrrre 181 Network Connection 118 Network SettingS 0602 361 Open BMP file 0 0 115 Open GIF filesini 115 Opening Excel files 0 0 111 Opening graphic files 115 Opening TXT files 0 114 Open INI fileuse 114 Open JPG file 115 Open PNG file 115 Open TXT fil eee 114 Operating times e 353 Option nuMbel cceeeee 354 Output of formatted Q PALAMETE S cc eceececeeeeeee teens 207 Parameter programming See Q parameter programming 190 236 Part families 193 PARI anar aE 98 Pattern definition 000 378 PDF ViOWEP vv c ccisssccsiassseaacecsssens 110 Peck drilling cee 410 414 Deepened starting point 413 415 Plan VIQW ccccccccccececeeeeeeeaeaeenes 321 PLC and NC synchronization 220 Point table 389 Positioning 314 With Manual Data Input 314 Positioning lOgIC 068 473 Preset table 287 299 Transferring test results 299 Principal AX S cccccce cece 81 81 Probing feed rate 472 ma k 0 f 10 en 84 EdItNG enaena 90 Opening a new program 86 Org
377. permissible value for infeed is 10 mm 282 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Moving the machine axes 11 2 Traverse with the HR 410 electronic handwheel The portable HR 410 handwheel is equipped with two permissive buttons The permissive buttons are located below the star grip You can only move the machine axes when a permissive button is depressed machine dependent function The HR 410 handwheel features the following operating elements EMERGENCY STOP button Handwheel Permissive buttons Axis address keys Keys for defining the feed rate slow medium fast the feed rates are set by the machine tool builder Direction in which the TNC moves the selected axis Machine functions set by the machine tool builder ohwWN NO Traversing axes The red indicator lights show the axis and feed rate you have selected gt Select the El Handwheel operating mode gt Press and hold a permissive button Select the axis gt Select the feed rate gt Move the active axis in the positive direction or gt Move the active axis in the negative direction ene e TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 283 Manual operation and setup 11 3 Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M 11 3 Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M Application In the Manual Operation and El Handwheel operating modes you c
378. piece MACHINING ccccceecsceceeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeeeaas 170 Capurro actual POSION aoei O EEE EEA 171 Example Linear MOVEMENL cccccecceece cee ee eee ee cece aaa aeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceaaeaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeccecueeaeeeeeeeeeneeeenees 172 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 7 1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats cccccesssecceecsssseeeeeseeneeeeensnseeeeeseaaes 174 TAG Sareea cette eects E E dal eae rete E E Guanes comentenean 174 Te 2h SUD PO Gea Sores eee ec Fa a a eee egg See eg goes ces aces Fe saan E neo 175 Ope rating SEQUENCE saver besinceltesatenensweundsecenetanceetasdthoten twandedtsnenenaaddeddbinadie de gaataltenpeasaanes EEEa EEEE TAEAE 175 Programming NOTES ccceeceecccececeeee cee ceeae eee eeeeeeeeeeeeceeceaeaeeeeeeeeeceseeee ce ceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 175 Programming a subprogi aM esines a E TEE aA E AAEE AEE 175 Calling a SUDPFOGIAM ccccccccccceeccccecseeeeececcseeeeeeceeeeecceeeeeeecaeeeeeecaeeeeeescaeeeeescaaeeeesccaeeeeessnseeeeesees 176 3a Program secUon Tepes ae EEEE AAE AEAEE ERRE EARE EEEE EERE AEE ARAARA REEE 177 LoD Os EE EE A E E AEE T E A E A E ES EEA EE 177 Be EEE A T E E E OO N 177 Programming NOTES sesanan aa a n aaea ae naa Taaa aE 177 Programming a program secti n repeatrar in E E EE E REEERE E 178 Calling a program section TEP Sabie scseinedscsovs doediontseveniacssanecadessnmeac
379. plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Finishing allowance for floor Q369 incremental value Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental Infeed per cut 0338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 431 WP Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud milling 17 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 gt Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb 1 up cut gt Path overlap factor 0370 Q370 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 1 to 1 414 Q204 Q203 NC blocks 8 CYCL DEF 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET Q215 0 MACHINING OPERATION Q218 80 FIRST SIDE LENGTH Q219 60 2ND SIDE LENGTH Q201 20 DEPTH Q367 0 POCKET POSITION Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q207 500 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q385 500
380. presets The TNC PRESET displays the available possibilities for entry in the soft key row See the table below for a description of the entry possibilities gt Select the line in the preset table that you want to change the line number is the preset number gt If needed select the column axis in the preset table that you want to change CORRECT gt Use the soft keys to select one of the available THE op jego R PRESET entry possibilities see the following table Function Soft key Directly transfer the actual position of the tool the measuring dial as the new datum This function only saves the datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Assign any value to the actual position of the ENTER tool the measuring dial This function only or saves the datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired value in the pop up window Incrementally shift a datum already stored in CORRECT the table This function only saves the datum ae in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired corrective value with the correct sign in the pop up window If inch display is active Enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 11 4 289 Manual operation and setup 11 4 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe Function Soft key Directly enter the new datum without EDIT calc
381. probe cycle the TNC automatically performs all prepositioning movements and probing operations The TNC positions the touch probe to the individual touch points taking the safety clearance into account If a clearance height has been defined the TNC positions the touch probe to clearance height in the spindle axis beforehand The TNC approaches the position at the feed rate FMAX defined in the touch probe table The defined probing feed rate F is used for the actual probing operation Before starting the automatic probing routine you need to preposition the touch probe near the first touch point Offset the touch probe by approximately the safety clearance value from touch probe table value from input form opposite to the probing direction For an inside circle with a large diameter the TNC can also preposition the touch probe on a circular arc at the positioning feed rate FMAX This requires that you enter a safety clearance for prepositioning and the hole diameter in the input form Position the touch probe inside the hole at a position that is offset by approximately the safety clearance from the wall For prepositioning keep in mind the starting angle for the first probing operation with an angle of 0 the TNC probes in the positive direction of the principal axis TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 295 Manual operation and setup 11 5 Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Func
382. r SOL PLC CFG instead of aborting the program with an error message Value 0 Server error has the normal effect Machine status 20 1 Active tool number Prepared tool number 3 Active tool axis 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 6 U 7 V 8 W 4 Programmed spindle speed Active spindle condition 1 not defined 0 M3 active 1 M4 active 2 M5 after M3 3 M5 after M4 Gear range Coolant status O off 1 on Active feed rate 10 Index of prepared tool 11 Index of active tool Channel data 25 1 Channel number TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 211 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional functions Group name ID no Number Index Meaning Cycle parameter 30 1 Set up clearance of active fixed cycle 2 Drilling depth milling depth of active fixed cycle 3 Plunging depth of active fixed cycle 4 Feed rate for pecking in active fixed cycle 5 1st side length for rectangular pocket cycle 6 2nd side length for rectangular pocket cycle 7 1st side length for slot cycle 8 2nd side length for slot cycle 10 Feed rate for milling in active fixed cycle 11 Direction of rotation for active fixed cycle 12 Dwell time for active fixed cycle 13 Thread pitch for Cycles 17 14 Finishing allowance for active fixed cycle 22 Probing path 23 Probing feed rate Modal condition 35 1 Dimensions 0 absolute G90 1 incremental G91
383. r Eai Mode his B amp 2000 oN omiman ovr 100 u 5 3 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS OF lt m _ OVERVIEW pas status o PARAM B EXproaram run full sequence programming Gl Program run full sequence pez kiss TNG ne_prog 123 h BEGIN POM 123 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Pau La Jove Ju Pos Toot 77 Trane aran a 1 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 240 3 TOOL CALL 15 Z 52000 amp Z 100 RO FMAX M3 5 X 30 RO FMAX 6 30 RO FMAX 7 z 2 RO FMAX e z 4 Ro F500 015 10 X a5 Re 11 Y 85 A apa i2 ms Re tte aj K 0 000 0 000 500 000 wade nont o Tas Bs 2000 onm min ovr 100 u 5 9 status status Tool status oF Salama overview Pos Tais PARAM Ee Introduction 2 5 Window Manager 2 5 Window Manager The machine tool builder determines the scope of function and behavior of the window manager Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual The TNC features the Xfce window manager Xfce is a standard application for UNIX based operating systems and is used to manage graphical user interfaces The following functions are possible with the window manager Display a task bar for switching between various applications user interfaces Manage an additional desktop on which special applications from your machine tool builder can run Control the focus between NC software applications and those of the
384. r is smaller than the second value or parameter jump to specified label 198 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 If then decisions with Q parameters 38 6 Abbreviations used IF If EQU Equal to NE Not equal to GT Greater than LT Less than GOTO Go to UNDEFINED Undefined DEFINED Defined TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 199 Programming Q Parameters 8 7 Checking and changing Q parameters 8 7 Checking and changing O parameters Procedure You can check Q parameters in all operating modes and also edit rogram run full sequence Eiprogranming them P al Program run full se quence gt If you are in a program run interrupt it if required for example IBLIS by pressing the machine STOP button and the INTERNAL STOP oe See soft key If you are in a test run interrupt it A a bo s 22 CALL LBL 15 REF gt Call Q parameter functions Press the Q INFO soft pean a key or the Q key 25 END PGM STAT1 hs OK cance gt The TNC lists all parameters and their current o oo 0 values Use the arrow keys or the GOTO key to mr ere etc select the desired parameter e A gt If you would like to change the value press the a a sje om EDIT CURRENT FIELD soft key enter the new value and confirm with the ENT key gt To leave the value unchanged press the PRESENT
385. ransaction is not concluded A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE remains for the indexed row For all other rows it is reset gt Parameter no for result Q parameter in which ROLLBACK the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle gt Database SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT gt Database Index to SQL result Line that is to remain in the result set Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE 30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX Q2 40 SQL UPDATEQ1 HANDLE Q5 INDEX Q2 50 SQL COMMITQ1 HANDLE Q5 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE 30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX Q2 50 SQL ROLLBACKQ1 HANDLE Q5 231 Programming Q Parameters 8 10 Entering formulas directly 8 10 Entering formulas directly Entering formulas You can enter mathematical formulas that
386. rant access to the respective service If you do not specify any computer under Computer the setting Prohibit all will become active automatically when the configuration is saved Log If Log is activated a red message is output if a network package for this service was blocked A blue message is output if a network package for this service was accepted Computer If the setting Permit some is selected under Method the relevant computers can be specified here The computers can be entered with their IP addresses or host names separated by commas If a host name is used the system checks upon closing or saving of the dialog whether the host name can be translated into an IP address If this is not the case the user receives an error message and the dialog box is not closed If you enter a valid host name this host name will be translated into an IP address upon every startup of the control If a computer that was entered with its name changes Its IP address you may have to restart the control or formally change the firewall configuration to ensure that the control uses the new IP address for a host name in the firewall Advanced These settings are only intended for your options network specialists Set standard Resets the settings to the default values values recommended by HEIDENHAIN TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 369 MOD functions 14 13 Load machine configuration
387. rator for the correct address and port Telemaintenance The machine manufacturer configures the server for telemaintenance here Changes must always be made in agreement with your machine tool builder gt Select the Ping Routing tab to enter the ping and routing settings Setting Meaning Ping In the Address field enter the IP number for which you want to check the network connection Input Four numerical values separated by periods e g 160 1 180 20 As an alternative you can enter the name of the computer whose connection you want to check Press the Start button to begin the test The TNC shows the status information in the Ping field m Press the Stop button to conclude the test Routing For network specialists Status information of the operating system for the current routing Press the Update button to refresh the routing information gt Select the NFS UID GID tab to enter the user and group identifications Setting Meaning Set UID m User ID Definition of which user GID for NFS identification the end user uses to access shares files in the network Ask your network specialist for the proper value Group ID Definition of the group identification with which you access files in the network Ask your network specialist for the proper value 364 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Ethernet interface 14 11 gt DHCP server Settings for automatic network
388. rd behavior The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate F in mm min Behavior with M136 In inch programs M136 is not permitted in combination with the new alternate feed rate FU The spindle is not permitted to be controlled when M136 is active With M136 the TNC does not move the tool in mm min but rather at the programmed feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution If you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override the TNC changes the feed rate accordingly Effect M136 becomes effective at the start of block You can cancel M136 by programming M137 258 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior 9 4 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 Standard behavior In the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M140 With M140 MB move back you can enter a path in the direction of the tool axis for departure from the contour Input If you enter M140 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog and asks for the desired path of tool departure from the contour Enter the requested path that the tool should follow when departing the contour or press the MB MAX soft key to move to the limit of the traverse range In addition you can program the feed rate at which the tool traverses the entered p
389. re you want to insert a position value gt Select the actual position capture function In the soft key row the TNC displays the axes whose positions can be transferred gt Select the axis The TNC writes the current position of the selected axis into the active input box t In the working plane the TNC always captures the coordinates of the tool center even though tool radius compensation is active In the tool axis the TNC always captures the coordinates of the tool tip and thus always takes the active tool length compensation into account The TNC keeps the soft key row for axis selection active until you deactivate it by pressing the actual position capture key again This behavior remains in effect even if you save the current block and open a new one with a axis key If you select a block element in which you must choose an input alternative via soft key e g for radius compensation then the TNC also closes the soft key row for axis selection TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 89 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening and entering programs Editing a program gt You cannot edit a program while it is being run by the TNC in a machine operating mode While you are creating or editing a part program you can select any desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the arrow keys or the soft keys Function Soft key Keys G
390. red 4 Z axis mirrored 64 U axis mirrored 128 V axis mirrored 256 W axis mirrored Combinations Sum of individual axes 1 Active scaling factor in X axis Active scaling factor in Y axis Active scaling factor in Z axis Active scaling factor in U axis Active scaling factor in V axis Active scaling factor in W axis Ni A A ATA ALA OO O NI WI Nh Active datum shift 220 X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis oloinNi oJ a AJOJN W axis TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 215 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional functions Group name ID no Number Index Meaning Traverse range 230 2 1to9 Negative software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 3 1to9 Positive software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 5 Software limit switch on or off 0 on 1 off Nominal position in the REF 1 X axis system 240 Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis OO O N OO a BR Ww rhy W axis Current position in the 1 X axis active coordinate system 270 Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis O O N OO on AJIO N W axis 216 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Additional functions 8 8
391. referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from safetyDistStylus Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Cutter measurement O No 1 Yes Choose whether the control is also to measure the individual teeth maximum of 20 teeth 486 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Measure the tool length and radius Cycle 483 software option 17 20 9 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 20 9 Measure the tool length and radius Cycle 483 software option 17 Touch Probe Functions software option 17 Cycle run To measure both the length and radius of a tool program the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 483 This cycle is particularly suitable for the first measurement of tools as it saves time when compared with individual measurement of length and radius Via input parameters you can select the desired type of measurement Measuring the tool while it is rotating Measuring the tool while it is rotating and subsequently measuring the individual teeth The TNC measures the tool in a fixed programmed sequence First it measures the tool radius then the tool length The sequence of measurement is the same as for Cycles 481 and 482 Please note while programming Before measuring a tool for the first time
392. related datums Touch probe cycles Calibrate the touch probe Datum setting manual Automatic tool measurement TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 505 Tables and overviews 21 3 Technical Information Specifications Components Operating panel TFT color flat panel display with soft keys Program memory 2 GB Input resolution and display step Up to 0 1 um for linear axes Up to 0 0001 for rotary axes Input range Maximum 999 999 999 mm or 999 999 999 Block processing time 6 ms Axis feedback control Position loop resolution Signal period of the position encoder 1024 Cycle time of position controller 3 ms Cycle time of speed controller 200 us Range of traverse Maximum 100 m 3937 inches Spindle speed Maximum 100 000 rpm analog speed command signal Error compensation Linear and nonlinear axis error backlash thermal expansion Stick slip friction Data interfaces One each RS 232 C V 24 max 115 kilobaud Expanded interface with LSV 2 protocol for external operation of the TNC over the interface with HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo Ethernet interface 100 Base T approx 40 to 80 Mbps depending on file type and network utilization 3 x USB 2 0 Ambient temperature 506 Operation 0 C to 45 C Storage 30 C to 70 C TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Access
393. ries of a E upoate particular drive fe TREE Rename a directory RENAME ABc xyz Create a new directory 2 m ee DIRECTORY TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 99 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Calling the file manager gt Press the PGM MGT key The TNC displays the oo a ee file management window see figure for default aanre setting If the TNC displays a different screen EE a a layout press the WINDOW soft key E eo E D SeS e EX16 H 997 02 05 2011 10 15 24 EX16_SL H 1792 02 05 2011 10 15 24 796 2 EX18 H 26 07 2012 01 ma inopiide EX18_SL H 1513 02 05 2011 10 15 24 EX4 H 1038 02 05 2011 10 15 24 HEBEL H 541 02 05 2011 10 15 24 koord h 1598 S 02 05 2011 1 I 02 05 2011 4 The narrow window on the left shows the available drives and directories Drives designate devices with which data are stored or transferred One drive is the internal memory of the TNC Other drives are the interfaces RS232 Ethernet which can be used for example for connecting a personal computer A directory is always eee identified by a folder symbol to the left and the directory name to st vet Tear aa the right Subdirectories are shown to the right of and below their a r gajes gr u parent directories If there are subdirectories you can show or hide them using the key The wide window on th
394. rmation about touch probe Cycles ccccssscccccesssccceeeeeseeeeesesseeeeeeeeseeeeeseessaeeeeeeeas 470 Method Of TUMGU OR tas sat aee acetates react a ca atte teeth aa a E o Madan cee a aaa Aaaa Ea 470 Touch probe cycles in the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel operating modes 470 20 2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles ccssccccccsssneceeeeeeeeceeesseneeeeessseaeeeeensnnaeees 471 Maximum traverse to touch point DIST in touch probe table ccc ccccccceccsteeeeeessseeeeessneeeeeeeeaes 471 Set up clearance to touch point SET_UP in touch probe table cccccccceeeseesaeeeteeeeeeeeeennees 471 Orient the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction TRACK in touch probe table 471 Touch trigger probe probing feed rate F in touch probe table ssisssssesieiiiriniernerrrerriririrrenrenen 472 Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning FMAX ccccccceeesceecceecceeccecceeetesteaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 472 Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning FLPREPOS in touch probe table 00008 472 EX CULING TOUCH probe Cycle Skissernas adiadas aai Eaa aaia D naia ERA eari 473 20 3 Touch iol oe o E E E rescue estate cs onuceee cetecdtnarasenes sate entetitestineeere res omrecacenten ceateseeee 474 G neral inf ra Missioni niaan aiddi a ii a aiaei aiii Rai 474 Editing touch probe tables cccccccccccec cece cceeeee cee ceeeeee
395. rogram 1 in the main program Approach the groups of holes Subprogram 2 in subprogram 1 m Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 2 x 15 45 75 100 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 187 7 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 76 Programming examples _ 88 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming Q Parameters 8 1 Principle and overview of functions 8 1 Principle and overview of functions You can program entire families of parts in a single part program You do this by entering variables called Q parameters instead of fixed numerical values Q parameters can represent information such as Coordinate values Feed rates m Spindle speeds Cycle data Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined with mathematical functions You can also use O parameters to make the execution of machining steps depend on logical conditions Q parameters are designated by letters and a number between 0 and 1999 Parameters that take effect in different manners are available Please refer to the following table Meaning Range Freely applicable parameters they are QO to Q99 globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory Parameters for special TNC functions Q100 to Q199 Parameters that are primarily used for Q200 to Q1199 cycles globally effective for
396. rogram block window displays the following line 3 X 10 RO F100 M3 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 87 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening and entering programs Possible feed rate input Functions for setting the feed rate Rapid traverse non modal Traverse feed rate automatically calculated in TOOL CALL F AUTO Move at the programmed feed rate unit of measure is mm min or 1 10 inch min With rotary axes the TNC interprets the feed rate in degrees min regardless of whether the program is written in mm or inches n e x G lt Define the feed per revolution units in mm rev or inch rev Caution In inch programs FU cannot be combined with M136 7 Define the tooth feed units in mm tooth or inch tooth The number of teeth must be defined in the tool table in the CUT column Functions for conversational guidance Ignore the dialog question a e End the dialog immediately Abort the dialog and erase the block 88 DEL Oo TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Opening and entering programs 3 2 Actual position capture The TNC enables you to transfer the current tool position into the program for example during m Positioning block programming m Cycle programming To transfer the correct position values proceed as follows gt Place the input box at the position in the block whe
397. rs ccic ccscics sccccnesticccttecsnnscevctecccusuiessastecyseceanususeasscectustses snecedesbasecuenscesncienases 247 Values from the PLC Q100 to O10 7 rssmi norana ea a e E eA EEEN 247 AGtive tool radius Q108 a a aE DEEE AEA 247 TOO axis Q109 eee cece cece ee eect tec e ees eeeeeceeeeceeaeeeceeeesecaeeeceeeeeeceeesceeeeceeeeseceeseseeeestcieeescseeseseeeeesteeeee 247 SPINGISEStAtUS OTe E TA 248 Coolant on off QII scccaadeeasteextearcapateagevantadedeeaases obtaacanateacstancn deddhende EENE SEEE RANET EERE ERE REE EE EEEE EnA 248 Overlap actor OTZ E EE E RE A E 248 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program 0113 0 cece ceccseeeeceeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaeeeeeeeees 248 TOOISNGTAS CUI Ay sassccgis dc teliagtsaactidiGantseedhadatwsedssauedesnihdaaneeid OE Me madedspdacdsighd aamsean deans 248 Coordinates after Probing during program FUN ceceeecccecceesssececeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeesesseeeeeessteeseeeesaes 249 Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 9 1 Entering miscellaneous functions M cccccccceessseeeeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeseaaeeeseessaeeseeeesseaeessesaeseeeeeegs 252 F ndamentalS rainane a AEEA EEE Ea duauulbadsannadlacanastuadadeas E ia 252 9 2 M functions for program run inspection spindle and Coolant cccssseccceeesseceeeeeesseeeeeeees 253 VER VIGW oe E E E E A E
398. rst pattini eosina cs sauces cbs EAEE EE E AT 53 Selecting the correct operating MOE ce cc ccceecscccecseeseeecesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaeeeeeeesseeeeeeesseeesesesseeseeeesas 53 selecting the tool table for the test TUM sscccsdiaasccianssdins Gcanatonapcenavnh Agtansasiacedonnnans seananauhseemadiaeeteanaagennaes 53 Choosing the program YOU want tO tOSt cccccccccccccccessececeecsteeeeeescaeeeeeecsaeeeeescaeeeeessaeeeeessseeeeeeeeaas 54 Selecting the screen layout and the vieW s sssssiissttiiitttttt rrtt rrtt tE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EEEE 54 otang THE TSSE r e AE AEE 55 e tools a a A E bie raen 56 Selecting the correct operating MOUE essesrrrrrnerriiiisnenir isni rAr sAN EEEE NUNAN ENEAN AENEAN AE NERENN A EAEEREN SEAN A 56 Preparing and measuring tOOIS cceeeeeeeeece eee eeeee cence eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeciesceeueseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 56 The tool table TOOL Tierens Sonia cnnastallsdusrhastaiaailande daria EEA AEE ER a EEEE 57 WARI A EAT E r r A A ttceesy ii tsneretee 58 Selecting the correct operating MOCE ccccceecscceccsesseececsseseeececseeeececcseseeeesessnseeeecessssseesestnseeeesenteaaees 58 Clamping the WOrkKPiOCE cccccccccccecsseceeeeeceseeeeeeceaeeeeecceeeeeeecaeeeeeeceeeeeescaeeeeescaeeeeescseeeeessteaeeeeee ss 58 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe software option 17 Touch Probe Functions cccccceeeeeeees 59 EZ Running the first programie errore aa
399. run m Programmed interruptions m Pressing the machine STOP button Switching to Program Run Single Block mode If the TNC registers an error during program run it automatically interrupts the machining process Programmed interruptions You can program interruptions directly in the part program The TNC interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following entries Miscellaneous function MO M2 or M30 Miscellaneous function M6 determined by the machine tool builder Interruption through the machine STOP button gt Press the machine STOP button The block that the TNC is currently executing is not completed The NC stop signal in the status display blinks see table gt If you do not wish to continue the machining process you can reset the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key The NC stop signal in the status display goes out In this case the program must be restarted from the program beginning Icon Meaning lo Program run is stopped Interruption of machining by switching to the Program Run Single Block mode of operation You can interrupt a program that is being run in the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation by switching to the Program Run Single Block mode The TNC interrupts the machining process at the end of the current block 334 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Moving the machine axes during an interruption You can move the machine
400. ry in which the PDF file is saved Sie HR 620 Handiheal creases Operator Comfort gt Move the highlight to the PDF file v Press ENT The TNC opens the PDF file in its own application using the PDF viewer additional tool return to the TNC user interface while leaving the PDF file open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface If you position the mouse pointer over a button a brief tooltip explaining the function of this button will gt With the key combination ALT TAB you can always be displayed More information on how to use the PDF viewer is provided under Help 110 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 To exit the PDF viewer proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Close The TNC returns to the file manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the PDF viewer gt gt Press the key for switching the soft keys The PDF viewer opens the File pull down menu gt Select the Close menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager Displaying and editing Excel files Proceed as follows to open and edit Excel files with the extension xls xlsx or csv directly on the TNC gt Call the file manager gt Select the directory in which the Excel file is saved
401. s Additional options button Additional settings for the DNS DHCP server Set standard values button Set factory settings TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 365 MOD functions 14 11 Ethernet interface Network settings specific to the device gt Press the DEFINE MOUNT soft key to enter the network settings for a specific device You can define any number of network settings but you can manage only seven at one time Setting Meaning Network drive List of all connected network drives The TNC shows the respective status of the network connections in the columns Mount Network drive connected not connected Auto Network drive is to be connected automatically manually m Type Type of network connection cifs and nfs are possible Drive Designation of the drive on the TNC ID Internal ID that identifies if a mount point has been used for more than one connection Server Name of the server Authorization name Name of the directory on the server that the TNC is to access m User User name with which the user logs on to the network Password Network drive password protected not protected Request password Request Do not request password during connection Options Display additional connection options To manage the network drives use the screen buttons To add network drives use the Add button The TNC then starts the connection
402. s a Example a 25mm b 50 mm a arctan a b arctan 0 5 26 57 Furthermore a b c where a a x a c y a b Programming trigonometric functions Press the ANGLE FUNCTION soft key to call the trigonometric functions The TNC then displays the soft keys below Programming Compare Example Programming fundamental operations Function Soft key FN 6 SINE e g FN 6 Q20 SIN Q5 Define and assign the sine of an angle in degrees FN 7 COSINE e g FN 7 Q21 COS Q5 coso Define and assign the cosine of an angle in degrees FN 8 SQUARE ROOT FROM SQUARE SUM e g FN 8 Q10 5 LEN 4 X LEN Y Form and assign length from two values FN 13 ANGLE E e g FN 13 Q20 25 ANG Q1 X ANG Form and assign an angle with arctan from two sides or with sine and cosine of the angle 0 lt angle lt 360 196 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Calculation of circles 8 5 8 5 Calculation of circles Application The TNC can use the functions for calculating circles to calculate the circle center and the circle radius from three or four given points on the circle The calculation is more accurate if four points are used Application These functions can be used if you wish to determine the location and size of a hole or a pitch circle using the programmable probing function Function Soft key FN23 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from thr
403. s a tool undersize DL DR DR2 lt 0 An undersize is entered in the tool table for wear Delta values are usually entered as numerical values In a TOOL CALL block you can also assign the values to O parameters Input range You can enter a delta value with up to 99 999 mm Delta values from the tool table influence the graphical representation of the tool Delta values from the TOOL CALL block do not change the represented size of the tool during the simulation However the programmed delta values move the tool by the defined value in the simulation Entering tool data into the program The number length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the TOOL DEF block of the part program gt Select the tool definition Press the TOOL DEF key gt Tool number Each tool is uniquely identified by its tool number gt Tool length Compensation value for the tool length gt Tool radius Compensation value for the tool radius In the programming dialog you can transfer the value for tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by pressing the desired axis soft key Example 4 TOOL DEF 5 L 10 R 5 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 DL lt 0 4 Tool data 5 2 149 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Enter tool data into the table You can define and store up to 32767 tools and their tool data in a tool table Also see the Editing Function
404. s later in this Chapter In order to be able to assign various compensation data to a tool indexing tool number insert a line and extend the tool number by a dot and a number from 1 to 9 e g T 5 2 You must use tool tables if m you wish to use indexed tools such as stepped drills with more than one length compensation value m your machine tool has an automatic tool changer m you want to work with Cycles 25x If you create or manage further tool tables the file name has to start with a letter You can select either list view or form view for tables via the Screen layout key 150 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tool table Standard tool data Tooldata 5 2 Abbr Inputs Dialog T Number by which the tool is called in the program e g 5 indexed 5 2 NAME Name by which the tool is called in the program no Tool name more than 32 characters all capitals no spaces L Compensation value for tool length L Tool length R Compensation value for the tool radius R Tool radius R R2 Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters only for graphical Tool radius R2 representation of a machining operation with spherical or toroid cutters DL Delta value for tool length L Tool length oversize DR Delta value for tool radius R Tool radius oversize DR2 Delta value for tool radius R2 Tool radius oversize R2 TL Set tool lock TL for Tool Locked Tool locked Yes ENT
405. sational Programming 5 2014 SOL SELECT Accessing tables with SQL commands 38 9 SQL SELECT selects table rows and transfers them to the result set The SOL server places the data in the result set row by row The rows are numbered in ascending order starting from 0 This row number called the INDEX is used in the SOL commands Fetch and Update Enter the selection criteria in the SQL SELECT WHERE function This lets you restrict the number of rows to be transferred If you do not use this option all rows in the table are loaded Enter the sorting criteria in the SQL SELECT ORDER BY function Enter the column designation and the keyword for ascending descending order If you do not use this option the rows are placed in random order Lock out the selected rows for other applications with the SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE function Other applications can continue to read these rows but cannot change them We strongly recommend using this option if you are making changes to the table entries Empty result set If no rows match the selection criteria the SOL server returns a valid handle but no table entries saL EXECUTE gt Parameter no for result O parameter for the handle The SQL server returns the handle for the group of columns and rows selected with the current Select command With an error selection could not be executed the SOL server returns a 1 Code 0 identifies an invalid handle Data bank S
406. sed for a table instead of its path and file name Synonyms are specified by the machine manufacturer in the configuration data 222 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Accessing tables with SQL commands 38 9 A transaction In principle a transaction consists of the following actions Address the table file select rows and transfer them to the Tabelle sai select Result saLFetch 1234 result set ABC T set Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows SQL Commit SQL Update Conclude transaction If changes insertions were made the PERT E rows from the result set are placed in the table file Soe n Other actions are also necessary so that table entries can be edited Sane S0l Server Sten in an NC program and to ensure that other changes are not made to copies of the same table rows at the same time This results in the following transaction sequence 1 AQ parameter is specified for each column to be edited The Q parameter is assigned to a column it is bound SQL BIND 2 Address the table file select rows and transfer them to the result set In addition you define which columns are transferred to the result set SQL SELECT You can lock the selected rows Other processes can then read these rows but cannot change the table entries You should always lock the selected rows when you are going to make changes SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE
407. seeesseesensresrrnnnnnsnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnenn nennen nnana 167 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 173 Programming Q PAaram te ns iiieisccicseswscectivccasunescntiechatensuasncuanacsundusesdsusoiideelapetsumsnenencavesuaseoabossuens 189 Programming Miscellaneous functione cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeaeeeeeeeeseseaeaeeeeeeeeseenaes 251 Programming Special TUNMGH GINS sissies sivas eas dene sceveseetecasindedvnetscnmenrerteiinid emtavoastertesnduravenixinn 261 Manual operation and Setup cccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteess 279 Positioning with Manual Data Input cccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeneeeees 313 Test run and programi TUN nran ad ae aeaa aa a Eade aaa a EEEa ANE a 317 MOD functions saccadic E a ee cai 345 Gy cle fundamentals serieek a e aaa saan eased aioe ENEE ERASER 371 Drilling boring and thread cycleS s ssssesssesssnnnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nananana nnn 393 Fixed cycles Pocket milling stud Milling ccccceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeess 427 Cycles Coordinate Transformations cssssssssscssssssssssssssseceesesssessececeeesssssnseeceeseesnseneneeees 447 Cycles Special PUNCHOMS scccccsisioiinacscaecosiniotasctscnatecesvcs
408. selected program are A available and have sufficient remaining service life The TNC then compares the actual service life values in the tool table with the nominal values from the tool usage file After you have pressed the TOOL USAGE TEST soft key the TNC EJF rogram run full sequence Brae editing Gl Program run full sequence E RAAS BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 35 Y 50 Z 10 BLK FORM 0 2 X 120 Y 20 Z 0 TOOL CALL 2 Z 2000 F500 L Z 100 RO FMAX L X 30 Y 0 RO Tool usage test L Z 5 RO FMAX M APPR LCT X 10 oK e FPOL X 100 Y 0 SISA EONS displays the result of the tool usage test in a pop up window To 0 viN 09 21 close the pop up window press the ENT key SA l Eer 0 009 The TNC saves the tool usage times in a separate file with the extension pgmname H T DEP This file is not visible unless the n e machine parameter CfgPgmMgt dependentFiles is set to MANUAL The generated tool usage file contains the following information TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 161 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Column TOKEN Meaning m TOOL Tool usage time per TOOL CALL The entries are listed in chronological order TTOTAL Total usage time of a tool STOTAL Call of a subprogram the entries are listed in chronological order TIMETOTAL The total machining time of the NC program is entered in the WTIME column In the PATH column the TNC saves the path
409. ses to computer names is defined gt Select the Interfaces tab to enter the interface settings Setting Meaning Interface list List of the active Ethernet interfaces Select one of the listed interfaces via mouse or arrow keys m Activate button Activate the selected interface an X appears in the Active column Deactivate button Deactivate the selected interface in the Active column Configuration button Open the configuration menu Allow IP This function must be kept deactivated forwarding Only activate this function if external access via the second optional Ethernet interface of the TNC is necessary for diagnostic purposes Only do so after instruction by our Service Department 362 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Ethernet interface 14 11 gt Press the Configuration button to open the Configuration menu Setting Meaning Status Active interface Connection status of the selected Ethernet interface Name Name of the interface you are currently configuring Plug connection Number of the plug connection of this interface on the logic unit of the control Profile Here you can create or select a profile in which all settings shown in this window are stored HEIDENHAIN provides two standard profiles DHCP LAN Settings for the standard TNC Ethernet interface should work in a standard company network MachineNet Settings for the second optional
410. soft key gt Mark the desired editor gt Press the OK soft key to open the file Connecting removing a USB device gt Move the highlight to the left window ie gt To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS soft key gt Shift the soft key row Search for a USB device In order to remove the USB device move the highlight to the USB device gt Remove the USB device MS More information see USB devices on the TNC page 119 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 109 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Additional tools for management of external file types The additional tools enable you to display or edit various externally created file types on the TNC File types Description PDF files pdf page 110 Excel spreadsheets xls csv page 111 Internet files htm html page 112 ZIP archives zip page 113 Text files ASCII files e g txt ini page 114 Graphics files omp jpg gif png page 115 If you transfer files from a PC to the control by means of TNCremo you must have entered the file name extension pdf xls zip bmp gif jog and png in the list of the file types for binary transmission menu item Extras gt Configuration gt Mode in TNCremo Displaying PDF files To open PDF files directly on the TNC proceed as follows gt Call the file manager ee d gt Select the directo
411. splay screen The TNC is shipped with a 12 1 inch TFT flat panel display 1 Header When the TNC is on the selected operating modes are shown in the screen header the machining mode at the left and the programming mode at right The currently active operating mode is displayed in the larger box where the dialog prompts and TNC messages also appear 2 Soft keys In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft key row You can select these functions by pressing the keys immediately below them The thin bars immediately above the soft key row indicate the number of soft key rows that can be called with the keys to the right and left that are used to switch the soft keys The bar representing the active soft key row is highlighted Soft key selection keys Keys for switching the soft keys Setting the screen layout Shift key for switchover between machining and programming modes Soft key selection keys for machine tool builders Keys for switching the soft keys for machine tool builders 9 USB connection ow fk WwW on Setting the screen layout You select the screen layout yourself In the Programming mode of operation for example you can have the TNC show program blocks in the left window while the right window displays programming graphics You could also display the program structure in the right window instead or display only program blocks in one large window The available screen windows depend on the select
412. ss the machine START button The 3 D touch probe probes all required touch points in an automatic probing routine and calculates the effective ball tip radius If probing from opposite orientations is possible the TNC calculates the center offset gt Check the results change the values if required gt Press the OK soft key for the values to take effect gt Press the END soft key to terminate the calibrating function In order to be able to determine the ball tip center misalignment the TNC needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer Refer to your machine manual Displaying calibration values The TNC saves the effective length and effective radius of the e eae m touch probe in the tool table The TNC saves the ball tip center poea e al misalignment in the touch probe table in the CAL_OF1 principal Ez axis and CAL_OF2 minor axis columns You can display the values on the screen by pressing the TOUCH PROBE TABLE soft key CALLANG F FMAK orst seT_uj a o 00 1 SE at i Make sure that you have activated the correct tool number before using the touch probe regardless of whether you wish to run the touch probe cycle 2 in automatic mode or in the Manual Operation operating mode EES Ga Raz E E BEGIN END PAGE le laali m z amp 304 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversation
413. ssaesdscesssaesdnnessdeesdesssaeds sues KENEEN SE ARENAER ARRENE ESE EAEEREN ENERE 198 Abbreviations USCC c cccccccccccececeeece cee ceeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeaeceeeeeeeeececeeceeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseaees 199 8 7 Checking and changing Q parametere ccccccceccceceseneeceecseeeeeeecnseeneeeeesenaeesesesenaeeeesnseneeeeensenaees 200 PIOCCCUEGS 2 sis caccphateeetetcetea aaa E a a a a a E a eA R a E 200 8 8 Additional fUmCtiOns aese eneee eeaeee eheee EEEE eE Aae EAER EEA e AAEE EE EAA AEEA EEA AEEA EERE EAA a EEE Tree En AS 202 O A E A E E E T E E T E E A Gethas sactshatetosdetattes 202 FN 14 ERROR Displaying error MESSAGES ceeecsececceesceeeeeseeeeeeeccneeceeeeeseeseeeescntseeeeecesesaeeesenenatenes 203 FN 16 FPRINT Output of formatted texts and Q parameter ValUCS cccccceeeececeesteeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 207 FN 18 SYSREAD Reading system data cece ccceeceececceesseceeeeesseeceeessseeeeeessseeeeeesesseeeeeessseeseseesaees 211 FN 19 PLC Transter values t0 PECs sssccecseasnacecaethcniacavaga dhatexnbdunucesandh dnedca wage sites E EAE i eiia Eai 220 FN 20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC Synchronization cccccccccccecceesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeesecsaeeeeesessaeeseesssas 220 FN 29 PLC Transfer values to the PLC cece ccceccccecseeseeeeeeeseeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeseeesseeeseseaaes 221 ENS P7OEXPORT citaschttedcegsaitinesapdcacesdanatibassad Ei aaan Ekan EAA KaTa sadddesaashsebosandad daasadela
414. stettetness inaneanceseesst 332 PADDING ALON ewentearactcesannansenclmmcesnivetandenctacaeansceddensielanensdaadontnncnemead AAEE EE AEE AEA RE EAR ERREA 332 RUNNING a part program ce eececcccecececceceeecneeeeeeeeeeeceeecceceaeeaeeeeeeeeeeececeeceaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeesteeeeeeeeeeees 333 MA LONFENO EAM CHIMING one gastedesseea tetarectn suas E EEE E E 334 Moving the machine axes during an INTErrUPTiON 0 ee cee eeeeee eee ee eee ceeeeee cee eeaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteenseeeees 335 Resuming program run after an iINterrUPtiOn cccceccccccccesececcecsseseececcseeeeeesesenseeeesensssseeeseeesseeeseneneaees 335 Retraction after a power INTErrUPtiON ccceccccccseeceececcsseeeececeeeeeeeeseneeeeceseseseeeesensesseeesenssseeesentnaeeess 337 Any entry into program mid program Startup ecceeeeeeeeceeeececeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseneceeseeeeeeeeeees 339 Returning TO the CONTOUT secicscasinsacectnnadacenndaedinntdanndieniddn aai a eaa Anetia 341 13 6 Optional DIoek Ski orea E E ces cevpavsuceevdeenseisviemeeuneeys 342 Appl cCatO Nia uennntaen nane A aE AO EE a e ie EEE AER AR AEEA 342 nsering the character 22 aceiaieeodend ac deceit E E EA O AARNE 342 Erasing the 7 eharacten tisini aa i E r AE N E Ea AA N eDi 342 13 7 Optional program run interruption cccccccceseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseaeesesesseaeseeenseneeseeesseaeeeeessneaeeees 343 APPICatO Nissana a A a Ea E DEE E E AEE ERRE AA E n 343
415. structure window Changing the active window PROGRAM gt Display the program structure window Select the sects PGM SECTS screen display gt Switch the active window Press the CHANGE WINDOW soft key Inserting a structuring block in the program window gt Select the block after which the structuring block is to be inserted gt Press the SPEC FCT key PROGRAM gt Press the PROGRAMMING AIDS soft key gt Press the INSERT SECTION soft key or the key on an external ASCII keyboard gt Enter the structuring text gt If necessary change the structure depth with the soft key Selecting blocks in the program structure window If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by block the TNC at the same time automatically moves the corresponding NC blocks in the program window This way you can quickly skip large program sections 124 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 4 4 Calculator Operation The TNC features an integrated calculator with the basic mathematical functions gt Use the CALC key to show and hide the on line calculator gt Select the arithmetical functions The calculator is operated with short commands via soft key or through the alphabetic keyboard Mathematical function Command Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division
416. t Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 gt Feed rate for retraction Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate Q206 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO gt Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking Input range 0 000 to 99999 999 Input range 0 000 to 99999 999 gt Depth reference 0395 Select whether the entered depth is referenced to the tool tip or the cylindrical part of the tool If the TNC is to reference the depth to the cylindrical part of the tool the point angle of the tool must be defined in the T ANGLE column of the tool table TOOL T 0 Depth referenced to the tool tip 1 Depth referenced to the cylindrical part of the tool 406 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 BACK BORING Cycle 204 16 7 16 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 Cycle run This cycle allows holes to be bored from the underside of the workpiece Z T 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The TNC then orients the spindle to the 0 position with an oriented spindle stop and displaces the tool by the off center distance 3 The tool is then plunged into the already bored h
417. t Select the desired function by soft key e g incrementally increasing the simulation speed TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Graphics 13 1 319 Test run and program run 13 1 Graphics Overview Display modes In the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes as well as in the Test Run operating mode the TNC displays the following soft keys View Soft key Plan view 3 D view Projection in three planes Hl 0 D gt The position of the soft keys depends on the selected operating mode The Test Run operating mode additionally offers the following views View Volume view Volume view and tool paths Tool paths Limitations during program run The result of the simulation can be faulty if the TNC s computer is overloaded with complicated processing tasks 320 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Graphics 13 1 Plan view Select plan view m gt Press the plan view soft key Projection in three planes The simulation shows three sectional planes and a 3 D model Similar to a technical drawing Select projection in three planes mi gt Press the view in three planes soft key Move the sectional planes op gt Select the functions for shifting the sectional
418. t is programmed M141 becomes effective at the start of block 260 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming Special functions 10 1 Overview of special functions 10 1 Overview of special functions The TNC provides the following powerful special functions for a large number of applications Function Description Working with text files page 275 Working with freely definable tables page 265 Press the SPEC FCT and the corresponding soft keys to access further special functions of the TNC The following tables will give you an overview of which functions are available Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions gt Press the special functions key 5 Eee ere pee Programmini g Function Soft key Description Define program defaults page 263 DEFAULTS Functions for contour and CONTOUR page 263 qf Nee POINT 4 P point machining MACHINING Define different conversational ae page 264 4 conTouR functions T S Programming aids PROGRAM see page 121 MING AIDS After pressing the SPEC FCT key you can open the smartSelect selection window with the GOTO key The TNC displays a structure overview with all available functions You can rapidly navigate with the cursor or mouse and select functions in the tree diagram The TNC displays online help for the specific functions in the window on the right 262 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDEN
419. t key Page Assigning string parameters 237 STRING Chain linking string parameters 237 Converting a numerical value to a 238 string parameter woe Copy a substring from a string 239 parameter aes Formula string functions Soft key Page Converting a string parameter to a 240 numerical value ae Checking a string parameter 241 INSTR Finding the length of a string 242 parameter ata Compare alphabetic priority 243 STRCOMP When you use a STRING FORMULA the result of the arithmetic operation is always a string When you use the FORMULA function the result of the arithmetic operation is always a numeric value 236 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 String parameters 8 11 Assigning string parameters You have to assign a string variable before you use it Use the DECLARE STRING command to do so SPEC gt FCT gt PROGRAM FUNCTIONS STRING FUNCTIONS DECLARE gt STRING v Show the soft key row with special functions Select the menu for defining various plain language functions Select string functions Select the DECLARE STRING function Example NC block 37 DECLARE STRING QS10 WORKPIECE Chain linking string parameters With the concatenation operator string parameter string parameter you can make a chain of two or more string parameters SPEC gt FCT PROGRAM gt FUNCTIONS STRING FUNCTIONS STRING FORMULA gt v Show the soft ke
420. t key to delete the tagged files TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 107 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Renaming a file gt Move the highlight to the file you wish to rename RENAME gt Select the renaming function pecs ae gt Enter the new file name the file type cannot be changed gt To rename Press the OK soft key or the ENT key Sorting files gt Select the folder in which you wish to sort the files gt Select the SORT soft key gt Select the soft key with the corresponding display criterion 108 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with the file manager 3 4 Additional functions Protecting a file Canceling file protection gt Move the highlight to the file you want to protect gt To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS soft key PROTECT gt Enable file protection Press the PROTECT soft cl key The file is tagged with the protected symbol UNPROTECT gt To cancel file protection press the UNPROTECT soft key 4 zx Selecting the editor gt Move the highlight in the right window onto the file you want to open Re gt To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS soft key ae gt To select the editor with which to open the EDITOR selected file press the SELECT EDITOR
421. t mid program startup Press the MID PROGRAM STARTUP soft key gt Start up at N Enter the block number N at which the block scan should end gt Program Enter the name of the program containing block N gt Repetitions If block N is located in a program section repeat or in a subprogram that is to be run repeatedly enter the number of repetitions to be calculated in the block scan gt Start mid program startup Press the machine START button gt Contour approach see following section Entering a program with the GOTO key If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a program neither the TNC nor the PLC will execute any functions that ensure a safe start If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a subprogram m the TNC will skip the end of the subprogram LBL 0 m the TNC will reset function M126 Shorterpath traverse of rotary axes In such cases you must always use the mid program startup function 340 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Program run 13 5 Returning to the contour With the RESTORE POSITION function the TNC returns to the Exe rogram rainy ER sequence Brae editing workpiece contour in the following situations ees Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved 9 GYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNGIO F99 a 10 4 4 X 30 during a program interruption that was not perform
422. t permitted 1034 CYCL 211 not permitted 1035 Q220 too large 1036 Q222 must be greater than 0223 1037 Q244 must be greater than 0O 1038 Q245 must not equal 0246 1039 Angle range must be under 360 1040 Q223 must be greater than Q222 1041 Q214 0 not permitted 1042 Traverse direction not defined 1043 No datum table active 1044 Position error center in axis 1 1045 Position error center in axis 2 1046 Hole diameter too small 1047 Hole diameter too large 1048 Stud diameter too small 1049 Stud diameter too large 1050 Pocket too small rework axis 1 1051 Pocket too small rework axis 2 1052 Pocket too large scrap axis 1 1053 Pocket too large scrap axis 2 1054 Stud too small scrap axis 1 1055 Stud too small scrap axis 2 1056 Stud too large rework axis 1 1057 Stud too large rework axis 2 1058 TCHPROBE 425 length exceeds max 1059 TCHPROBE 425 length below min 1060 TCHPROBE 426 length exceeds max 1061 TCHPROBE 426 length below min 1062 TCHPROBE 430 diameter too large 1063 TCHPROBE 430 diameter too small 204 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Error number Text 1064 No measuring axis defined 1065 Tool breakage tolerance exceeded 1066 Enter Q247 unequal to 0 1067 Enter Q247 greater than 5 1068 Datum table 1069 Enter 0351 unequal to 0 1070 Thread depth too larg
423. t the Programming mode of operation gt Call the file manager gt Selecta file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key When you have opened the tool table you can edit the tool data by moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow keys or the soft keys You can overwrite the stored values or enter new values at any position Additional functions are illustrated in the table below 156 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tooldata 5 2 Editing functions for tool tables Soft key Select beginning of table oO m o H lt Select end of table m 4 D Select previous page in table Select next page in table Find the text or number Move to beginning of line Move to end of line Copy highlighted field FIELD Insert copied field PASTE FIELD Add the entered number of lines tools at the APPEND end of the table N LINES Adding a row with tool number for entering T LINE Delete current line tool EEUE LINE Sort the tools according to the content of a column SORT Show all drills in the tool table DRILL Show all cutters in the tool table CUTTER o o Cm ca bul f H H 4 UE EEE Ie lt m mo 6 Show all taps thread cutters in the tool table TAP THREAD CUTTER Show all touch probes in the tool table ee PROBE Exiting any other tool
424. t the TNC The error message is displayed in the header until it is cleared or replaced by a higherpriority error An error message that contains a program block number was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block Open the error window gt Press the ERR key The TNC opens the error window and displays all accumulated error messages Closing the error window gt Press the END soft key or gt Press the ERR key The TNC closes the error window TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 131 Programming Programming aids 4 6 Error messages Detailed error messages The TNC displays possible causes of the error and suggestions for solving the problem gt Open the error window gt Information on error causes and remedies Position the highlight on the error message and press the MORE INFO soft key The TNC opens a ll window with information on the error cause and corrective action gt Exit Info Press the MORE INFO soft key again Hau DELETE INTERNAL tosi i wone FILES FUNCTI INTERNAL INFO soft key The INTERNAL INFO soft key supplies information on the error message This information is only required if servicing is needed gt Open the error window T gt Detailed information about the error message Position the highlight on the error message and press the INTERNAL
425. t the tool was last inserted via TOOL LAST_USE CALL format specified internally Date yyyy mm dd time hh mm 152 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tool table Tool data required for automatic tool measurement Abbr CUT Inputs Number of teeth 99 teeth maximum Tooldata 5 2 Dialog Number of teeth LTOL Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Wear tolerance length RTOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Wear tolerance radius R2TOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R2 for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Wear tolerance Radius 2 DIRECT Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation Cutting direction M3 R_OFFS Tool radius measurement Tool offset between stylus center and tool center Default setting No value entered offset tool radius Tool offset radius L_OFFS LBREAK Tool length measurement Tool offset in addition to offsetToolAxis between upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool Default 0 Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detecti
426. t to use for the positioning movement e g X COORDINATES gt 10 Enter the coordinate of the end point e g 10 gt Confirm your entry with the ENT key ENT TOOL RADIUS COMP R R NO COMP gt Select the radius compensation here press the RO soft key the tool moves without compensation Feed rate F F MAX ENT gt 100 Enter the feed rate e g 100 mm min For programming in inches enter 100 for a feed rate of 10 inches per minute Ta gt Confirm your entry with the ENT key or gt Move at rapid traverse Press the F MAX soft key or gt Traverse with the feed rate defined in the TOOL Be CALL block Press the F AUTO soft key MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M gt Enter 3 miscellaneous function M3 Spindle ON gt The TNC ends this dialog with the ENT key ENT The program block window displays the following line 6 X 10 RO FMAX M3 EXprogram run full BAe roaranming Programming 170 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Tool movements 6 2 Capture actual position You can also generate a positioning block by using the actual position capture key gt In the Manual Operation mode move the tool to the position you want to capture gt Select the Programming mode of operation gt Select the program block after which you want to insert the block RN gt Press the actual position capture key for the TNC to generate an block gt Select the desired a
427. tTolerance The measuring tolerance remains constant regardless of the tool radius With very large tools however the feed rate for probing is reduced to zero The smaller you set the maximum permissible rotational speed maxPeriphSpeedMeas and the permissible tolerance measureTolerance1 the sooner you will encounter this effect probingFeedCalc VariableTolerance The measuring tolerance is adjusted relative to the size of the tool radius This ensures a sufficient feed rate for probing even with large tool radii The TNC adjusts the measuring tolerance according to the following table Tool radius Measuring tolerance Up to 30 mm measureTolerance1 30 to 60 mm 2 measureTolerance1 60 to 90 mm 3 measureTolerance1 90 to 120 mm 4 e measureTolerance1 probingFeedCalc ConstantFeed The feed rate for probing remains constant the error of measurement however rises linearly with the increase in tool radius Measuring tolerance r measureTolerance1 5 mm where r Active tool radius in mm measureTolerance1 Maximum permissible error of measurement 478 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Entries in the tool table TOOL T Abbr CUT Inputs Number of teeth 20 teeth maximum Fundamentals 20 4 Dialog Number of teeth LTOL Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L
428. table into another directory for data backup Lines that were written by your machine tool builder are also always write protected in the copied tables You therefore cannot edit them Never change the number of lines in the copied tables That could cause problems when you want to reactivate the table To activate the preset table copied to another directory you have to copy it back to the directory TNC table There are several methods for saving datums and or basic rotations in the preset table m Via touch probe cycles in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes Manual entry see description below The line O in the preset table is write protected In line 0 the TNC always saves the datum that you most recently set manually via the axis keys or via soft key If the datum set manually is active the TNC displays the text PR MAN 0 in the status display 288 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe Manually saving the datums in the preset table In order to save datums in the preset table proceed as follows a gt Select the Manual Operation mode Xt gt Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the workpiece surface or position the measuring dial correspondingly Y PRESET gt Display the preset table The TNC opens the Gs preset table and sets the cursor to the active table row ae Select functions for entering the
429. tarting point in X absolute Coordinate of the H8 starting point of the pattern in the X axis gt Starting point in Y absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the pattern in the Y axis gt Spacing of machining positions X incremental Distance between the machining positions in the X direction You can enter a positive or negative value SS Ee E E gt Spacing of machining positions Y incremental Distance between the machining positions in the Y direction You can enter a positive or negative value gt Number of columns Total number of columns in the pattern gt Number of lines Total number of rows in the pattern gt Rot position of entire pattern absolute Angle of rotation by which the entire pattern is rotated around the entered starting point Reference axis Reference axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value gt Rotary pos ref ax Angle of rotation around which only the reference axis of the machining plane is distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value gt Rotary pos minor ax Angle of rotation around which only the minor axis of the machining plane is distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value gt Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin
430. te for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO gt Feed rate for back boring 0254 Traversing speed of the tool during back boring in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Dwell time 0255 Dwell time in seconds at the top of the bore hole Input range 0 to 3600 000 NC blocks gt Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 absolute 11 CYCL DEF 204 BACK BORING Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 200 2 3 SET UP CLEARANCE 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 a DEDNE ne gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Uws DEPT O i l _ COUNTERBORE Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Q250 20 MATERIAL THICKNESS Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Q251 3 5 OFF CENTER DISTANCE gt Disengaging direction 1 2 3 4 Q214 Determine Q252 15 TOOL EDGE HEIGHT the direction in which the TNC displaces the tool by the off center distance after spindle orientation Q253 750 F PRE POSITIONING programming 0 is not allowed Q254 200 F COUNTERBORING 1 Retract the tool in minus direction of the principle Q255 0 DWELL TIME axis 2 Retract the tool in minus direction of the minor Q203 20 SURFACE COORDINATE axis Q204 50 2ND SET UP 3 Retract the tool in plus direction of the principle CLEARAN
431. te while ProgramMmMing cccccccceeccecececeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesesccccueaeeeeeeeeeerteeseeneesaees 414 Cycle PALAMETOLS eee cece cccceeeececeeceneeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeecaeeeeeesaeeeeesssaeeeeeeseaeeeeeesseeeeeeseaeeeeesssteeseeeeaees 415 16 10 Programmingy Examples aarre aa aeaaee AAE E ERARE AAEE EE AALE E AAEE AREARE 417 Example Drilling CYCIGS sissien snr e aE E a a E nR R e NEA DIE NRI 417 Example Using drilling cycles in connection with PATTERN DEF ssssssssssisrisisesreeserrrrrrrsrennrerrerrn 418 16 11 TAPPING with a floating tap holder Cycle 206 cccscccssscesseessseeeesseeeseseeesseeesseneesssaeeseees 420 Oo NO EBE EE EE EE E A E EE AEE E A 420 Please note while programMmMing s sssssssiisississstttttttttttn titat tt EEEE EEEAEEEENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EAEEren 420 Peke E E A A E A A E NA E ENE rveebandabaens 421 16 12RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder Cycle 207 ccccccccsseccsssceecsseeesereeecsseeseeneeeeees 422 CV CIS O e E E E 422 Please note while Program mMing ccccceccecceeeeeceeceeceeeeeeceeecceeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeteeeccetegeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneneaees 422 CY CIE DAlAIMGLO aa sia penne seioethnanvieasahndp biduhunan A 423 16 13ProgramminguExamples ici scci 2 cere tes tans svovyck se snes ctenttsctenss asccnceenccrecaavessezazenetecvectenunetteerstasczcacnsenaeetns 424 Example Thread UMN 2c wncsdacandenetgadiceseedenedtemniaadin on E E
432. tes of movements as they are dimensioned in the workpiece drawing To allow the TNC to calculate the tool center path i e the tool compensation you must also enter the length and radius of each tool you are using Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with TOOL DEF or separately in a tool table In a tool table you can also enter additional data for the specific tool The TNC will consider all the data entered for the tool when executing the part program Tool number tool name Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 32767 If you are working with tool tables you can also enter a tool name for each tool Tool names can have up to 32 characters The tool number 0 is automatically defined as the zero tool with the length L 0 and the radius R 0 In tool tables tool TO should also be defined with L 0 and R 0 Tool length L You should always enter the tool length L as an absolute value Z based on the tool reference point Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly 148 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Delta values for lengths and radii Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool A positive delta value describes a tool oversize DL DR DR2 gt 0 If you are programming the machining data with an allowance enter the oversize value in the TOOL CALL block of the part program A negative delta value describe
433. th 301 Measure the radius and the center 302 offset using a calibration ring Measure the radius and the center 302 offset using a stud or a calibration pin Ae wo 00 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe Touch Probe Functions 11 6 software option 17 Calibrating the effective length HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The effective length of the touch probe is always referenced to the tool datum The machine tool builder usually defines the spindle tip as the tool datum gt Set the datum in the spindle axis such that for the machine tool table Z 0 gt Select the calibration function for the touch probe gl length Press the CAL L soft key The TNC opens a menu window with input fields gt Datum for length Enter the height of the ring gauge gt New cal spindle angle Spindle angle that is used for the calibration The TNC uses CAL_ANG from the touch probe table as a default value If you change the value the TNC saves the value to the touch probe table during calibration gt Move the touch probe to a position just above the ring gauge gt To change the traverse direction if necessary press a soft key or an arrow key gt To probe the upper surface of the ring gauge press the machine START button gt Check the results change the va
434. thErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves away from the edge of the hole Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation Set the angle so that the tool tip is parallel to a coordinate axis During retraction the TNC automatically takes an active rotation of the coordinate system into account 402 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Cycle parameters 202 gt Set up clearance 0200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during boring at mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retractin
435. the ENT key The TNC then initiates the cycle dialog as described above Example NC blocks 7 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 3 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 25 DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 375 Cycle fundamentals 15 3 Working with fixed cycles Calling a cycle Prerequisites The following data must always be programmed before a cycle call BLK FORM for graphic display needed only for test graphics Tool call m Direction of spindle rotation M functions M3 M4 m Cycle definition CYCL DEF For some cycles additional prerequisites must be observed They are detailed in the descriptions for each cycle The following cycles become effective automatically as soon as they are defined in the part program These cycles cannot and must not be called Coordinate transformation cycles m Cycle 9 DWELL TIME m All touch probe cycles You can call all other cycles with the functions described as follows Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL The CYCL CALL function calls the most recently defined fixed cycle once The starting point of the cycle is the position that was programmed last before the CYCL CALL block gt To program the cycle call press the CYCL CALL key gt Press the CYCL CALL M soft key to ent
436. this function you can set the datum at the center of bore holes circular pockets cylinders studs circular islands etc Inside circle The TNC probes the inside wall of a circle in all four coordinate axis y directions For incomplete circles circular arcs you can choose the appropriate probing direction gt Position the touch probe approximately in the center of the circle PROBING gt Select the touch probe function Press the PROBING CC soft key gt Select the probing direction or press the soft key for the automatic probing routine gt Probing Press the machine START button The touch probe probes the inside wall of the circle in the selected direction If you are not using the automatic probing routine you need to repeat this procedure After the third probing operation you can have the TNC calculate the center four touch points are recommended gt Terminate the probing procedure and switch to the evaluation menu Press the EVALUATE soft key gt Datum In the menu window enter both coordinates of the circle center confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 298 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 299 gt Terminate the probing function Press the END soft key The TNC needs only three touch points to calculate outside or inside circles e g
437. tions software option 17 Selecting touch probe cycles gt Select the Manual Operation or El Handwheel mode of operation TOUCH gt Select the touch probe functions by pressing ka the TOUCH PROBE soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys see overview table PROBING gt Select the touch probe cycle by pressing the se appropriate soft key for example PROBING POS for the TNC to display the associated menu When you select a manual probing function the TNC opens a form displaying all data required The content of the forms varies depending on the respective function You can also enter values in some of the fields Use the arrow keys to move to the desired input field You can position the cursor only in fields that can be edited Fields that cannot be edited appear dimmed 296 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Using 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software option 17 11 5 Recording measured values from the touch probe cycles The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this function Refer to your machine manual Refer to your machine manual After executing any selected touch probe cycle the TNC displays the soft key WRITE LOG TO FILE If you press this soft key the TNC will record the current values determined in the active touch probe cycle If you store the measuring results the TNC creates the text file TC
438. touch probe to the orientation angle Spindle angle for calibration before calibration or probing if orientation is possible F Feed rate at which the TNC is to probe the workpiece Probing feed rate mm min FMAX Feed rate at which the touch probe pre positions or is Rapid traverse in probing cycle positioned between the measuring points mm min DIST If the stylus is not deflected within the defined path the Maximum measuring path mm TNC outputs an error message SET_UP In SET_UP you define how far from the defined or Set up clearance mm calculated touch point the TNC is to pre position the touch probe The smaller the value you enter the more exactly you must define the touch point position In many touch probe cycles you can also define a set up clearance that is added to the SET_UP machine parameter F_PREPOS Defining speed with pre positioning Pre positioning at rap traverse ees ENT NO ENT Pre positioning with speed from FMAX FMAX_PROBE Pre positioning with machine rapid traverse FMAX_MACHINE TRACK To increase measuring accuracy you can use TRACK Orient touch probe cycles ON to have an infrared touch probe oriented in the programmed probe direction before every probe process In this way the stylus is always deflected in the same direction ON Perform spindle tracking OFF Do not perform spindle tracking TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Yes ENT No NOENT 475
439. transfer rate in baud Selection Has to match the setting in TNCserver Data transmission protocol BLOCKWISE Data bits in each transferred 7 bits character Type of parity checking EVEN Number of stop bits 1 stop bit Specify type of handshake RTS_CTS File system for file operations FE1 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 357 MOD functions 14 10 Setting up data interfaces Setting the operating mode of the external device fileSystem gt The functions Transfer all files Transfer selected file and Transfer directory are not available in the FE2 and FEX modes External device Operating Icon mode PC with HEIDENHAIN data LSV2 transfer software TNCremo HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units FE1 Non HEIDENHAIN devices such FEX as printers scanners punchers PC without TNCremo E fio 358 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Setting up data interfaces 14 10 Data transfer software For transfer of files to and from the TNC we recommend using the HEIDENHAIN TNCremo data transfer software With TNCremo data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via the serial interface or the Ethernet interface You can download the current version of TNCremo free of charge from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase www heidenhain de lt Documentation and Information gt lt Software gt lt Download area gt lt PC Soft
440. tribute Datum TA Protokol you switch the mode of operation on the TNC or when you select the file manager via the PGM MGT key 1596 06 04 99 15 39 42 Schnitstele 06 04 99 15 39 40 1 373 02 09 97 14 51 30 Insgesamt fE 360 02 09 97 14 51 30 Maskit 8 vez 1004 06 04 99 15 39 44 ao 06 04 99 15 39 44 06 04 99 15 3946 Baudrate Auto Detect Check whether the TNC is connected to the correct serial port on 2 a your PC or to the network BaH 3382 0895153940 Once you have started TNCremo you will see a list of all files that are stored in the active directory in the upper section of the main window 1 Using lt File gt lt Change directory gt you can select any drive or another directory on your PC If you want to control data transfer from the PC establish the connection with your PC in the following manner gt Select lt File gt lt Setup connection gt TNCremo now receives the file and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the bottom left of the main window 2 gt To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC select the file in the TNC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the PC window 1 gt To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC select the file in the PC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the TNC window 2 If you want to control data transfer from the TNC establish the connection with your
441. tum shift 454 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 DATUM SETTING Cycle 247 18 4 18 4 DATUM SETTING Cycle 247 Effect With the DATUM SETTING cycle you can activate as the new datum a preset defined in a preset table After a DATUM SETTING cycle definition all of the coordinate inputs and datum shifts absolute and incremental are referenced to the new preset Status display In the status display the TNC shows the active preset number behind the datum symbol Please note before programming When activating a datum from the preset table the TNC resets the datum shift mirroring scaling factor and axis specific scaling factor If you activate preset number 0 line 0 then you activate the datum that you last set in the Manual Operation or El Handwheel operating mode Cycle 247 is not functional in Test Run mode Cycle parameters 247 gt Number for datum Enter the number of the NC blocks a de datum to be activated from the preset table Input 13 CYCL DEF 247 DATUM SETTING range 0 to 65535 Q339 4 DATUM NUMBER TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 455 Cycles Coordinate Transformations 18 5 MIRRORING Cycle 8 18 5 MIRRORING Cycle 8 Effect The TNC can machine the mirror image of a contour in the working plane The mirroring cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effecti
442. tum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc directly with a cycle definition Calla datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from a datum table Cycle parameters gt Datum shift Enter the coordinates of the new NC blocks datum Absolute values are referenced to the 13 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM manually set workpiece datum Incremental values are always referenced to the datum which was last 14 CYCL DEF 7 1 X 60 valid this can be a datum which has already been 15 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 40 shifted Input range Up to six NC axes each from 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 SSSR TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 449 Cycles Coordinate Transformations 18 3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 18 3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 Effect Datum tables are used for m Frequently recurring machining sequences at various locations on the workpiece m Frequent use of the same datum shift Within a program you can either program datum points directly in the cycle definition or call them from a datum table Resetting m Calla datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from a datum table m Execute a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc directly with a cycle definition Status displays In the additional status display the following data from the datum table are shown Name and path of the active datum table m Active datum number Comment from the DOC colum
443. ud rate machine parameter baudRateLsv2 You can also specify another type of transmission interface The settings described below are therefore effective only for the respective newly defined interface Application To set up a data interface press the MOD key Enter the code number 123 In the CfgSeriallnterface user parameter you can enter the following settings Setting the RS 232 interface Open the RS232 folder The TNC then displays the following settings Setting the BAUD RATE baudRate You can set the BAUD RATE data transfer speed from 110 to 115 200 baud TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 FUNCTIONS 355 MOD functions 14 10 Setting up data interfaces Setting the protocol protocol The data transfer protocol controls the data flow of a serial transmission comparable to MP5030 of the iTNC 530 Here the BLOCKWISE setting designates a form of data transfer where data is transmitted in blocks This is not to be confused with the blockwise data reception and simultaneous blockwise processing by older TNC contouring controls Blockwise reception of an NC program and simultaneous machining of the program is not possible Data transmission protocol Selection Standard data transmission transmission STANDARD line by line Packet based data transfer BLOCKWISE Transmission without protocol only RAW_DATA characterb
444. ulation of the kinematics axis specific She Only use this function if your machine has a rotary table and you want to set the datum to the center of the rotary table by entering 0 This function only saves the datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired value in the pop up window If inch display is active Enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm Write the currently active datum to a Save selectable line in the table This function saves the datum in all axes and then activates the appropriate row in the table automatically If inch display is active Enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm 290 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe 11 4 Editing the preset table Editing function in table mode Soft key o m Q H 2 Select beginning of table Select end of table Select previous page in table Select next page in table Select the functions for preset entry E PRESET Activate the datum of the selected line of the ACTIVATE preset table PRESET Add the entered number of lines to the end of APPEND the table 2nd soft key row N LINES Copy the highlighted field 2nd soft key row copy FIELD Insert the copied field 2nd soft key row PASTE FIELD Reset the selected line The TNC enters
445. un E ary J ING 128 2_128 h 0 2 20 1 4 onc 07 24 staat 53 First Steps with the TNC 128 1 4 Graphically testing the first part Choosing the program you want to test gt Press the PGM MGT key The TNC opens the file management Last gt Press the LAST FILES soft key The TNC opens a pop up window with the most recently selected files gt Use the arrow keys to select the program that you want to test Load with the ENT key Further information on this topic m Selecting a program see Working with the file manager page 98 Selecting the screen layout and the view gt Press the key for selecting the screen layout The TNC shows all available alternatives in the soft key row PROGRAM gt Press the PROGRAM GRAPHICS soft key In the left half of the screen the TNC shows the program in the right half it shows the workpiece blank FURTHER gt Press the FURTHER VIEW OPTIONS soft key gt Shift the soft key row and select the desired view by soft key The TNC features the following views Soft key Function Plan view Cl Projection in three planes r 3 D view Further information on this topic m Graphic functions see page 318 m Running a test run see Test Run page 330 54 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Graphically testing the first part 1 4 Starting th
446. ure in order to avoid problems regarding the overwriting of transfer parameters that are used more than once gt Asa rule always program DEFactive cycles before CALLactive cycles gt If you do want to program a DEF active cycle between the definition and call of a CALLactive cycle do it only if there is no common use of specific transfer parameters 374 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Working with fixed cycles 15 3 Defining a cycle using soft keys gt The soft key row shows the available groups of gt ons Gl Programming g cycles TNG no_prog 1 h 7 3 any gt Press the soft key for the desired group of cycles for example DRILLING for the drilling cycles 252 gt Select the cycle e g DRILLING The TNC initiates the programming dialog and asks for all required input values At the same time a graphic of the aonni input parameters is displayed in the right screen E window gt Enter all parameters requested by the TNC and conclude each entry with the ENT key gt The TNC ends the dialog when all required data has been entered I A NDARD VALUES Defining a cycle using the GOTO function gt The soft key row shows the available groups of cycles gt The TNC shows an overview of cycles in a pop up window gt Choose the desired cycle with the arrow keys or gt Enter the cycle number and confirm it with
447. ve in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active mirrored axes are shown in the additional status display m f you mirror only one axis the machining direction of the tool is reversed except in SL cycles f you mirror two axes the machining direction remains the same The result of the mirroring depends on the location of the datum m If the datum lies on the contour to be mirrored the element simply flips over m If the datum lies outside the contour to be mirrored the element also jumps to another location Resetting Program the MIRROR IMAGE cycle once again with NO ENT Please note while programming gt If you mirror only one axis the machining direction is reversed during contour milling If the machining direction is defined in the cycle it is retained Cycle parameters TR gt Mirrored axis Enter the axis to be mirrored You NC blocks c3 can mirror all axes except for the spindle axis 79 CYCL DEF 8 0 MIRROR IMAGE including rotary axes with the exception of the spindle axis and its associated auxiliary axis You can 80 CYCL DEF 8 1 X Y Z enter up to three axes Input range Up to three NC axes X Y Z U V W A B C 456 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 18 6 SCALING Cycle 11 Effect The TNC can increase or reduce the size of contours within a program enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize allowances SCALING becomes e
448. versational Programming 5 2014 String parameters 8 11 Checking a string parameter The INSTR function checks whether a string parameter is contained in another string parameter gt Select O parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function gt Enter the number of the Q parameter for the result and confirm with the ent key The TNC saves in the parameter the position at which the sought after text begins lt gt Shift the soft key row gt Select the function for checking a string parameter gt Enter the number of the OS parameter in which the text to be searched for is saved Confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number of the OS parameter to be searched and confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number of the place starting from which the TNC is to search the substring and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Remember that the first character of a text sequence starts internally with the zeroth place If the TNC cannot find the required substring it will save the total length of the string to be searched counting starts at 1 in the result parameter If the substring is found in more than one place the TNC returns the first place at which it finds the substring Example Search through OS10 for the text saved in parameter QS13 Begin the search at the third place 37 Q50 INSTR SRC_QS10 SEA_QS13 BEG2
449. verses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive diameter or depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 395 Drilling boring and thread cycles 16 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 Cycle parameters 240 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance ea between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Select depth diameter 0 1 Q343 Select whether centering is based on the entered diameter or depth If the TNC is to center based on the entered diameter the point angle of the tool must be defined in the T ANGLE column of the tool table TOOL T 0 Centering based on the entered depth 1 Centering based on the entered diameter gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and centering bottom tip y of centering taper Only effective if Q343 0 is defined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Diameter algebraic sign 0344 Centering oe diameter Only effective if O343 1 is defined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of 20 the tool during centering in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that 30 80 a the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600
450. ware gt lt TNCremo gt System requirements for TNCremo PC with 486 processor or higher m Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 operating systems 16 MB RAM 5 MB free memory space on your hard disk m An available serial interface or connection to the TCP IP network Installation under Windows gt Start the SETUPEXE installation program with the file manager Explorer gt Follow the setup program instructions Starting TNCremo under Windows gt Click on lt Start gt lt Programs gt lt HEIDENHAIN Applications gt lt TNCremo gt When you start TNCremo for the first time TNCremo automatically tries to set up a connection with the TNC TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 359 MOD functions 14 10 Setting up data interfaces Data transfer between the TNC and TNCremo TNCremoNT Datei Ansicht Extras Hil Before you transfer a program from the TNC to the PC you must make absolutely sure that you have already saved the program currently selected on the TNC The TNC saves changes automatically when a e elx ele ala ASCREENSATNC TNC430 BA KLAR TEXT dumppgmsj eee Name Grobe Atibwef Datum _ T ey p Dateistatus OZTCHPRNT A 79 04 03 97 11 34 06 Fret 899 MByte 1H 813 04 03 97 11 34 08 412 02 09 97 14 51 30 384 02 09 97 14 51 30 V TNC NK SCRDUMP eree Grebe At
451. when retracting gt Activate retraction Press the RETRACT soft key gt Retraction Retract the tool with the machine axis keys or the electronic handwheel Axis key Z Retraction from the workpiece Axis key Z Moving into the workpiece Teee gt Exit retraction Return to the original soft key level e gt End the Retraction mode Press the END RETRACTION RETRACTION soft key The TNC checks whether the Retraction mode can be ended If necessary follow the dialog gt Answer the confirmation request If the tool was not correctly retracted press the NO soft key If the tool was correctly retracted press the YES soft key The TNC hides the retraction dialog gt Initialize the machine if required scan the reference points gt Establish the desired machine condition if required reset the tilted working plane 338 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Program run 13 5 Any entry into program mid program startup EXeroaram run full sequence Brest run Gl Program run full sequence The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled and Sacer SRS col ame naan adapted by the machine tool builder Refer to your ie a T machine manual Refer to your machine manual With the RESTORE POS AT N feature block scan you can start a part program at any block you desire The TNC scans the program blocks up to that point Machining can be graphically simulated If you have interrupt
452. while the word is highlighted gt To accept the change press the END key If you want to insert a word press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly until the desired dialog appears You can then enter the desired value Looking for the same words in different blocks gt Select a word in a block Press the arrow key repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired word gt Select a block with the arrow keys The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one you selected previously If you have started a search in a very long program the TNC shows a progress display window You then have the option of canceling the search via soft key TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 91 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening and entering programs Marking copying cutting and inserting program sections The TNC provides certain functions for copying program sections within an NC program or into another NC program see the table below _ O BEGIN PGM 2_128 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Yeo Z 20 Bi Y 100 vanua operation Be rooraming EAO a Programming kiii To copy a program section proceed as follows gt Select the soft key row containing the marking functions gt Select the first block of the section you wish to copy gt Mark the first block Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key The TNC then highlights the block and displays
453. workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Guide value 4x pitch gt Thread depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate F 0206 Traversing speed of the tool during tapping Input range 0 to 99999 999 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO gt Dwell time at bottom 0211 Enter a value between 0 and 0 5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during retraction Input range 0 to 3600 0000 NC blocks gt Coordinate of workpiece surface 0203 absolute 25 CYCL DEF 206 TAPPING NEW Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input T E range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Input range Oe Ee Ee 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Q201 20 DEPTH gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision PLNGNG between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Q211 0 25 DWELL TIME AT Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Input range O to BOTTOM 99999 9999 Q203 25 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE The feed rate is calculated as follows F S x p F Feed rate mm min S Spindle speed rpm p Thread pitch mm Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop button the TNC will display a soft key with which you can retract the tool TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 421 Drilling b
454. xis e g by pressing the ACTL POS X soft key The TNC adopts the current position and ends the dialog TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 171 Programming Tool movements 6 2 Tool movements Example Linear movement 5 95 72 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 71 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 7 1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a machining sequence once and then run it as often as necessary Label The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are marked in a part program by labels LBL A LABEL is identified by a number between 1 and 65535 or by a name you define Each LABEL number or LABEL name can be set only once in the program with the LABEL SET key The number of label names you can enter is only limited by the internal memory once gt Do not use a label number or label name more than Label O LBL 0 is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired 174 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 72 Subprograms Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to calling a subprogram CALL LBL The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end LBL 0
455. y character Setting data bits dataBits By setting the data bits you define whether a character is transmitted with 7 or 8 data bits Check parity parity The parity bit helps the receiver to detect transmission errors The parity bit can be formed in three different ways No parity NONE There is no error detection m Even parity EVEN Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an odd number of set bits m Odd parity ODD Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an even number of set bits Setting the stop bits stopBits The start bit and one or two stop bits enable the receiver to synchronize to every transmitted character during serial data transmission 356 TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 Setting up data interfaces 14 10 Setting handshaking flowControl By handshaking two devices control data transfer between them A distinction is made between software handshaking and hardware handshaking No data flow checking NONE Handshaking is not active m Hardware handshaking RTS_CTS Transmission stop is active through RTS Software handshaking XON_XOFF Transmission stop is active through DC3 XOFF Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC software Enter the following settings in the user parameters seriallnterfaceRS232 definition of data blocks for the serial ports RS232 Parameters Data
456. y row with special functions Select the menu for defining various plain language functions Select string functions gt Select the STRING FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the concatenated string Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the string parameter in which the first substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key The TNC displays the concatenation symbol gt Confirm your entry with the ENT key Enter the number of the string parameter in which the second substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key Repeat the process until you have selected all the required substrings Conclude with the END key TNC 128 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 5 2014 237 Programming Q Parameters 8 11 String parameters Example QS10 is to include the complete text of QS12 QS13 and QS14 37 QS10 QS12 QS13 QS14 Parameter contents QS12 Workpiece QS13 Status QS14 Scrap QS10 Workpiece Status Scrap Converting a numerical value to a string parameter With the TOCHAR function the TNC converts a numerical value to a string parameter This enables you to chain numerical values with string variables gt Show the soft key row with special functions FCT areas gt Select the menu for defining various plain FUNCTIONS language functions ae gt Select string functions FUNCTIONS oe gt Select the STRING FORMULA function

TNC 128 - User's Manual HEIDENHAIN

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents